3BSE036351-600 - en AC 800M 6.0 Controller Hardware

AC 800M
Controller Hardware
System Version 6.0
Power and productivity

for a better world TM
AC 800M
Controller Hardware
System Version 6.0

NOTICE
This document contains information about one or more ABB products and may include a
description of or a reference to one or more standards that may be generally relevant to
the ABB products. The presence of any such description of a standard or reference to a
standard is not a representation that all of the ABB products referenced in this document
support all of the features of the described or referenced standard. In order to determine
the specific features supported by a particular ABB product, the reader should consult the
product specifications for the particular ABB product.
ABB may have one or more patents or pending patent applications protecting the intel-
lectual property in the ABB products described in this document.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that
may appear in this document.
In no event shall ABB be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential
damages of any nature or kind arising from the use of this document, nor shall ABB be
liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of any software or hard-
ware described in this document.
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written per-
mission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor used
for any unauthorized purpose.
The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license. This
product meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and in Low Volt-
age Directive 2006/95/EC.
TRADEMARKS
All rights to copyrights, registered trademarks, and trademarks reside with their respec-
tive owners.
Copyright 2003-2014 by ABB.

All rights reserved.
Release: August 2014

Document number: 3BSE036351-600
Table of Contents
About This User Manual

General ............................................................................................................................25
User Manual Conventions ...............................................................................................25
Feature Pack .........................................................................................................26
Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons................................................................26
Terminology.....................................................................................................................27
Applicable Specifications ................................................................................................30
EUROPEAN UNION DIRECTIVE COMPLIANCE .........................................30
UL LISTING ........................................................................................................30
TV Approval .....................................................................................................30
Released User Manuals and Release Notes.....................................................................31
Section 1 - Introduction
Product Overview ............................................................................................................33
AC 800M General .............................................................................................33
PM8xx/TP830 Processor Unit General .............................................................37
PM891 Processor Unit General.........................................................................44
PM891/PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit Redundancy.........................................51
AC 800M High Integrity ......................................................................................54
Control Software ..................................................................................................55
Ethernet Address for PM8xx (Except PM891) ....................................................56
Ethernet Address for PM891................................................................................58
AC 800M Controller Key Features ..............................................................................60
Product Release History ..................................................................................................61
Section 2 - Installation
3BSE036351-600 5
Table of Contents
Site Planning ................................................................................................................... 63

Site Selection and Building Requirements .......................................................... 63
Cables ............................................................................................................ 66
Power Supply ....................................................................................................... 67
Enclosures ............................................................................................................ 68
Mounting AC 800M Units onto DIN-Rail ...................................................................... 69
Mounting on metal sheet...................................................................................... 70
Prefabricated aluminum profile ........................................................................... 71
Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Single Configuration............................ 82
Installing PM891 in Single Configuration ...................................................................... 91
Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Redundant Configuration..................... 94
Installing the PM891 Processor Unit in Redundant Configuration ................................ 98
Installing the CEX-Bus without BC810/BC820 ........................................................... 101
Installing the CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit BC810/TP857 ....................................... 101
Installing the CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit BC820/TP850 ....................................... 108
Cables and Connectors....................................................................................... 110
Installing SM810/TP855 ............................................................................................... 115
Installing SM811/TP868 or SM812/TP868 .................................................................. 118
Installing the RS-232C Interface, CI853/TP853 ........................................................... 122
Installing the PROFIBUS DP Interface, CI854/CI854A/CI854B/TP854..................... 123
Installing the MasterBus 300 Interface, CI855/TP853 ................................................. 126
Installing the S100 I/O Interface, CI856/TP856 ........................................................... 127
Installing the INSUM Interface, CI857/TP853 ............................................................. 128
Installing the DriveBus Interface, CI858/TP858 .......................................................... 129
Installing the FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet Interface, CI860/TP860130
Installing the TRIO Fieldbus Interface CI862 .............................................................. 131
Unit to Baseplate Alpha Code Lock .................................................................. 131
Bus Termination................................................................................................. 131
Installing the Satt I/O Units and CI865 Module ........................................................... 133
Installing the Modbus TCP Interface CI867/TP867 ..................................................... 134
Ethernet Twisted Pair Connection ..................................................................... 134
Installing the IEC 61850 Interface CI868 ..................................................................... 135
6 3BSE036351-600
Table of Contents
Installing the AF 100 Interface CI869...........................................................................135

Installing the PROFINET IO Interface CI871...............................................................136
Installing the MOD5 Interface CI872............................................................................136
Installing the EtherNet/IP Interface CI873....................................................................137
Installing the ModuleBus for PM8xx ............................................................................138
Installing the ModuleBus for PM891 ............................................................................139
Installing the SD83x Power Supply ..............................................................................140
Installing the Mains Breaker Unit .................................................................................141
Installing the SS823/SS832 Voting Unit .......................................................................143
Installing the SB821 External Battery Unit...................................................................150
Installing the SB822 Rechargeable External Battery Unit ............................................151
Installation of I/O Units.................................................................................................152
Installation in Cabinets ..................................................................................................152
Mounting Dimensions for Proper Ventilation ...............................................................156
Section 3 - Configuration
General Information ......................................................................................................157
Connecting Control Builder ..........................................................................................158
Connection to a Control Network..................................................................................159
Communication Possibilities .........................................................................................160
Controller IP Addresses .....................................................................................163
I/O Systems ...................................................................................................................164
Drive System .................................................................................................................173
Power Supply System....................................................................................................178
Powering Units in the Cabinet ...........................................................................179
Powering Field Equipment outside the Cabinet.................................................179
Powering from an External Source ....................................................................181
Section 4 - Operation
AC 800M Controller (PM8xx) ......................................................................................185
Start-up ..........................................................................................................................188
Start-up in Redundant Configuration (CEX Bus Considerations) .....................188
Start Modes....................................................................................................................189
3BSE036351-600 7
Table of Contents
Automatic Switch-Over to Backup CPU ...................................................................... 190

Verification of Satisfactory AC 800M Operation ......................................................... 191
Verification of Single CPU ................................................................................ 191
Verification of Redundant CPU ......................................................................... 194
Section 5 - Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Frequency Schedule............................................................... 197
Replacing the Battery .................................................................................................... 198
Internal Battery .................................................................................................. 198
SB821 External Battery Unit ............................................................................. 201
SB822 Rechargeable External Battery Unit ...................................................... 203
Online Replacement of Unit.......................................................................................... 204
Exchange of CPU in Redundant Configuration without BC810/BC820 ...................... 205
Exchange of CPU in Redundant Configuration with BC810/BC820 ........................... 206
Exchanging Defect RCU Link Cables Online .............................................................. 208
In Configuration with BC810 ............................................................................ 208
In Configuration with BC820 ............................................................................ 208
In Configuration without BC810 ....................................................................... 208
Exchanging Defect BC820 TK857V0003 Cable............................................... 209
Corrective Maintenance Procedures.............................................................................. 210
Fault-Finding Procedures .............................................................................................. 211
PM8xx Processor Unit in Single CPU Configuration ....................................... 211
PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867/PM891 Unit in Redundant
Configuration .................................................................................... 212
CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit - BC810 ........................................................... 213
CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit - BC820 ........................................................... 214
SM810/SM811/SM812 ...................................................................................... 215
Internal Battery / SB821 External Battery/SB822 Rechargeable External Battery216
On-board RS-232C Channels CI853 .............................................................. 217
PROFIBUS DP CI854/CI854A/CI854B ........................................................ 218
MasterBus 300 Interface CI855 ...................................................................... 220
S100 I/O Interface CI856................................................................................ 221
INSUM Interface CI857 ................................................................................. 222
8 3BSE036351-600
Table of Contents
DriveBus Interface - CI858 ................................................................................223

FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet - CI860 ...................................225
TRIO Interface - CI862 ......................................................................................227
Satt I/O Interface CI865 ..................................................................................228
Modbus TCP Interface CI867 .........................................................................229
IEC 61850 Interface CI868 .............................................................................231
AF 100 Interface - CI869 ...................................................................................232
PROFINET IO Interface - CI871 .......................................................................235
MOD5 Interface - CI872 ....................................................................................236
EtherNet/IP Interface - CI873 ............................................................................240
Appendix A - Hardware Units

PM851/PM856/PM860 and TP830 Processor Unit ...................................................243
Technical Data....................................................................................................244
Performance Data...............................................................................................248
PM851A/PM856A/PM860A and TP830 Processor Unit...........................................249
Technical Data....................................................................................................250
PM861/PM861A and TP830 Processor Unit .............................................................255
Technical Data....................................................................................................256
PM862 and TP830 Processor Unit .............................................................................259
Technical Data....................................................................................................260
Technical Data....................................................................................................264
PM865 and TP830 Processor Unit .............................................................................267
Technical Data....................................................................................................268
Technical Data....................................................................................................272
3BSE036351-600 9
Table of Contents
PM867 and TP830 Processor Unit ............................................................................. 275

Technical Data ................................................................................................... 276
Performance Data .............................................................................................. 278
PM891 Processor Unit ................................................................................................ 279
Technical Data ................................................................................................... 280
Performance Data .............................................................................................. 281
BC810 and TP857 - CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit .................................................... 282
BC820 and TP850 - CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit .................................................... 285
SM810 and TP855......................................................................................................... 289
SM811 and TP868......................................................................................................... 294
SM812 and TP868......................................................................................................... 300
CI853 and TP853 RS-232C Interface ........................................................................ 306
CI854/CI854A/CI854B and TP854 PROFIBUS DP Interface .................................. 310
CI854B and TP850........................................................................................................ 315
CI855 and TP853 Ethernet Interface for MasterBus 300........................................... 320
CI856 and TP856 S100 I/O Interface......................................................................... 324
CI857 and TP853 INSUM Interface .......................................................................... 328
CI858 and TP858 DriveBus Interface........................................................................ 332
CI860 and TP860 FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet ........................... 336
CI862 and TP862 - TRIO/Genius Interface .................................................................. 340
CI865 and TP865 Satt I/O Interface........................................................................... 347
CI867 and TP867 Modbus TCP Interface.................................................................. 351
CI868 and TP867 IEC 61850 Interface...................................................................... 355
CI869 and TP869 - AF 100 Interface............................................................................ 359
CI871 and TP867 PROFINET IO Interface............................................................... 363
CI872 and TP858 - MOD5 Interface............................................................................. 367
CI873 and TP867 - EtherNet/IP Interface..................................................................... 371
Power Supply Units Types SD821, SD822 and SD823 ............................................. 375
Power Supply Units - Types SD831, SD832, SD833, and SD834................................ 382
SS822/SS823/SS832 Voting Unit (for Redundant Power Supply) ............................... 393
TC562 Modem Unit (Westermo MD-12DC) ............................................................. 408
SB821 External Battery AC 800M Memory Back-up ............................................... 411
10 3BSE036351-600
Table of Contents
SB822 Rechargeable External Battery AC 800M Memory Back-up.........................413

DIN-Rail TS 35/7.5 ....................................................................................................415
Miscellaneous Equipment .............................................................................................416
TB850 Terminator for CEX-Bus (Male)............................................................416
TB851 Terminator for CEX-Bus (Female) ........................................................418
TB807 ModuleBus Terminator Plug ..................................................................419
TB852 RCU Link Terminator Plug....................................................................419
TB853 RCU Control Link Terminator Plug.......................................................419
TK850 CEX-Bus Extension Cable.....................................................................419
TK851 RCU Link Cable ....................................................................................419
TK853 ...........................................................................................................420
TK855 RCU Data Link Cable............................................................................420
TK856 RCU Control Link Cable .......................................................................421
TK857 RCU-Link Cable for BC820 ..................................................................421
TK212A Tool Cable ...........................................................................................421
Al-Profile Support For DIN-Rail .......................................................................423
Appendix B - Power Consumption

General ..........................................................................................................................425
Current Consumption and Power Dissipation ...............................................................426
Appendix C - Recommended Components

Recommended Components ..........................................................................................431
Appendix D - Directive Considerations

Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC)........................................................................447
Low-Voltage Directive (LVD) .......................................................................................447
Appendix E - Standards
Hazardous Location Approval.......................................................................................449
Appendix F - Environmental Data

Environmental Data for AC 800M Products .................................................................451
Climatic and Mechanical Environmental Conditions ........................................452
3BSE036351-600 11
Table of Contents
CE Compliance .................................................................................................. 454

Electromagnetic Compatibility and Main Voltage Conditions .......................... 455
Installation Requirements .................................................................................. 457
Laying Field Cables ........................................................................................... 457
Types of Field Cable .......................................................................................... 457
DIN-Rail Mounting............................................................................................ 457
Lightning Protection .......................................................................................... 458
Inductive Load Suppression............................................................................... 458
Appendix G - Hardware Units for Essential Automation
INDEX
12 3BSE036351-600
Safety Summary
General
In order to minimize the risk of injury to personnel and/or damage to the
equipment, always comply with the following safety instructions when
installing and operating an AC 800M Controller system. Local, stricter statutory
regulations must always take precedence over the safety instructions given here.
The Safety Instructions are classified as mandatory reading for all suitably
qualified personnel intending to operate the AC 800M Controller.
Warnings and Information Symbols in the Text Margin

Observe the symbols for warnings and information located in other Chapters
and Appendices of this book. The symbols are placed in the left-hand margin,
adjacent to paragraphs requiring special attention. For an explanation of the
symbols, see About This User Manual - Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip
Icons on page 26.
3BSE036351-600 13
Safety Summary
Personnel and Process Safety

TAKE CARE AT ALL TIMES This will prevent accidents from
occurring and help protect valuable equipment.
A control system is a tool used to control various processes. Responsibility for
attaining and maintaining a satisfactory level of safety rests with the personnel
who engineer, operate and maintain the equipment. It is important to have an
extensive knowledge of all control functions, the inherent safety risks that may
be involved in the process, and to possess the imaginative ability to anticipate
situations in which accidents may occur.
The following Safety Instructions must be observed:
Take care when:
fitting or removing units
connecting or disconnecting cables
resetting or switching units to manual operation
For hazardous locations special restrictions apply, see Appendix E,
Standards.
Never connect the equipment to the mains power supply during installation
work.
Take extreme care when connecting the system to the mains power supply.
Injury or death can be the result of incorrect procedures.
Ensure that all personnel operating or maintaining the installation know the
exact location of and how to operate the equipment isolating safety switch
and the mains power supply isolating switch.
When the process sub-sections have been checked and a test run has been
performed, a person responsible must check the interlocking chains etc. All
concerned personnel must be fully informed regarding test runs to be
performed.
14 3BSE036351-600
Safety Summary (continued)
Process technicians are to be present when testing and operating process

objects.
Never activate any System Initialization push-button if any uncertainty
exists regarding exactly what occurs within the system during
initialization. ALWAYS CHECK FIRST.
Remember at all times, that the control system can be controlled from a
remote engineering station, connected at another node via Control
Network.
Remember, the AC 800M Controller will start automatically when voltage
is applied.
Taking steps to bring the process to a safe state, provides an improved level of
safety when power supplies, communication links or parts of the control system
fail. Such steps may require, for example, the installation of valves or relays that
automatically return to a fail-safe position.
Product Safety
The following safety rules must be observed at all times:
To avoid discharging static electricity, ground both yourself and any tools
before handling printed circuit boards, batteries, memory cards, and other
sensitive pieces of the equipment
All electronic devices are sensitive to ESD (electrostatic discharge). To
avoid accidental damage while handling printed circuit boards, it is
recommended to wear a wrist strap, grounded to the chassis. The strap must
have a built-in protective resistor
Anti-static, conductive plastic bags must be used for storage and transport
of PC boards in transit.
3BSE036351-600 15
Safety Summary
Before replacing Units

All procedures for replacing units can be located by referring to the relevant
documentation.
Removing or replacing units with system power connected can cause injury to
personnel and damage to equipment. It is, therefore, of the utmost importance
that the power supply be fully disconnected, on the process side, before removal
or insertion of units takes place.
See Online Replacement of Unit on page 204 and I/O documentation.
Maintenance
It is recommended that a stock of suitable spare components be maintained to
avoid system downtime.
Ensure that back-up copies of the current application program are made at
regular, predetermined intervals to avoid system downtime.
16 3BSE036351-600
Operating Environment
Before the AC 800M Controller system is brought online, investigate which
environmental conditions are applicable. Take note in particular of the
following:
The controller must not be exposed to conditions that exceed the values given
in the relevant technical specifications.
The controller must not be used in an environment exposed to strong electrical
interference. Electrical machines can produce interference that exceeds levels
permitted for the equipment, for example during repair work.
All products must be handled with appropriate precautions with regard to
electrostatic damage.
The controller must not be exposed to direct sunlight.
Important Software Check
Use the systems fault-monitoring facilities to prevent accidents or mishaps.
When in doubt, ALWAYS CHECK before executing changes.
Important Hardware Notice
DO NOT, under any circumstances, disconnect the power supply to a
normally functioning system. Always use the correct system shut-down
procedure prior to disconnecting the power supply.
Signal Noise Due to Cables
Cables which may cause electrical interference (for example, power supply cables)
must not be installed adjacent to bus cables carrying fast digital signals. Ensure that
a minimum distance of 10 cm (4 in.) is provided between cables installed inside
cabinets.
Hazardous Electrical Supplies
Operational and maintenance procedures, during which personnel may come into
contact with high voltage, should only be carried out by personnel fully trained in
the maintenance of electrical equipment within those environments, and who are
fully aware of all risks involved.
3BSE036351-600 17
Safety Summary
Electrostatic Sensitive Device

Devices labeled with this symbol require special handling precautions as
described in the installation section.
GENERAL Equipment Environment

WARNINGS All components, whether in transportation, operation or storage, must be
in a noncorrosive environment.
Electrical Shock Hazard During Maintenance

Disconnect power or take precautions to insure that contact with ener-
gized parts is avoided when servicing.
SPECIFIC Page 71: The AC 800M Controller and associated units must be unpow-
WARNINGS ered and disconnected when being mounted onto a DIN-rail!
Page 72: It is not allowed to manipulate CEX bus baseplates in a pow-

ered and running system. Before changing or removing a baseplate, all
CEX modules on that segment must be removed.
Page 76: AC 800M units must be disconnected from the power source
before removing them from a DIN-rail!

Page 82: For PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM866A insert the

RCU Link Termination plug TB852, at the RCU Link connector. The termi-
nation plug must always be used for PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/
PM866/PM867 when running in single configuration. When a redundant
processor is running in a single configuration use the RCU Link Cable
TK851, if the RCU Link Termination plug TB852 is not available.
18 3BSE036351-600
SPECIFIC Page 131: The CI862 baseplate has no locking device. Insert only the
WARNINGS CI862 unit into this baseplate. Insertion of other unit types may cause
(continued) damage to the equipment.
Page 197: Before attempting maintenance or troubleshooting, read the

Safety Summary on page 13. Failure to do so could lead to personal
injury or damage to equipment.

Page 449: Explosion hazard - Substitution of components may impair

suitability for Class I, Zone 2.
Page 449: Explosion hazard - Do not replace batteries unless the power
has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
Page 450: Explosion hazard - Do not disconnect equipment unless the

power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
3BSE036351-600 19
Safety Summary
SPECIFIC Page 72: To prevent damage to the pins, be sure the baseplate plugs and
CAUTIONS sockets are fully aligned as the units interconnect. Under no circum-
stances use excessive force!
Page 72: It is essential that the locking device be placed in the LOCKED
position to avoid possible problems caused by vibration and/or intermittent
grounding.
Page 77: In order to provide adequate access and removal space, note
that the SLIDE sequence must be carried out on the unit baseplates adja-
cent to the unit that is to be removed.
Page 77: The unit baseplates are easily disconnected from each other by
gently prying them apart with a blade screwdriver (see Figure 23 on page
78).
20 3BSE036351-600
SPECIFIC Page 80: Do not manipulate the locking device. ABB will take no responsi-
CAUTIONS bility for errors caused by manipulating locking devices.
(continued)
Page 83 and Page 96: Do not place the internal back-up battery in the
battery holder until the AC 800M Controller has been powered-up nor-
mally and the memory back-up function has been activated, that is, the
B(attery) LED flashes. If no normal power supply is connected to the pro-
cessor unit with the battery in place, then the CPU memory will immedi-
ately start to consume battery power.
Page 94: Note that in redundant CPU configuration, COM3 and the elec-
trical ModuleBus on the baseplate can not be used.
Page 95: Note that the RCU Link Cable TK851 or TK857 must be used
and can not be replaced by a similar cable. Using another cable will dis-
able the identification of the CPUs in the CB and Operator Station. When
running in single configuration the RCU Link Cable TK851 might tempo-
rarily be used to perform the function of a termination plug.
Page 102: Do not connect the two CEX-Bus segments, separated with
BC810, to each other with CEX-Bus extension cable TK850.
Page 102: In AC 800M High Integrity Controllers it is required that the

external supply input of BC810 is connected and that the power supply is
strictly configured either according to Figure 33 or according to Figure 34
and nor is it allowed to change the configuration by way of for instance
individual circuit breakers between modules.
Page 103: Hot swap of the BC810 located next to a primary or single con-
troller CPU, otherwise called direct BC810, might jeopardize the whole
controller and should not be performed unless every module on the
CEX-Bus are in a non-operating state. Note: In an AC 800M HI controller
this is unconditionally and intentionally leading to a shutdown of the con-
troller.
3BSE036351-600 21
Safety Summary
SPECIFIC Page 108: Do not connect the two CEX-Bus segments, separated with
CAUTIONS BC820, to each other with CEX-Bus extension cable TK850.
(continued)
Page 110: Hot swap of the BC820 located next to a primary or single con-
troller CPU, otherwise called direct BC820, might jeopardize the whole
controller and should not be performed unless every module on the
CEX-Bus are in a non-operating state.
Page 110: Hot swap of the BC820 is not located next to a primary or sin-
gle controller CPU, if located then indirect BC820, will shut down and
non-redundant interface located on that CEX-Bus segment, should not be
performed unless such interfaces already are in a non-operating state or
their function is dispensable for the controller.
Page 125: Hot swap is supported for CI854A/CI854B (not CI854).
Page 148: To avoid error indications from SA/SB when single power sup-
ply is used, it is recommended to connect the input terminals SA/SB on
the CPU to +24 V, see Figure 52.
Page 150: Do not connect the TK821V020 cable until the AC 800M Con-
troller has been powered-up normally and the memory back-up function
has been activated, that is, the B(attery) LED flashes. If no normal power
supply is connected to the PM8xx processor unit, the CPU memory will
immediately start to consume battery power when the cable is connected.
Page 163: When setting the IP address of the primary CPU in Control
Builder, the backup CPU must be turned off (powered down). Otherwise
the backup CPU will take over and you get disconnected.
Page 165: Note that the electrical ModuleBus can only be used for con-
nection of S800 I/O when AC 800M is running in single CPU configura-
tion.
Page 190: Note that a Backup CPU with severe communication errors on
the ModuleBus will be rejected (if ModuleBus is part of the HW configura-
tion) and synchronized state will never be reached as long as error
remains.
22 3BSE036351-600
SPECIFIC Page 194: The RCU Link Cable must NEVER be removed from the pri-
CAUTIONS mary Processor Unit during redundant operation. Removal of the cable
(continued may cause the unit to stop.
Page 198: Due to the batteries being connected in parallel, it is necessary,

when using the SB821 external battery, to remove the internal battery
from the PM8xx in order to avoid reducing available memory back-up
time.
Page 201: Due to the batteries being connected in parallel, it is necessary,

when using the SB821 external battery, to remove the internal battery
from the processor unit in order to avoid reducing available memory
back-up time.
Page 206 and Page 207: Reuse of CPU modules replaced from redun-
dant configurations within the same control network, might cause control
network problems due to the MAC and IP address handling. See MAC
and IP Address Handling in Redundant Configuration on page 53. Such
reuse should not be fulfilled unless both the replaced module and the
module previously acting together with it in redundant configuration are
known to be restored from the previous mutual address swap. It is recom-
mended to set up an IP-config session and use the Restore factory set-
tings option subsequently followed by reassignment of the IP address or
assignment of a new IP address.
Page 206: Removing the RCU link cable from the primary CPU in some
rare cases might cause the CPU to stop. Hence, the recommendation is
to remove the RCU link cable from the processor unit to be exchanged.
Page 207: The unit baseplates are easily disconnected from each other
by gently prying them apart with a blade screwdriver (see Figure 23 on
page 78).
Page 208: Do not replace the RCU link cable online in a previous version
than 5.0. The support for online replacement also depends on hardware
Product Revision levels. Please consult Release Notes (3BSE021377*)
for detailed information.
3BSE036351-600 23
Safety Summary
Page 208: Do not replace the optical cable online in a previous version
than 5.0. The support for online replacement also depends on hardware
Product Revision levels. Please consult Release Notes (3BSE021377*)
for detailed information.
Page 448: If you use other power supplies, except SD82X and SD83X, to
provide the 24V d.c. for AC 800M it is required that they also are CE
marked, Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed and fulfill the LVD (SELV
and PELV) criteria.
Page 448: The AC 800M modules are IP20 semi-protected equipment

and must be mounted in non-public localities.
24 3BSE036351-600
About This User Manual
General
Any security measures described in this User Manual, for example, for user
access, password security, network security, firewalls, virus protection, etc.,
represent possible steps that a user of an 800xA System may want to consider
based on a risk assessment for a particular application and installation. This risk
assessment, as well as the proper implementation, configuration, installation,
operation, administration, and maintenance of all relevant security related
equipment, software, and procedures, are the responsibility of the user of the
800xA System.
This User Manual describes the hardware platform AC 800M. It also describes in
detail how to install, configure, operate and perform the necessary maintenance on
all equipment making up the AC 800M or AC 800M HI controllers.
Control Builder is used to configure and program the AC 800M controller, and is
referred to in this manual as Control Builder. For information on the controller
software, see controller software documentation.
For important information about late changes and work-arounds for known
problems, refer to the Release Notes (see Released User Manuals and Release Notes
on page 31).
User Manual Conventions

Microsoft Windows conventions are normally used for the standard presentation of
material when entering text, key sequences, prompts, messages, menu items, screen
elements, etc.
3BSE036351-600 25
Feature Pack About This User Manual
Feature Pack
The Feature Pack content (including text, tables, and figures) included in this
User Manual is distinguished from the existing content using the following
two separators:
Feature Pack Functionality______________________________________________________________________
<Feature Pack Content>

___________________________________________________________________________________________
Feature Pack functionality included in an existing table is indicated using a

table footnote (*) :
*Feature Pack Functionality
Feature Pack functionality in an existing figure is indicated using callouts.

Unless noted, all other information in this User Manual applies to 800xA Systems
with or without a Feature Pack installed.
Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons

This publication includes Warning, Caution, and Information where appropriate
to point out safety related or other important information. It also includes Tip to
point out useful hints to the reader. The corresponding symbols should be
interpreted as follows:
Electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
electrical shock.
Warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in personal
injury.
Caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept

discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which could
result in corruption of software or damage to equipment/property.
26 3BSE036351-600
About This User Manual Terminology
Information icon alerts the reader to pertinent facts and conditions.
Tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or how to
use a certain function
Although Warning hazards are related to personal injury, and Caution hazards are
associated with equipment or property damage, it should be understood that
operation of damaged equipment could, under certain operational conditions, result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore,
fully comply with all Warning and Caution notices.
Terminology
A complete and comprehensive list of terms is included in System 800xA System
Guide Functional Description (3BSE038018*). The listing includes terms and
definitions that apply to the 800xA System where the usage is different from
commonly accepted industry standard definitions and definitions given in standard
dictionaries such as Websters Dictionary of Computer Terms.
Terms that uniquely apply to this User Manual are listed in the following table.
Table 1. Terminology
Term/Acronym Description
ABB Drives ABB Oy, Drives Group
AC 800M A hardware platform, comprising Processor Units,
communication interfaces and other supporting devices,
that can be configured to provide a controller.
AC 800M Controller A controller configured from the AC 800M hardware
platform and Controller FW for AC 800M.
AC 800M HI Controller A controller configured from a relevant selection of the
AC 800M hardware platform and Controller Firmware for
AC 800M HI.
3BSE036351-600 27
Terminology About This User Manual
Table 1. Terminology (Continued)
Central I/O Input/Output units, mounted onto a DIN-rail, and directly
connected to the AC 800M controller via ModuleBus.
CEX-Bus Communication Expansion Bus, (for communication
units).
DDCS Distributed Drives Communication System
DIN-rail Industry standard Top Hat type mounting rail.
DriveBus Communication link dedicated for ABB drives.
DriveDebug Diagnostic Tool
DriveWindow Commissioning and Maintenance Tool
EMC Electro-Magnetic Compatibility.
Ethernet Network cabling system according to IEEE802.3.
Ethernet Address The term Ethernet address is often used in extended
meaning to refer to the hardware addresses of not only
Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) hardware, but also Wireless
(IEEE 802.11) hardware, and FDDI (ISO 9314), see also
MAC-address.
FCI Fieldbus Communication Interface.
FF FOUNDATION Fieldbus - Standard based on
IEC 1158-2.
FF HSE FOUNDATION Fieldbus - High Speed Ethernet, a
fieldbus system based on Ethernet and FOUNDATION
Fieldbus specification.
Hot removal Units with hot removal support can be removed online,
without any disturbance to other units connected to the
CEX-Bus. This includes that the unit can be removed
online if it becomes faulty.
28 3BSE036351-600
About This User Manual Terminology
Hot swap Units with hot swap (includes hot removal) support, can
be replaced online, without any disturbance to other
units connected to the CEX-Bus. In a redundant system,
the backup unit can be replaced without any
disturbances to the primary unit. This includes that the
unit can be replaced online if it becomes faulty.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission.
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
INSUM INtegrated System for User optimized Motor control.
LVD Low Voltage Directive.
MAC address The generic term for all hardware addresses of Ethernet
(IEEE802.3) hardware, Wireless (IEEE802.11) hardware
and FDDI (ISO 9314) is MAC address; MAC stands for
Media Access Control.
PELV Protected Extra Low Voltage (power supply).
PROFIBUS DP Open, vendor-independent fieldbus for time-critical
communication between controllers and distributed
peripherals.
RCU Redundancy Control Unit.
RCU Link RCU Link Cable transfers data between Primary and
Back-up CPU. The two CPUs are connected to the RCU
Link Cable. An RCU Link Terminator is used on the RCU
Link Connector in single CPU configuration.
Remote I/O Input/Output units connected to a controller via a
fieldbus.
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage (power supply).
SIL Safety Integrity Level
3BSE036351-600 29
Applicable Specifications About This User Manual
10BaseT 10 Mbit Ethernet according to IEEE 802.3
100BaseTX 100 Mbit electrical Ethernet IEEE 802.3
Applicable Specifications
EUROPEAN UNION DIRECTIVE COMPLIANCE
Units mentioned in this document for which the product is marked with the
logo comply with the electromagnetic compatibility directive 2004/108/EC
and the low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC. See Appendix D, Directive
Considerations.
UL LISTING
Units mentioned in this document are UL listed if the product is marked with the UL
logo.
indicates UL approval for the USA, and for both Canada and
the USA. The logo indicates UL approval for Canada only.
The applied standard is UL508, Industrial Control Equipment. Units approved for
use at hazardous locations also comply with the standard UL60079-15. To fulfill the
UL requirements for hazardous locations, the instructions in Appendix E, Standards
must be followed.
TV Approval
Units mentioned in this document are TV qualified for IEC 61508 SIL2 or SIL3 if
the
product is marked with the TV logo.
30 3BSE036351-600
About This User Manual Released User Manuals and Release Notes
Released User Manuals and Release Notes

A complete list of all User Manuals and Release Notes applicable to System 800xA
is provided in System 800xA Released User Manuals and Release Notes
(3BUA000263*).
System 800xA Released User Manuals and Release Notes (3BUA000263*) is
updated each time a document is updated or a new document is released. It is in pdf
format and is provided in the following ways:
Included on the documentation media provided with the system and published
to ABB SolutionsBank when released as part of a major or minor release,
Service Pack, Feature Pack, or System Revision.
Published to ABB SolutionsBank when a User Manual or Release Note is
updated in between any of the release cycles listed in the first bullet.
A product bulletin is published each time System 800xA Released User Manuals
and Release Notes (3BUA000263*) is updated and published to ABB
SolutionsBank.
3BSE036351-600 31
Released User Manuals and Release Notes About This User Manual
32 3BSE036351-600
Section 1 Introduction
Product Overview
AC 800M General
AC 800M is a hardware platform comprising individual hardware units, which can
be configured and programmed to perform multiple functions.
Once configured and programmed, the AC 800M effectively becomes the AC 800M
or AC 800M HI controller.
The hardware units that form the AC 800M and AC 800M HI Controllers are:
Processor units (including baseplate)
(PM851/PM851A/PM856/PM856A/PM860/PM860A/PM861/PM861A/
PM862/PM864/PM864A/PM865/PM866/PM866A/PM867/PM891)
High Integrity Processor Unit
(consists of PM865 with SM810/SM811 or PM867/SM812 with corresponding
baseplates)
Communication interfaces for different protocols (including baseplates)
(CI853/CI854/CI854A/CI854B/CI855/CI856/CI857/CI858/
CI860/ CI862/CI865/CI867/CI868/CI869/CI871/CI872/CI873)
CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit
(BC810/BC820)
Power supply units, providing various power output levels
SD831/SD832/SD833/SD834/SS823/SS832)
Battery back-up unit
(SB821/SB822)
The SB821 is not supported with PM891.
3BSE036351-600 33
AC 800M General Section 1 Introduction
PM851A is equivalent with PM851 unless stated otherwise.

PM856A is equivalent with PM856 unless stated otherwise.
PM860A is equivalent with PM860 unless stated otherwise
PM861A is equivalent to PM861 unless stated otherwise.
When equipped with the specified Control Software, the AC 800M Controller acts
either as a stand-alone process controller, or as a controller performing local control
tasks in a control network consisting of many interconnected controllers, operator
stations and servers.
Various I/O systems can be connected to the AC 800M Controller, either directly
(S800 I/O) or via PROFIBUS DP or FOUNDATION Fieldbus.
The AC 800M is delivered without Control Software. To provide the controller
with Control Software, first load the firmware and then create the application
separately using the Control Builder M engineering tool.
The AC 800M Controller consists of a selection of units mounted on horizontal
DIN-rails, which can be housed within an enclosure. The majority of units consist of
a base mounting plate and removable cover attached with screws.
The baseplate, which is always mounted onto the DIN-rail, carries the majority of
the connections to processor, power supplies and communication interfaces, as well
as the connections to the external buses and systems.
The AC 800M Controller provides a cost-effective, low-maintenance solution for
applications ranging from small Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) to advanced
Distributed Control Systems (DCS) control applications and combined DCS, and
High Integrity systems control applications.
In the AC 800M High Integrity Controller, it is possible to run both non-SIL and
SIL classified applications. The AC 800M HI consist of PM865 with
SM810/SM811 or PM867 with SM812 and a High Integrity version of Control
Software, and is also available in redundant configuration. AC 800M HI requires
the use of SIL certified S800 I/O units in SIL classified applications. If the
34 3BSE036351-600
Section 1 Introduction AC 800M General
application is not SIL classified, standard S800 I/O units can be used with
AC 800M HI controller.
Figure 1 shows the physical appearance of an AC 800M Controller with an
S800 I/O Unit. This physical appearance does not apply to PM891.
AC 800M I/O System
Communication Processor S800 I/O

interface unit unit
Figure 1. Example of an AC 800M Controller (except PM891) with an S800 I/O

Unit
Figure 2 shows the PM861 processor unit that is part of the AC 800M controller.
This processor unit is different from PM891.
3BSE036351-600 35
AC 800M General Section 1 Introduction
LED
Status Compact Flash slot
Indicators
INIT
Push button
CF Connector
Tx/Rx
RCU Link Optical ModuleBus
Connector
(PM861/PM862 Electrical
PM864/P865 ModuleBus
M866/PM867)
CEX-Bus
Tx/Rx External Battery

Status Supply Socket
Indicators
Power Supply
and
Supervision Signal
Socket
CN1/CN2
Ports
COM3/COM4
DIN-rail Ports
Locking Device
Figure 2. Processor Unit General View (here shown with PM861)
36 3BSE036351-600
Section 1 Introduction PM8xx/TP830 Processor Unit General
PM8xx/TP830 Processor Unit General
The topic does not apply to PM891. See PM891 Processor Unit General on
page 44.
Physically the PM8xx/TP830 Processor Unit consists of two basic parts:
Processor Unit
(PM851/PM851A/PM856/PM856A/PM860/PM860A/PM861/PM861A/
PM862/PM864/PM864A/PM865/PM866/PM866A/PM867) with processor
and Power Supply boards.
Baseplate (TP830), housing the unit termination board.
For the Functional Block Diagram, see Figure 4 on page 39 and
Figure 5 on page 40. The CPU board contains the microprocessor and the RAM-
memory, controllers for all built-in communication interfaces, real-time clock, LED
indicators, INIT push button and a Compact Flash interface.
The main function of the power supply board is to generate isolated, circuit-proof
+5 V and +3.3 V supplies to the CPU and I/O units. The board also contains opto-
isolated RS-232C drivers/receivers for the service port, together with a back-up
battery holder for memory/real time clock, (RTC).
The termination board, housed in the TP830 Baseplate, is where the majority of
the external connections terminates. The board is grounded to the DIN-rail through
of the metallic components of the housing. The termination board is provided with
screw terminals for power supply and redundant power supply monitoring, with
RJ45 connectors for the control network and serial port, a connector for the service
port, the electrical ModuleBus and the CEX-Bus.
The 24 V DC supply, connected to the TP830 Baseplate, powers all the units on the
CEX-Bus and the electrical ModuleBus.
In single CPU configuration, it is possible to connect an S800 I/O cluster directly to
the built-in electrical ModuleBus plug located on the right hand side of the TP830
Baseplate.
The processor unit has a communication expansion bus connector located on
the left-hand side of the TP830 Baseplate. This CEX-Bus provides for extending
the on-board communication ports with additional communication interfaces.
3BSE036351-600 37
PM8xx/TP830 Processor Unit General Section 1 Introduction
Processor Unit
Cover Release Screw
Cover
Assembly
CEX-Bus
Electrical ModuleBus
Fuses
CEX-Bus/ModuleBus
Baseplate
TP830
Figure 3. Processor Unit Assembly General View

(here shown with PM860/TP830)
38 3BSE036351-600
Electrical
CEX-bus
Optical
+5V DC
4
Power
DC +3.3V DC System and CEX-bus ModuleBus
user mem. controller controller
Battery
RTC Compact Flash

External 3 +BV CPU
battery
(+3.3V)
Communication
controllers INIT
Logic
Ethernet Ethernet RS232 RS232

B
P
R
CN1 CN2 COM3 COM4 F
4 4 8 4
Figure 4. PM851/PM856/PM860 Functional Block Diagram
PM851/PM851A is restricted to one Ethernet (CN1) port.
3BSE036351-600 39
Electrical
CEX-Bus
Optical
System Shadow CEX-Bus ModuleBus
Interface
and user memory
mem. FPGA
+24V RCU
L+
1 +5V DC
L-
2
SA +3.3V
3
4 SB
Battery
RCU Link
+BV RTC
B+
2 CPU
B- (+3.3V DC)
1
S Compact Flash
3 SA SB
Communication
Controllers
INIT
Logic
Ethernet Ethernet RS232

RS232 RS232
CN1 CN2 COM3

COM4 COM4
F R P B PRIM DUAL
Figure 5. PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867 Functional Block

Diagram
40 3BSE036351-600
PROFIBUS DP, FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1, FOUNDATION Fieldbus High

Speed Ethernet and dual RS-232C ports are some examples of unit types available
for connection to the CEX-Bus. It is possible to use redundant communication
interfaces, for example PROFIBUS DP.
Figure 6 on page 42 provides examples of various ways to connect the S800 I/O
units. It can be seen, at the top right-hand area of Figure 6 on page 42, that one
cluster (or group) of units (maximum number of units per cluster is 12) is connected
to the electrical ModuleBus of an AC 800M Controller. However, a further seven
clusters (each comprising up to 12 units) can be added to the optical ModuleBus,
thus achieving a total count of 96 units per AC 800M Controller when using only
the ModuleBus.
Connecting S800 I/O units (using the ModuleBus) to an AC 800M Controller
mounted with a PM851/PM851A processor unit is restricted to, one electrical
ModuleBus cluster and one optical ModuleBus cluster.
To the left on Figure 6 on page 42, there is a PROFIBUS DP segment. This allows
for a large increase in the numbers of units connected to each AC 800M Controller.
Here the segment is shown as having an FCI unit (type CI801), connected to the
PROFIBUS DP network. The use of FCI units allows the selection of units from
several I/O families.
Figure 7 on page 43 shows another example for I/O units based on a
FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet (FF HSE).
For further examples refer to the relevant documentation for the I/O system in
question.
3BSE036351-600 41
See Note 3
CI854A
Optical
1 Segment of
PROFIBUS DP
See Note 1
TB820
Optical To 6 Additional Optical

Modulebus Clusters
(not PM851)
CI801
Optical See Note 2
Additional stations
up to maximum of
32 stations per
Segment TB820
R
Note1 - Maximum 7 clusters x 12 = 84 modules. Max 200 m between clusters.

Repeater (1 cluster only for PM851)Restrictions apply, see I/O documentation.
Unit Note 2 - Remote S800 I/O. Maximum 24 modules/station (12/cluster),
24 x 32 =768 modules per segment.
Note 3 - Maximum one CEX-module for PM851.
Figure 6. Example of AC 800M/S800 I/O Interconnection in Single CPU

Configuration
42 3BSE036351-600
Max 12 units Max 12 units per Cluster
CI860 CI854A PM860 DI810 AI810 DO810 See

FOUNDATION PROFIBUS DP CPU Note 4
Fieldbus HSE
Electrical Modulebus Cluster
Max 12 Modules per Cluster

See
High Speed Ethernet
Optical
Note 2
TB820 DI810 AI810 AO820 See

Note 1
To 6 Additional Optical
Modulebus Clusters
Optical
FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 Link
LD 800HSE 1...4 Links

FF Field FF Field FF Field ...
see Note 3 Device Device Device
LD 800HSE 1 to 4 Links FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1
see Note 3 Note 1 Maximum 7 clusters (1 optical cluster for PM851).

Max 200 m between clusters.
HSE Restrictions apply, see I/O documentation.
Device Note 2 Central S800 I/O. Max. 96 units.
Note 3 For example FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Linking Device LD 800HSE
Note 4 Maximum one CEX-module for PM851.
Figure 7. Example of AC 800M/S800 I/O and FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed

Ethernet Interconnection in Single CPU Configuration
3BSE036351-600 43
PM891 Processor Unit General Section 1 Introduction
PM891 Processor Unit General

PM891 is a high performance controller, which is capable of handling applications
with high requirements.
PM891 connects to the S800 I/O system through the optical Modulebus. It can act
as a stand-alone Process Controller, or as a controller performing local control tasks
in a control network.
Two PM891 controllers can function together as a redundant pair, with one PM891
acting as the primary controller and the other acting as the backup. The backup
controller takes over the process controller tasks if any hardware error occurs in the
primary controller.
The control network connectivity is obtained by two built in IEEE802.3 Ethernet
channels on PM891.
PM891 also provides a communication expansion bus (CEX-Bus) to which a
number of expansion modules can be connected. These modules offers connectivity
to a wide range of field bus and I/O systems. In case of a redundant pair, both
PM891s are connected to the same CEX-Bus and one of them can control the
modules.
Physically, the PM891 Processor Unit consists of:
Connector for power supply and status signals (L+, L-, SA, SB).
DB25 connector for Electrical CEX-Bus.
External battery connector.
RJ45 connectors for the two Ethernet channels.
One Com port.
Optical Modulebus connector for connection to a maximum of seven clusters,
with 12 non-redundant or six redundant modules (that is, 7x12 = 84 modules).
Connectors for Redundancy Link.
SD (Secure Digital) memory connector.
LEDs.
Pushbutton reset switch.
44 3BSE036351-600
Section 1 Introduction PM891 Processor Unit General
Figure 8 shows the front view, Figure 9 shows the top view, and Figure 10 shows
the bottom view of PM891.
LED Status
Indicators
CEX Bus
Com
Port
External
Battery
Supply
Socket
Power supply
and
Supervision
Signal
Socket
CN1 and CN2 ports
Tx/Rx Optical
DIN-Rail locking device
ModuleBus port
Figure 8. PM891-Front view
3BSE036351-600 45
Screw terminals are provided for connections to the power supply and the external
battery.
The 24 V DC power supply powers all the units on the CEX-Bus. The optical
module clusters are powered independently.
RCU Data Link RCU Control Link
INIT Secure Digital (SD) slot

button
Figure 9. PM891-Top view
46 3BSE036351-600
Figure 10. PM891 - Bottom view with Tx1/Rx1 and CN1/CN2 ports.
The Redundancy Link consists of two cables; RCU Data Link Cable and RCU
Control Link Cable (see Figure 9).
Figure 11 shows the block diagram of PM891.
3BSE036351-600 47
Figure 11. Block diagram of PM891
48 3BSE036351-600
PM891
See Note 3
CI854A
Optical
1 Segment of
PROFIBUS DP
See Note 1
TB820
Optical To 6 Additional Optical

Modulebus Clusters
(not PM851)
CI801
Optical See Note 2
Additional stations
up to maximum of
32 stations per
Segment TB820
R
Note1 - Maximum 7 clusters x 12 = 84 modules. Max 200 m between clusters.

Repeater (1 cluster only for PM851)Restrictions apply, see I/O documentation.
Unit Note 2 - Remote S800 I/O. Maximum 24 modules/station (12/cluster),
24 x 32 =768 modules per segment.
Note 3 - Maximum one CEX-module for PM851.
Figure 12. AC 800M/S800 I/O Interconnection Configuration with single PM891
3BSE036351-600 49
Max 12 units
CI860 CI854A PM891

FOUNDATION PROFIBUS DP CPU
Fieldbus HSE

See
High Speed Ethernet
Optical
Note 2
TB820 DI810 AI810 AO820 See

Note 1
To 6 Additional Optical
Modulebus Clusters
Optical
FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 Link
LD 800HSE 1...4 Links

FF Field FF Field FF Field ...
see Note 3 Device Device Device
LD 800HSE 1 to 4 Links FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1
see Note 3 Note 1 Maximum 7 clusters (1 optical cluster for PM851).

Max 200 m between clusters.
HSE Restrictions apply, see I/O documentation.
Device Note 2 Central S800 I/O. Max. 96 units.
Note 3 For example FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Linking Device LD 800HSE
Figure 13. Example of AC 800M/S800 I/O and FOUNDATION Fieldbus High

Speed Ethernet Interconnection in Single PM891 Configuration
50 3BSE036351-600
Section 1 Introduction PM891/PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit Redundancy
PM891/PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit Redundancy

Processor unit redundancy is available for PM861, PM862, PM864, PM865,
PM866, PM867 and PM891. In this case, the controller contains two processor
units, each including memory for system and application software. One unit is
acting as primary, the other is backup (hot stand-by). The primary processor unit
controls the process. The backup stands by, ready to take over in case of a fault in
the primary. The changeover is done bumplessly and in less than 10 ms. During the
changeover, the process outputs are frozen.
Following a changeover, the system operates as a system without redundancy with
only one processor unit in operation. You can replace the malfunctioning processor
unit while the system is running. After the replacement is carried out, the system
once again has a redundant processor unit.
If an error arises in the backup unit, you can also replace the backup unit while the
system is running.
Errors which occur in the backup unit can never affect the primary unit's operation.
The primary unit and the backup unit are logically separated from one another.
Hardware errors in the primary processor unit cause the system to perform a correct
changeover. These hardware errors are single errors.
The application programming and the communication are totally unaffected by the
redundancy.
PM86x/TP830 Redundancy
The serial port, COM3 on the baseplate TP830, cannot be used in redundant CPU
configuration.
The PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867 has an RCU Link Connector
for connecting the RCU Link Cable (see Figure 2 on page 36). In a redundant
system the two processor units are linked together with the RCU Link Cable (max
1 m). Both processor units are also connected to the same CEX-Bus and either of
the two can control the expansion units (see Figure 29 on page 97).
S800 I/O units are connected to the two CPUs via the optical ModuleBus and two
TB840 cluster modems on each S800 I/O cluster (see Figure 60 on page 167). The
built-in electrical ModuleBus on the TP830 baseplate cannot be used for connecting
S800 I/O in a redundant system.
3BSE036351-600 51
PM891/PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit Redundancy Section 1 Introduction
PM891 Redundancy
The Redundancy Link in PM891 consists of two physical links. These are the
RCU Data Link and the RCU Control Link.
The RCU Data Link is a fast communication channel used to transfer the data
required to keep the backup CPU synchronized with the primary CPU.
TK855 RCU Data Link Cable is used for the data link.
The RCU Control Link is used for role selection and CPU identity assignment
(UPPER/LOWER).
TK856 RCU Control Link Cable is used for the control link.
Fault Tolerance Principle

The principle of fault tolerance in the redundant processor units is based on
continuous updating of the backup unit to the same status as the primary unit. This
enables the backup unit to assume control without affecting surrounding systems in
a bumpless manner.
This principle involves dynamic division of the program execution into execution
units and the creation of rollback points at which the processor unit's status is
completely defined.
In this context, the processor unit's total status is defined as the processor unit's
internal status, that is, the contents of the processor registers, plus the contents of the
data memory.
The backup unit's status is updated each time the primary unit passes a rollback
point, enabling the backup unit to resume program execution from the last rollback
point passed, should the primary unit fail due to error.
In order to minimize the amount of information involved in the update, the backup
unit is updated only with the changes taking place since the latest rollback point.
Between rollback points, these changes that writes in the data memory, are stored in
a log buffer in the backup unit. At a rollback point, the processor's total register
contents are also written into the data memory, so that this information is also
logged. Once the rollback point is established, the logged write operations are
transferred to the backup unit's data memory.
52 3BSE036351-600
Section 1 Introduction PM891/PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit Redundancy
If the primary unit fails because of an error, the backup unit resumes execution from
the last rollback point, which means the last execution unit is partially re-executed
by the backup unit. In order to re-execute a portion of the execution unit without
affecting the peripheral units (communication units on the CEX-Bus), the peripheral
units' references are also logged between rollback points. During re-execution, the
results of the peripheral units' references, which have already been executed, are
used, rather than re-executing them. The results of read operations are retrieved
from the log, and write operations pass without execution, since they have already
been executed. The peripheral units' statuses, then, are not affected by the re-
execution in any way, except for the time delay which occurs.
The RAM included in the processor unit provides an automatic double inverted
memory function for detection of arbitrary bit errors in the memory.
All memory updates are written to both the primary memory and to the
inverted memory in parallel.
At every memory read cycle, the data from tho two memories is compared.
If there is a mismatch in the data a changeover is forced.
The double inverted memory handling is done in hardware and without any delay to
the memory cycle time.
MAC and IP Address Handling in Redundant Configuration

In order to provide for a bumpless changeover with respect to the control network,
both the MAC and IP addresses are swapped between the initial primary and backup
CPUs. The addresses of the initial primary CPU are stored and kept as the addresses
used by the acting primary CPU. Similarly the addresses of the initial backup CPU
are stored to be used by the acting backup CPU. This means that a redundant
controller will be always identified and recognized by the same addresses regardless
of which CPU module actually acting as primary.
3BSE036351-600 53
AC 800M High Integrity Section 1 Introduction
The following characteristics of the MAC and IP address handling should be

considered in order to avoid network problems while reusing previously used CPU
modules within the same plant:
The stored swap addresses will be remembered until erased by an IP-config
session (Restore factory settings) or until started up as a backup CPU in new
context (in this case a new swap will take place).
A CPU running in standalone mode (with RCU terminator fitted) will always
use its own native addresses.
AC 800M High Integrity

AC 800M can easily be configured for usage in safety critical applications. The
main components of such a system are PM865 with SM810/SM811 or PM867 with
SM812, SS823 and the S800 I/O High Integrity, running a High Integrity version of
Control Software. The PM865/PM867 processor unit has increased internal
diagnostics, compared to PM864. The added functionality on PM865/PM867
includes:
Double over voltage protection on internal voltages
A additional watchdog timer updated with data from SM810/SM811 or SM812
respectively.
Increased oscillator supervision
Support for S800 I/O High Integrity
Support for SM810/SM811 or SM812 respectively.
Increased system diagnostic and online self tests.
The following CEX modules cannot be used in a High Integrity controller:
CI858, CI860, CI862 and CI865.
The main function of the SM810 is to act as a monitor for the HW and SW
execution of PM865 and these two modules together are a SIL2 compliant system
according to IEC61508, certified by TV. The SM810 is running a SIL3 certified
operating system and have a high degree of self-diagnostic including, for example:
Double and inverted memory
Double over voltage protection on internal voltages
54 3BSE036351-600
Section 1 Introduction Control Software
Two independent watchdog timers

Oscillator supervision
CRC on firmware and data storage
An SM811 or SM812 operates like an SM810 for SIL2 but can also together with
the PM865 or PM867 form a controller compliant with SIL3 according to
IEC61508, certified by TV.
The ModuleBus telegrams used in a High Integrity system with the S800 High
Integrity modules use the concept of long frames. Long frames are ModuleBus
telegrams that are extended with a safety header, comprising additional diagnostics
data and CRC32. S800 ModuleBus telegrams sent to the S800 I/O High Integrity
modules uses data from the PM865/PM867 and an inverted CRC32 from the
SM810/SM811/SM812. The I/O module checks that the safety header is correct.
Data received from the S800 I/O High Integrity modules over the ModuleBus have
the safety header independently verified by both SM810/SM811 and PM865 or
SM812 with PM867. Any CRC32 or other faults in the safety header will result in a
retry transmission and, if repeated, a shutdown of the faulty S800 I/O High Integrity
module.
Control Software
The software used by the AC 800M Controller is named Control Software.
This name does not stand for a specific software package; is merely a generic name
for the scope of functions used in a controller. These functions are provided by:
Hardware functions (supervision, communication buses, I/O buses)
Firmware functions loaded into the controller (real time executive system, real
time clock, redundant communication)
Application programs loaded into the controller (library functions,
communication protocols).
To produce an application, it is necessary to use the Control Builder M tool. This
tool is extremely versatile, having many useful functions in addition to system
configuration.
3BSE036351-600 55
Ethernet Address for PM8xx (Except PM891) Section 1 Introduction
Ethernet Address for PM8xx (Except PM891)

Each TP830 Baseplate is provided with a unique Ethernet address that provides
every CPU with a hardware identity.
This functionality takes the form of two identification addresses residing in the
non-volatile memory of the TP830 Baseplate. The lowest address (a 12 character
Hex code) is located on an adhesive label attached to the TP830 Baseplate. The
remaining address is the lowest +1. See Figure 14 on page 57 for label location
details. See software documentation for details on loading the software and using
Ethernet address.
56 3BSE036351-600
Section 1 Introduction Ethernet Address for PM8xx (Except PM891)
Figure 14. Identification Labels and their position on PM8xx (except PM891)
3BSE036351-600 57
Ethernet Address for PM891 Section 1 Introduction
Ethernet Address for PM891

Each PM891 unit is provided with a unique Ethernet address that provides hardware
identity to the unit.
This functionality takes the form of two identification addresses residing in the
non-volatile memory of PM891. The lowest address (a 12 character Hex code) is
located on an adhesive label attached to the cover of PM891 unit. The remaining
address is the lowest +1. See Figure 15 on page 59 for label location details of
PM891. See software documentation for details on loading the software and using
Ethernet address.
58 3BSE036351-600
Section 1 Introduction Ethernet Address for PM891
Figure 15. Identification Labels and their position on PM891
3BSE036351-600 59
AC 800M Controller Key Features Section 1 Introduction
AC 800M Controller Key Features

Modularity, allowing for step-by-step expansion.
Simple DIN-rail attachment/detachment procedures, using a unique slide and
lock mechanism.
Fast, simple troubleshooting procedures available via unit/channel LEDs.
IP20 Class protection with no requirement for enclosures.
Allows for the use of low-cost, sealed enclosures due to extremely low unit
heat dissipation, even at an ambient temperature of 40 C (104 F) outside the
enclosure.
All units are fully EMC certified.
Connection of up to 192 I/O signals, via Electrical ModuleBus, is available.
Connection of up to 1344 I/O signals, via Optical ModuleBus, is available.
Connection of S100 I/O is available.
Connection of Satt I/O is available.
Allows connecting a large number of I/Os, via PROFIBUS DP.
Connection to FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet (FF HSE).
Connection to Modbus TCP.
Connection to IEC 61850.
Connection to Advant Fieldbus 100.
Connection to MOD5.
Connection to PROFINET IO.
Connection to EtherNet/IP.
Allows connecting custom protocols of a large amount of Serial
communication RS-232C ports.
Connection to MasterBus 300 Networks.
Connection to INSUM via Gateway (Ethernet/LON).
Connection to ABB Drives is available, over DriveBus and ModuleBus.
60 3BSE036351-600
Section 1 Introduction Product Release History
Built-in battery backup of memory (except for PM891 that uses external
battery backup only).
External battery backup.
CPU Redundancy (PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867/PM891).
Redundant/sectioned CEX-Bus using a pair of BC810 or BC820.
Safety Integrity Level 2 certified controller using PM865/SM810/SM811 or
SM812/PM867.
Safety Integrity Level 3 certified controller using PM865/SM811 or
PM867/SM812.
Support for hot swap of CEX-Bus units.
Product Release History

The AC 800M hardware platform has been allocated the initial version number 1.0.
This number is required to keep the configuration of all units and components on the
AC 800M platform together, and to act as a reference in the future between different
documents. As the AC 800M hardware platform configuration grows in future
releases, so the version number will increase accordingly.
See Table 2 on page 61 for the product version release history of AC 800M.
Table 2. AC 800M Release History
Version Description User Doc

6.0 PM862, PM866A, PM867, SM812, 3BSE036351-600
BC820, and CI854B are added.
CI851 and CI852 are removed.
5.1.1 PM851A, PM856A, and PM860A are 3BSE036351-510 A
added.
Redundancy for CI873 is added.
5.1 PM891, CI869, CI871, CI872, CI873 3BSE036351-510
are added
3BSE036351-600 61
Product Release History Section 1 Introduction
Table 2. AC 800M Release History (Continued)
Version Description User Doc

5.0 SP2 CI868, PM866, SM811 are added. 3BSE036351R5021
5.0 SP1 SB822 and CI867 are added. 3BSE036351R5011
5.0 CI865 is added. 3BSE036351R5001
4.1 New information about SS823 is 3BSE036351R4101
added. SM810 and Compact Flash
have been added.
4.0 CI862 is added. 3BSE036351R4001
3.1 PM851 is added 3BSE 036 351 R101
3.0 PM865, PM861A, PM864A, BC810, 3BSE 030 827 R201
SM810, CI854A, CI858, CI860 and
SS823 are added.
2.1 PM864 is added. 3BSE 027 941 R301
2.1 CI855 and CI856 are added. 3BSE 027 941 R101
2.0 PM861and CI854/CI857 are added. 3BSE 026 020 R101
1.1 PM856 and CI852 are added. 3BSE 019 193 R201
1.0 Initial AC 800M release. 3BSE 019 193 R101
62 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation
This section contains guidelines for planning the installation of an AC 800M

controller system (see Site Selection and Building Requirements on page 63).
A complete list of measures to be taken with respect to the environment and other
on-site conditions is not given here.
The equipment should be adapted to the actual application by means of a thorough
and correctly scoped system definition, ordering procedures and design
requirements. This section also describes practical on-site installation procedures
specific to AC 800M units (see Mounting AC 800M Units onto DIN-Rail on page
69).
Site Planning
Site Selection and Building Requirements
The AC 800M system is designed for use within demanding industrial
environments. This section provides information on standard requirements
regarding the location at which or the building(s) in which the AC 800M Controller
system is to be stored or installed.
Most applications require no special arrangements regarding the environment, and
installation according to standard regulations will suffice. In certain situations
however, consideration must be given to specific protective measures.
3BSE036351-600 63
Site Selection and Building Requirements Section 2 Installation
When planning a control system installation, the following points must be

considered:
Temperature:
It is important to note the ambient air temperature as well as that within
enclosures. Lower temperatures increase system reliability and
availability.
If maximum permitted temperatures are exceeded, the anticipated lifetime
of wet, electrolytic capacitors and most semiconductors will be greatly
reduced.
Vibration:
Regarding routine vibration it is recommended that floor
enclosures/cabinets stand on a sound, level surface, and that wall
enclosures/cabinets are mounted on sound, vertical walls.
Should the AC 800M system be installed in a control room, adjacent to
large machinery such as shakers or large presses where frequent major
vibration is expected, then shock absorbers or an isolation pad may be
required to protect system equipment. Shock absorbers will normally
protect the equipment from sustained low-level vibrations that are
perceivable, but not unduly excessive.
It is recommended that additional fastening screws be used to prevent
vibration-generated noise.
If vibrations or shock are a major factor, further consideration must be
given to more extreme measures to reduce the problem.
Cooling:
Cooling the electronics is achieved by self-convection. The AC 800M
units are designed for wall mounting and must be mounted horizontally
onto a DIN-rail to avoid generating high temperatures within the units.
ABB cabinets (RM550 or RE820) may be used up to an ambient
temperature of 40C (104F), with no requirement for additional cooling
equipment, such as fans.
64 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Site Selection and Building Requirements
Grounding:
Grounding, cable selection and cable routing must be considered for
electromagnetic interference-free operation. Planning considerations are
discussed in the subsequent sections.
Other requirements:
Room lighting independent of the equipment power source. A battery-
powered emergency lighting system is recommended.
A well-developed process connection, with or without marshalling
facilities.
Effective grounding through a net of copper bars
Cable routing observing standard installation regulations.
Availability of power and other necessary utilities.
Observation of standards and legal regulations.
Sufficient free space in front of the cabinet in order to fully open the
doors. For safety reasons there must always be adequate space available,
even with the doors in the fully open position.
For additional information regarding design considerations, see Appendix B, Power
Consumption.
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
The AC 800M units are intrinsically EMC compatible according to CE marking
rules. For additional information regarding Electro-Magnetic Compatibility,
see Appendix D, Directive Considerations.
3BSE036351-600 65
Cables Section 2 Installation
Cables
Laying Field Cables

There are no special requirements for laying field and communication cables
connected to AC 800M. However:
Cables for short-distance communication without modems should always be
routed at a distance of 10 cm (4 in) from other cables.
All cables connected to AC 800M should be routed at a distance of 30cm
(12 in) from all power cables and 10 cm (4 in) from cables belonging to the
relevant international immunity standard, class 4.
Type of Field Cable

Always use shielded cables for the following applications:
Communications
High-frequency pulse transmission
Low level analog signals, for example Pt100 and thermocouples
Unshielded cables may be used for other applications. The signal and return
conductor should be located in the same cable.
Lightning Protection
Industrial installations and power plants are normally provided with well-integrated
grounding networks, installed as part of the power distribution system. Such
installations do not require additional lightning protection unless using overhead
wiring or suspended cables in an outdoor environment.
However, large dispersed plants such as water supply installations and oil refineries
will have an inadequate grounding system where signal cables may be routed above
ground. In such cases lightning protection equipment must be installed.
Should cables be discovered outside the grounding system (even at a short distance
such as 10 m [9.1 yds]) lightning protection equipment must be installed.
66 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Power Supply
Power Supply
Under normal circumstances, the power supply required by AC 800M Controller
and associated field equipment can be obtained from the plants standard
120/230 V AC mains supply.
Mains Net Filter

It is not necessary to use mains net filters when using the SD831/832/833/834
power supply units.
Mains Breaker
A mains breaker must be installed in the immediate vicinity of a controller
installation to allow for immediate total power supply disconnection to the
equipment, should the need arise. However, the prime function of the mains breaker
is to provide a means of isolating the power supply completely during maintenance.
The mains breaker must be installed in a location where it is both easily accessible
and clearly visible, that is, outside any enclosure or cabinet.
Protective Earth (PE)

Always install a protective earth connection on equipment connected to a
115/230 V AC supply.
For electrical safety reasons all conductive parts, such as the DIN-rail or the
conductive parts to which the rail is fastened, are required to be connected to PE.
The safety aspect that requires such a PE-connection is due to e.g. in-cabinet wiring
providing basic insulation only or accidental touch/connection (e.g. loose wires) of
hazardous voltages to conductive metal parts.
The connection shall fulfill the requirements in IEC61131-2 for PE connections,
that is: A conductor which, having a static current of 30 A flowing through,
measures a voltage drop which corresponds to <0.1 ohm.
ABB strongly recommends that the equipment PE-conductor should be of 35 mm2
(2 AWG) cross section if copper lead.
3BSE036351-600 67
Enclosures Section 2 Installation
Fusing the External Mains Supply Cable

The recommended fuse rating for the external mains supply of a standard AC 800M
Controller configuration, housed within a floor or wall-mounted cabinet, is given in
Table 3 on page 68.
Table 3. External Mains Supply Fuse Rating
Fuse Rating Fuse Type

10 A Delayed action fuse
Should the configuration be other than that stated, instructions for calculating
current consumptions can be found in the relevant I/O manual. For the
AC 800M Controller, see Appendix B, Power Consumption.
Uninterruptable Power Supply

The SD83X series of power supply units comfortably handle the short power
interruptions (<20 milli seconds) that may occur normally within an industrial
environment. Despite this, it is sometimes necessary to protect certain applications
against brief voltage failures by the installation of an Uninterruptable Power Supply
(UPS) device.
The AC 800M controller will shut down safely in the event of a power failure.
During down-time, the application memory and the system clock will be backed up
by the internal battery. In systems subject to long non-operational periods, it is
recommended that an external battery back-up unit be installed. When the power
supply is reconnected, the AC 800M Controller will re-start and run the application
as normal.
If the effects of unexpected shutdowns are not acceptable, it is highly recommended
that the AC 800M Controller be fully protected by connection to an Uninterruptable
Power Supply (UPS) source.
Enclosures
The AC 800M and S800 I/O units hold protection class IP20, with each unit being
individually CE-marked. If a higher IP class is required, an additional enclosure is
needed.
68 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Mounting AC 800M Units onto DIN-Rail
Normally the use of an additional enclosure will not influence the EMC
characteristics of the controller.
Enclosure Mounting
When mounting the controller enclosure, it is important to provide certain minimum
distances between the enclosure, the walls and the ceiling, in order to provide
satisfactory ventilation.
If the enclosure is provided with removable wall cladding, it is important to ensure
that this is not removed from any enclosure adjacent to other enclosures containing
equipment not belonging to the AC 800M Controller and its connected S800 I/O.
ABB Cabinets
As a suitable enclosure, ABB recommends the following two cabinets, both
specially adapted for mounting the AC 800M Controller and S800 I/O. Both are
sealed to protection class IP54 and can support the Controller and S800 I/O units
with no requirement for additional cooling equipment:
RM550 Floor-mounted cabinet
RE820 Wall-mounted cabinet.
For further information on ABB cabinets, see Appendix C, Recommended
Components.
Mounting AC 800M Units onto DIN-Rail

Since the AC 800M units (CPU and communication interfaces) are cooled by self-
convection, it is important that they only be mounted onto a horizontal DIN- rail.
Each baseplate has a locking mechanism that contacts the metal backplate to the
DIN-rail, providing an effective ground connection. The DIN-rail functions as a
very effective ground for the system.
The additional screw lugs, located in the lower part of the baseplate, serve no
electrical function. They are provided for use should extra fastening be required
within environments subject to excessive vibration.
3BSE036351-600 69
Mounting on metal sheet Section 2 Installation
There are two ways of mounting the product in cabinets, open rack or other types of
installations; aluminum profile with mounted DIN-rail or DIN-rail mounted on a
metal sheet of proper size. The aluminum profile or metal sheet shall be properly
connected to protective earth.
DIN-rail type with height 7.5 mm shall be used. Refer to type NS 35/7.5 according
to standard EN50022.
The interference suppression for external signals, are normally directly grounded to
chassis and/or plant ground. The plant ground potential must be stable and well
defined, even in the event of a low ground fault caused by high voltage equipment
or a lightning strike.
Each module's conductive back plane connects to the metallic DIN-rail which
serves as the module electronics ground conductor between the interconnected
devices. This is to ensure a good ground connection both for the internal logic and
for the EMI immunity and RF emission of the modules. The DIN mounting rail
must have a good bond to the PE of the cabinet.
If AC 800M modules are configured as two or more groups interconnected with
extension cables, special care should be taken to ensure that the DIN-rails of all
groups have a good connection to ground. Also ensure to fix the figure numbers.
Mounting on metal sheet

The DIN-rail shall be firmly attached to an unpainted metal sheet with fastening
screws every 100 mm (4 in) to ensure good mechanical stability and a good chassis
ground connection in the cabinet or an open rack.
The metal sheet shall at least be 2.5 mm thick and at least 180 mm high. The metal
sheet shall be mechanical fastened at least every 500 mm to the cabinet or rack with
a minimum of four screws. The fastening to the cabinet frame shall be performed
with self-tapping screws to get a good grounding connection.
70 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Prefabricated aluminum profile
Prefabricated aluminum profile

There are aluminum profiles for horizontal mounting. The aluminum profile gives
an excellent grounding and rigid mounting of products concerned. The aluminum
profile shall be fastened to the cabinet with at least 4 self-tapping screws.
Pre-formed Al-profile
channels
DIN-rail
Cable Duct
Figure 16. Al-profile for DIN-rail support
The profile has grooves for screws that can be used for fastening the modules in an
environment with high vibrations.
The AC 800M Controller and associated units must be unpowered and
disconnected when being mounted onto a DIN-rail!
3BSE036351-600 71
Prefabricated aluminum profile Section 2 Installation
Mounting Procedure for PM8xx and CI8xx Units, Complete with Baseplates
This topic does not apply to PM891. See Mounting Procedure for PM891 Unit on
page 74.
Before mounting any processor unit or communication interface onto the DIN-rail,
read carefully the installation instructions provided with the equipment. Since the
electronic unit and baseplate are supplied as a single unit, there is no requirement to
separate them during the mounting procedure.
Mounting the units onto the DIN-rail only requires a blade screwdriver that fits
securely into the baseplate locking screw (1 mm slot). For further details on
mounting procedure, see Figure 17 on page 73.
It is not allowed to manipulate CEX bus baseplates in a powered and running
system. Before changing or removing a baseplate, all CEX modules on that
segment must be removed.
Use the following procedure to mount the baseplates, complete with units:
1. Rotate the locking device to the OPEN position (1), hook the upper hook at the
rear of the unit baseplate securely over the upper edge of the DIN-rail and
gently snap the baseplate fully into the mounting position.
2. Rotate the locking device to the SLIDE position (2), slide the unit along the
DIN-rail to the desired mounting position and using the connector plugs and
sockets gently attach it to the adjacent unit baseplate.
To prevent damage to the pins, be sure the baseplate plugs and sockets are fully
aligned as the units interconnect. Under no circumstances use excessive force!
3. When interconnection is complete, rotate the locking device clockwise to

the LOCKED position (3). The baseplate is now fully locked into position and
has a good ground connection to the DIN-rail.
It is essential that the locking device be placed in the LOCKED position to
avoid possible problems caused by vibration and/or intermittent grounding.
For further visual information on mounting AC 800M Controller units,

see Figure 18 on page 73.
72 3BSE036351-600
1. OPEN 2. SLIDE 3. LOCKED
Figure 17. Baseplate Locking Device
Lugs for extra screws

to provide secure
mounting in locations
subject to vibration
Figure 18. DIN-rail Mounting of AC 800M Units
3BSE036351-600 73
Figure 19. AC 800M Controller (except PM891) Side View
Mounting Procedure for PM891 Unit

Before mounting any processor unit or communication interface on the DIN-rail,
read carefully the installation instructions provided with the equipment.
To mount the PM891 unit on the DIN-rail, a blade screwdriver that fits securely into
the unit locking screw (1 mm slot) is required. For details about the unit locking
screw, see Figure 20 on page 75.
To mount the PM891 unit on the DIN-rail:
1. Rotate the locking device to the OPEN position (1), hook the upper lip at the
rear of the unit securely over the upper edge of the DIN-rail, and gently snap
the unit fully into the mounting position.
2. Rotate the locking device to the SLIDE position (2), slide the unit along the
DIN-rail to the desired mounting position, and using the connector plugs and
sockets gently attach it to the adjacent unit baseplate.
To prevent damage to the pins, ensure that the baseplate plugs and sockets are
fully aligned as the units interconnect. Do not apply excessive force.
74 3BSE036351-600
3. When the interconnection is complete, rotate the locking device clockwise to

the LOCKED position (3). The PM891 unit is now fully locked into the
position and has a good ground connection to the DIN-rail.
It is essential that the locking device be placed in the LOCKED position to
avoid possible problems caused by vibration and/or intermittent grounding.
1. OPEN 2. SLIDE 3. LOCKED
Figure 20. Unit locking for PM891
Figure 21. PM891 with other units mounted on DIN-rail
3BSE036351-600 75
Figure 22. PM891 - Side view
Removing Processor Units Complete with Baseplates

AC 800M units must be disconnected from the power source before removing
them from a DIN-rail!
Use the following procedure to remove a unit, complete with baseplate:
1. Switch off or disconnect the power supply to the controller units.
2. Remove any detachable cables from the appropriate unit baseplate.
76 3BSE036351-600
3. Rotate the locking device to the SLIDE position (2) on the unit baseplate,
In order to provide adequate access and removal space, note that the SLIDE
sequence must be carried out on the unit baseplates adjacent to the unit that is
to be removed.
4. Gently ease the unit/baseplates sideways in order to release the contacts of the
unit baseplate being removed.
5. Turn the locking device anti-clockwise to the OPEN position (1) and ease the
unit baseplate outward and upward at the base. Lift the unit to remove it from
the DIN-rail. The AC 800M units must be disconnected from the power source
before removing them from the DIN-rail.
The unit baseplates are easily disconnected from each other by gently prying
them apart with a blade screwdriver (see Figure 23 on page 78).
3BSE036351-600 77
F F F
R R R
Rx1 Rx/Tx P
Tx1 RTS B
Rx2
Tx2
INIT
CI853 CI851 PM860
COM1 COM2 CN1 CN2 COM3 COM4
Figure 23. Separating the Baseplates
78 3BSE036351-600
Unit to Baseplate Alpha Code Lock

Baseplates have a pre-set Alpha code locking device. This locking device prevents
the installation of an incompatible type of unit onto the base plate if the Alpha codes
do not match. All identical unit types have the same factory pre-set, two-letter
Alpha code installed prior to delivery.
The following unit types have two-part, pre-set Alpha code locking devices
installed (see Table 4 on page 79).
Table 4. Factory Pre-set Alpha Codes
Unit Key Position 1 Key Position 2

CI853 RS-232C Interface A C
CI854/CI854A/CI854B A D
PROFIBUS DP Interface
CI855 Ethernet interface for A E
MasterBus 300
CI856 S100 interface B A
CI857 INSUM Interface B B
CI858 DriveBus Interface B C
CI860 FOUNDATION Fieldbus B E
High Speed Ethernet
(FF HSE) Interface.
CI862 TRIO/Genius Interface (no Alpha lock) (no Alpha lock)
CI865 Satt I/O C F
CI867 Modbus TCP Interface D(1) B(1)
CI868 IEC 61850 Interface D(1) B(1)
CI869 AF 100 Interface D C
CI872 MOD5 Interface D E
CI871 PROFINET IO Interface D(1) B(1)
3BSE036351-600 79
Table 4. Factory Pre-set Alpha Codes (Continued)
Unit Key Position 1 Key Position 2

CI873 EtherNet/IP DeviceNet D(1) B(1)
Interface
BC810 CEX-Bus C A
Interconnection Unit
BC820 CEX-Bus E A
Interconnection Unit
SM810 C B
SM811 D D
SM812 D D
(1) The key positions are common to CI867, CI868, CI871 and CI873. Hence caution must be
exercised in field replacement. Ensure that correct CI is inserted, especially in hot insert.
For further details on pre-set Alpha codes, refer to the relevant unit documentation.
Ensure that the baseplate and the unit to be mounted have compatible Alpha codes.
Otherwise it may result in equipment damage. Any difficulty in installing a unit on a
particular baseplate indicates a difference in Alpha Code lock.
See Figure 24 on page 81 for further details of the Alpha code lock arrangement.
The mechanical keys are delivered pre-set and must not be altered. This prevents the
removable interface being placed on the wrong type of baseplate.
Do not manipulate the locking device. ABB will take no responsibility for
errors caused by manipulating locking devices.
80 3BSE036351-600
Pre-Set
Alpha Code Keys
Figure 24. Unit Baseplate Alpha Code Lock Arrangement
3BSE036351-600 81
Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Single Configuration Section 2 Installation
Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Single

Configuration
This topic does not apply to the PM891 processor unit. See Installing PM891 in
Single Configuration on page 91.
Use the procedure below to install the processor unit along the DIN-rail:
1. If already mounted, remove the CEX-Bus and ModuleBus terminations from
the sides of the processor unit.
For PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM866A insert the RCU Link
Termination plug TB852, at the RCU Link connector. The termination plug must
always be used for PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867 when
running in single configuration.
When a redundant processor is running in a single configuration use the RCU
Link Cable TK851, if the RCU Link Termination plug TB852 is not available.
2. Mount the processor unit, the communication interfaces, and the S800 I/O
units.
The communication interfaces for all PM8xx is on the CEX-Bus to the left of
the processor unit. The S800 I/O units for PM8xx is on the electrical
ModuleBus to the right of the processor unit.
3. Press them gently together and make sure that the ModuleBus and the CEX-
Bus are correctly connected, via baseplate connectors.
4. Reinsert the bus terminations into the communication units at farthest away
from the processor unit.
a. For CEX-Bus TB850 (TB851 if cable TK850 is used), see Figure 25 on
page 84 and Figure 26 on page 85. When using BC810, see Figure 27 on
page 86. If no units are used on the CEX-Bus, no bus termination is
required.
b. For ModuleBus TB807, refer to the S800 I/O documentation. If no units
are used on the ModuleBus, no bus termination is required.
82 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Single Configuration
5. Baseplate cable connections:

a. Connect the power leads and, if applicable, power supervision signals
from SS82x to screw terminals SA and SB (see Figure 28 on page 87).
b. Connect the Control Network cables to CN1 (single connection) or CN1 +
CN2 (redundant connection).
c. Connect the serial protocol to COM3.

d. Connect the Control Builder to COM4 with cable TK212 (if required for
changing an IP address etc). Otherwise connect the Control Builder to the
Control Network.
6. Connect the optical ModuleBus to the optical contacts on the processor unit
(see Figure 2 on page 36 and Figure 45 on page 138). Information regarding
optical cable selection and cable length is provided in the S800 I/O
documentation.
Note that connection to the optical ModuleBus is identical to that for the processor
unit and for the FCI in S800 I/O (see Figure 59 on page 166.)
7. The PM8xx is supplied with an internal back-up battery. When the battery is to
be used, place it in the Internal Battery Holder (see Figure 68 on page 199).
When the external SB821/SB822 battery unit is to be used, install it according
to the instructions in Installing the SB821 External Battery Unit on page
150/Installing the SB822 Rechargeable External Battery Unit on page 151.
Do not place the internal back-up battery in the battery holder until the
AC 800M Controller has been powered-up normally and the memory back-up
function has been activated, that is, the B(attery) LED flashes. If no normal
power supply is connected to the processor unit with the battery in place, then
the CPU memory will immediately start to consume battery power.
3BSE036351-600 83
Always install a fresh internal or external battery at the end of the installation
phase. The original battery is heavily utilized due to frequent blackouts during
system installation.
Terminator
TB850
Figure 25. TB850 Terminator for CEX-Bus (male)
A TB850 male CEX-Bus termination unit is supplied with each package

(PM851K01, PM851AK01, PM856K01, PM856AK01, PM860K01, PM860AK01,
PM861K01, PM861AK01, PM862K01, PM864K01, PM864AK01, PM865K01,
PM866K01, PM866AK01, and PM867K01) of the PM8xx/TP830 processor unit.
PM851/PM851A is restricted to a maximum of one CEX module.
84 3BSE036351-600
TK850 Cable
Terminator
TB851
Figure 26. TB851 Terminator for CEX-Bus (female)
3BSE036351-600 85
PM861A/PM862/PM864A/
BC810 PM865/PM866A/PM867
Terminator
TB850
RCU Link
Terminator Cable
TB850
BC810
Figure 27. CEX-Bus Terminator when using BC810/BC820
86 3BSE036351-600
Figure 28. SA/SB Connectors for Supervision Signals
3BSE036351-600 87
Communication Ports
CN1 and CN2

The control network connects to one or two RJ45 connectors (CN1 and CN2)
depending on network option (single or redundant).
Use an RJ45 connector for IEEE802.3 (Ethernet) for connecting to a category 5
Shielded Twisted Pair cable (STP class 5).
Class 5, or higher, cable 10/100BaseT/TX max 100 m (110 yd). ABB recommends
the use of optical fiber in an industrial environment, for example 62.5/125
100BaseFX, max. distance 1500 m (1600 yd).
Table 5. TP830 CN1 and CN2 Connections (RJ45 connectors)
Pin Designation Direction Description

1 TD+ Out Transmit Data (plus)
2 TD- Out Transmit Data (minus)
3 RD+ In Receive Data (plus)
45 Not used
6 RD- In Receive Data (minus)
78 Not used
Housing Shield Shield
PM851/PM851A is restricted to one Ethernet (CN1) port, thus redundant

Ethernet is not available.
88 3BSE036351-600
COM3 Port
The COM3 is an RS-232C port with modem signals. This port is used for serial
protocols such as Modbus, Siemens 3964R, COMLI or custom-design.
Table 6. TP830 COM3 Connections (RJ45 connector)

1 RTS Out Request To Send
2 DTR Out Data Terminal Ready
3 TD Out Transmit Data
4 0V - Signal ground
5 0V - Signal ground
6 RD In Receive Data
7 DCD In Data Carrier Detect
8 CTS In Clear To Send
Housing Shield - Shield
3BSE036351-600 89
COM4 Port
The COM4 port is an RS-232C port, opto-isolated and without modem signals.
Connect Control Builder to this port when connecting directly to the controller, or,
when not required, without the need use the remote tool connection via the Control
Network.
Table 7. TP830 COM4 Connections (RJ45 connector)

1 Not used
2 Not used
4 0V Signal ground
5 0V Signal ground
7 Not used
8 Not used
90 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing PM891 in Single Configuration
Installing PM891 in Single Configuration

Use the procedure below to install the PM891 processor unit in single configuration:
1. If already connected, remove the CEX-Bus termination from the side of the
PM891 processor unit.
2. Mount the PM891 processor unit, the communication interfaces, and the S800
I/O units on the DIN-rail.
The communication interfaces for PM891 is connected to the CEX-Bus to the
left of the processor unit. The S800 I/O units for PM891 is connected through
the optical ModuleBus at the bottom of the processor unit.
3. Re-insert the bus terminations into the communication units farthest from the
processor unit. For CEX-Bus, use the TB850 termination plug (TB851, if
CEX-Bus Extension cable TK850 is used. If no units are used on the CEX-Bus,
no bus termination is required.
4. Provide termination for redundancy, by using the termination plug
TB853 RCU Control Link Terminator, at the RCU Control Link connector at
the top of the processor unit.
5. Provide cable connections:
a. Connect the power leads to screw terminals L+ and L-. If applicable,
connect the power supervision signals from SS82x to the screw terminals
SA and SB.
b. Connect the Control Network cables to CN1 (single connection) or
CN1 + CN2 (redundant connection).
c. Connect the Control Builder to COM4 with cable TK212 (if required, for
changing an IP address). Otherwise connect the Control Builder to the
Control Network.
3BSE036351-600 91
Installing PM891 in Single Configuration Section 2 Installation
6. Connect the optical ModuleBus to the optical contacts (Tx1/Rx1) at the bottom
of the processor unit (see Figure 10 on page 47). For information regarding
optical cable selection and cable length, refer to the S800 I/O documentation.
The connection to the optical ModuleBus is identical to that for the processor unit
and for the FCI in S800 I/O (see Figure 59 on page 166.)
7. Provide battery backup by connecting the PM891 unit to the external SB822
battery unit. Install it according to the instructions in Installing the SB822
Rechargeable External Battery Unit on page 151.
Communication Ports - CN1 and CN2

The control network connects to one or two RJ45 connectors (CN1 and CN2)
depending on network option (single or redundant).
Use an RJ45 connector for IEEE802.3 (Ethernet) for connecting to a category 5
Shielded Twisted Pair cable (STP class 5).
Class 5, or higher, cable 10/100BaseT/TX max 100 m (110 yd). ABB recommends
the use of optical fiber in an industrial environment, for example 62.5/125
100BaseFX, max. distance 1500 m (1600 yd).
Table 8. TP830 CN1 and CN2 Connections (RJ45 connectors)

1 TD+ Out Transmit Data (plus)
2 TD- Out Transmit Data (minus)
3 RD+ In Receive Data (plus)
45 Not used
6 RD- In Receive Data (minus)
78 Not used
92 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing PM891 in Single Configuration
COM4 Port
The COM4 port is an RS-232C port, opto-isolated and without modem signals.
Connect the Control Builder to this port when connecting directly to the controller,
or, when not required, without the need use the remote tool connection through the
Control Network.
Table 9. PM891 COM4 Connections (RJ45 connector)

1 Not used
2 Not used
4 0V Signal ground
5 0V Signal ground
7 Not used
8 Not used
3BSE036351-600 93
Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Redundant Configuration Section 2 Installation
Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Redundant

Configuration
This topic does not apply to the installation of PM891 unit in redundant
configuration. See Installing the PM891 Processor Unit in Redundant
Configuration on page 98.
In redundant configuration two PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867
units are mounted onto two separate DIN-rails. If sufficient space is available, the
units can be mounted onto the same DIN-rail
Note that in redundant CPU configuration, COM3 and the electrical ModuleBus
on the baseplate can not be used.
Use the following procedure to install the processor units along the DIN-rail:
1. Mount the processor units.
2. Mount the communication interfaces on the CEX-Bus to the left of the
processor unit. If BC810/BC820s are used, the configuration of the segments
should be considered. If BC810/BC820s are not used, the interfaces can be
divided between the two CPUs in any preferred way.
3. Press the units gently together and make sure that the CEX-Bus is correctly
connected, via the connectors on the baseplates.
4. If BC810 is used, connect the TK851 cable to the two BC810 (Figure 31 on
page 104). If BC820 is used, connect the TK857 cable to the two BC820
(Figure 37 on page 112). If BC810/BC820s are not used, mount the CEX-Bus
extension cable TK850 to the units at farthest away from the processor units or,
if no units are mounted, directly to the CEX-Bus on the processor unit. The
CEX-Bus extension cable must be connected to both CPUs whether or not
there are any other CEX-Bus units (Figure 29 on page 97).
94 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Redundant Configuration
5. If BC810 is used connect the RCU Link Cable TK851 to both CPUs. Note that
in redundant CPU configuration, COM3 and the electrical ModuleBus on the
baseplate can not be used. If BC820 is used, connect TK857 between each
CPU and it's BC820.
Note that the RCU Link Cable TK851 or TK857 must be used and can not be
replaced by a similar cable. Using another cable will disable the identification of
the CPUs in the CB and Operator Station. When running in single configuration
the RCU Link Cable TK851 might temporarily be used to perform the function of
a termination plug.
If BC810 us used, the CPU connected to the RCU Link Cable connector marked
UPPER will be defined as UPPER in the Control Builder and Operator
Station. The marking has no relevance to the physical placement of the CPUs.
Any CPU can become the Primary CPU. For BC820 this is handled by setting the
switch on TP850 to either "Lo" or "Up.
6. Baseplates cable connections:
a. Connect the power leads to both CPUs and the power supervision signals
from SS8xx to screw terminals SA and SB (see Figure 28 on page 87).
If BC810 is used, both CPUs should be powered from the same supply (single or
redundant). For redundant power supply, see Figure 51 on page 147.
b. Connect the Control Network cables to CN1 (single bus connection) or
CN1 + CN2 (redundant bus connection). The Control Network is
connected to both CPUs.
c. Connect the Control Builder to COM4 with cable TK212 of the Primary
CPU (if required for changing an IP address etc.). Otherwise connect the
Control Builder to the Control Network.
7. Connect the optical ModuleBus to the optical contacts on the processor units
documentation.
Connection to the optical ModuleBus is identical to that for the processor unit
and for the FCI in S800 I/O (Figure 60 on page 167).
3BSE036351-600 95
Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Redundant Configuration Section 2 Installation
8. The CPUs are supplied with internal back-up batteries. When the batteries are
to be used, place them in the Internal Battery Holder (Figure 68 on page 199).
When the external SB821/SB822 battery units are to be used, install them
according to the instructions in Installing the SB821 External Battery Unit on
page 150 / Installing the SB822 Rechargeable External Battery Unit on page
151.
Do not place the internal back-up battery in the battery holder until the AC 800M
Controller has been powered-up normally and the memory back-up function has
been activated, that is, the B(attery) LED flashes. If no normal power supply is
connected to the processor unit with the battery in place, then the CPU memory
will immediately start to consume battery power.
96 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Redundant Configuration
Communication Ports
Same as for single configuration (see Table 5 on page 88, Table 6 on page 89 and
Table 7 on page 90).
CEX-Bus ext.
cable TK850
RCU Link cable

TK851
Figure 29. Connection of CPU redundancy
3BSE036351-600 97
Installing the PM891 Processor Unit in Redundant Configuration Section 2 Installation
Installing the PM891 Processor Unit in Redundant

Configuration
In redundant configuration, two PM891 units are mounted on two separate
DIN-rails. If sufficient space is available, the units can be mounted on the same
DIN-rail.
Use the following procedure to install the processor units along the DIN-rail:
1. Mount the processor units.
2. Mount the communication interfaces on the CEX-Bus to the left of the
processor unit. If BC810 are used, the configuration of the segments should be
considered. If BC810 are not used, the interfaces can be divided between the
two CPUs in any preferred way.
3. Press the units gently together and ensure that the CEX-Bus is correctly
connected, through the connector on the unit.
4. If BC810 are used, connect the TK851 cable to the two BC810. If BC810 are
not used, mount the CEX-Bus extension cable TK850 to the units at farthest
away from the processor units or, if no units are mounted, directly to the CEX-
Bus on the processor unit. The CEX-Bus extension cable must be connected to
both CPUs whether or not there are any other CEX-Bus units (Figure 29 on
page 97).
5. Connect the RCU Data Link Cable (TK855) and the RCU Control Link Cable
(TK856) to both CPUs.
The RCU Data Link Cable (TK855) and the RCU Control Link Cable (TK856)
must not be replaced by similar cables. Using another cable will disable the
identification of the CPUs in the Control Builder and Operator Station.
The CPU connected to the RCU Control Link Cable (TK856) connector marked
UPPER will be defined as UPPER in the Control Builder and Operator
Station. The marking has no relevance to the physical placement of the CPUs.
Any CPU can become the Primary CPU.
98 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the PM891 Processor Unit in Redundant Configuration
6. Provide connections for power supply and network:

a. Connect the power leads to screw terminals L+ and L- of both CPUs, and
the power supervision signals from SS8xx to screw terminals SA and SB.
Both CPUs should be powered from the same supply (single or redundant). For
redundant power supply, see Figure 51 on page 147.
b. Connect the Control Network cables to CN1 (single bus connection) or
CN1 + CN2 (redundant bus connection). The Control Network is
connected to both CPUs.
c. Connect the Control Builder to COM4 with cable TK212 of the Primary
CPU (if required for changing an IP address etc.). Otherwise connect the
Control Builder to the Control Network.
7. Connect the optical ModuleBus to the optical contacts on the processor units
documentation.
Connection to the optical ModuleBus is identical to that for the processor unit
and for the FCI in S800 I/O (Figure 60 on page 167).
8. Provide battery backup by connecting the CPUs to the external SB822 battery
units. Install them according to the instructions in Installing the SB822
Rechargeable External Battery Unit on page 151.
3BSE036351-600 99
Installing the PM891 Processor Unit in Redundant Configuration Section 2 Installation
Figure 30. Example of PM891-Redundant configuration
Communication Ports
Same as for single configuration (see Table 8 on page 92 and Table 9 on page 93).
100 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the CEX-Bus without BC810/BC820
Installing the CEX-Bus without BC810/BC820

The CEX-Bus, used for connection of communication interfaces to the processor
unit, is located on the left-hand side of the processor unit baseplate (TP830).
A bus termination unit must always be fitted to the last unit on the CEX-Bus, as
shown in Figure 25 on page 84. A TB850 male CEX-Bus termination unit is
supplied with each PM8xx/TP830 processor unit.
However, should the configuration require the use of a TK850 extension cable, as
shown in Figure 26 on page 85, then a TB851 female CEX-Bus termination unit is
required and must be fitted to the last baseplate in the sequence. A TB851 female
CEX-Bus termination unit is supplied with each TK850 extension cable.
TK850 CEX-Bus Extension Cable

Only one TK850 CEX-Bus extension cable may be used in any one CEX-Bus.
Cable length: 0.7 m (2.3 ft).
Installing the CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit BC810/TP857

The BC810 units must be mounted directly to the CEX-Bus on the processor unit
base plate. The SM81x, if used, and communication interfaces are then mounted to
the CEX-Bus on the BC810, and terminated in each end with TB850 male CEX-Bus
termination unit. The two BC810 are connected with the interconnection cable
TK851.
The maximum number of CEX-Bus units connected to a BC810 is six. The
primary function of BC810 is to divide the CEX-Bus into two physically separate
segments for increased system availability, a faulty CEX-Bus unit on one
segment will not affect the processor unit or the other CEX-Bus segment. It is
also important to note that when using the BC810 together with redundant CEX-
Bus units these units shall be mounted on different BC810 CEX-Bus segments.
3BSE036351-600 101
Installing the CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit BC810/TP857 Section 2 Installation
See Figure 31 on page 104 and Figure 32 on page 105 for configuration examples.
Use the configuration which coincides with the requirements for availability,
redundancy and safety of your AC 800M controller system.
Do not connect the two CEX-Bus segments, separated with BC810, to each other
with CEX-Bus extension cable TK850.
The BC810 is powered either from the processor unit via the CEX-Bus or through
its external connector for power supply. This external connector can also support the
CEX-Bus with redundant power.
If the external connector is used in a redundant configuration of BC810, there are
two valid connection possibilities:
Single power source (SD8xx or SS8xx) for the processor units and the BC810s
on both the segments (say, segments A and B). See Figure 33 on page 106.
One power source (SD8xx or SS8xx) for the processor unit on segment A and
the BC810 on segment B, and another power source (SD8xx or SS8xx) for the
processor unit on segment B and the BC810 on segment A. See Figure 34 on
page 107.
For obtaining redundant power supply, connect the external connector to the
SS82x voting device. For details of SS82x connections, see Installing the
SS823/SS832 Voting Unit on page 143. See also Powering from an External
Source on page 181.
In AC 800M High Integrity Controllers it is required that the external supply

input of BC810 is connected and that the power supply is strictly configured
either according to Figure 33 or according to Figure 34 and nor is it allowed to
change the configuration by way of for instance individual circuit breakers
between modules.
102 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit BC810/TP857
Hot swap of the BC810 located next to a primary or single controller CPU,
otherwise called direct BC810, might jeopardize the whole controller and
should not be performed unless every module on the CEX-Bus are in a non-
operating state. Note: In an AC 800M HI controller this is unconditionally and
intentionally leading to a shutdown of the controller.
Hot swap of the BC810 not located next to a primary or single controller CPU,
otherwise called indirect BC810, will shut down any non-redundant interface
located on that CEX-Bus segment and should not be performed unless such
interfaces already are in a non-operating state or their function is dispensable for
the controller.
3BSE036351-600 103
SM810/SM811(1)/SM812(2) BC810 PM861A/PM862/PM864/

PM864A/M865/PM866A/PM867
TK851
Cables
PM861A/PM862/PM864/
SM810/SM811(1)/SM812(2) BC810 PM864A/M865/PM866A/PM867
(1) Only for High Integrity Systems and only together with PM865
(2) Only for High Integrity Systems and only together with PM867
Figure 31. Redundant Communication Interface Units and Controllers
104 3BSE036351-600
CI854A SM810/SM811(1) BC810 PM861A/PM862/PM864A/

SM811(2) PM865/PM866/PM866A/PM867
RCU Link
Cable
SM810/
CI854A
SM810(1)/ BC810
SM810(2)
(1) Only for High Integrity Systems and only together with PM865, where SM810 is used with
SM810 and SM811 is used with SM811.
(2) Only for High Integrity Systems and only together with PM867, where SM811 is used with
SM811 and SM812 is used with SM812.
Figure 32. Redundant Communication Interface Units and Single Controller
3BSE036351-600 105
CEX-Bus Units BC810 CPU
SD8xx/SS8xx
Figure 33. The Power Source Connected to the Same PM864/BC810 Segment, see
Installing the CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit BC810/TP857 on page 101 and Power
Supply System on page 178.
106 3BSE036351-600
SM810/SM811/
CEX-Bus Units SM812(1) BC810 CPU
SD8xx/SS8xx
SM810/ SD8xx/SS8xx
SM811/
CEX-Bus Units SM8121) BC810 CPU
(1) SM810/SM811 with PM865 CPU and SM812 with PM867 CPU.
Figure 34. The Power Source Connected to a Different PM865/BC810 or

PM867/BC810 Segment, see Installing the CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit
BC810/TP857 on page 101 and Power Supply System on page 178.
3BSE036351-600 107
Installing the CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit BC820/TP850

The BC820 units must be mounted directly to the CEX-Bus on the processor unit
base plate. BC820 are interconnected by self-made copper and fiber cables.
The maximum number of CEX-Bus units connected to a BC820 is six. The
primary function of BC820 is to divide the CEX-Bus into two physically separate
segments for increased system availability, a faulty CEX-Bus unit on one
segment will not affect the processor unit or the other CEX-Bus segment. It is
also important to note that when using the BC820 together with redundant CEX-
Bus units these units shall be mounted on different BC820 CEX-Bus segments.
See Figure 37 on page 112 and Figure 38 on page 113 for configuration examples.
Use the configuration which coincides with the requirements for availability,
redundancy and safety of your AC 800M controller system.
Do not connect the two CEX-Bus segments, separated with BC820, to each other
with CEX-Bus extension cable TK850.
The BC820 is powered either from the processor unit via the CEX-Bus or through
its external connector for power supply. This external connector can also support the
CEX-Bus with redundant power.
If the external connector is used in a redundant configuration of BC820, there are
two valid connection possibilities:
Single power source (SD8xx or SS8xx) for the processor units and the BC820s
on both the segments (say, segments A and B). See Figure 38 on page 113.
One power source (SD8xx or SS8xx) for the processor unit on segment A and
the BC820 on segment B, and another power source (SD8xx or SS8xx) for the
processor unit on segment B and the BC820 on segment A. See Figure 39 on
page 114.
For obtaining redundant power supply, connect the external connector to the
SS82x voting device. For details of SS82x connections, see Installing the
SS823/SS832 Voting Unit on page 143. See also Powering from an External
Source on page 181.
108 3BSE036351-600
The BC820 CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit, offers a way to section the CEX-Bus
into two independent segments. This improves availability in systems with
redundant communication interfaces. Figure 35 on page 109 shows a configuration
example. The base plate has a preset, two letter Alpha code lock to prevent the
installation of an incorrect type of unit onto the TP850 base plate.
It is not allowed to manipulate CEX bus base plates in a powered and running
system. Before changing or removing a base plate, all CEX modules on that
The BC820 is powered from the processor unit via the CEX-Bus and can also
support the CEX-Bus with redundant power through its external connector for
power supply.
BC820 transmits the RCU-Link and extends the CEX-Bus and RCU-Link cable
length up to 200 m. The number of CEX-Bus interfaces is limited to 6 with each
BC820.
BC820 can only be used with PM862, PM866 (PR:H or later), PM866A
3BSE036351-600 109
Cables and Connectors Section 2 Installation
Hot swap of the BC820 located next to a primary or single controller CPU,
otherwise called direct BC820, might jeopardize the whole controller and
should not be performed unless every module on the CEX-Bus are in a
non-operating state.
Hot swap of the BC820 is not located next to a primary or single controller CPU,
if located then indirect BC820, will shut down and non-redundant interface
located on that CEX-Bus segment, should not be performed unless such
interfaces already are in a non-operating state or their function is dispensable for
the controller.
The BC820 unit can be set in two different states, called upper or lower. Note that
the two units in a pair never are allowed to be set to the same state. i.e. one shall be
set to lower and the other to upper. The reason for that is to support functions in role
selection, primary and secondary, between the controller CPUs. A toggle switch
selects the state, see Figure 36.
Figure 36. BC820 Toggle Switch
Cables and Connectors

RCU Control Link: Modular Jack, RJ45, shielded twisted pair CAT5 Gigabit
crossover cable with all four pairs crossed: EIA/TIA-568 standard crossover T568A
to T568B see Table 10 below. Length: max 200m.
110 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Cables and Connectors
Table 10. Crossover cable pinout (shown as T568A to T568B)
Connector A [pin] Color Connector B [pin] Color

1 White/Green 1 White/Orange
2 Green 2 Orange
3 White/Orange 3 White/Green
4 Blue 4 White/Brown
5 White/Blue 5 Brown
6 Orange 6 Green
7 White/Brown 7 Blue
8 Brown 8 White/Blue
Shield Braid Shield Braid
RCU Data Link: The optical interconnection is compatible with LC Duplex optical
connector interface conforming to ANSI TIA/EIA60-10 (FOCIS 10A). The type of
optical cable is 50/125m OM3 fiber. Length: max 200m.
External 24V DC supply (L+, L-): Cable assembly for 2-pole terminal block.
Length: max 10m. Plugs included in package.
RCU-Link Cable TK857V0003: Cable between controller CPU and BC820.
Length: 0,3M. 2 pieces included in package.
3BSE036351-600 111
BC820 PM862/PM866/PM866A
PM862/PM866/PM866A
BC820
112 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Cables and Connectors
SD8xx/SS8xx
Figure 38. The Power Source Connected to the Same PM866/BC820 Segment, see
3BSE036351-600 113
SD8xx/SS8xx
SD8xx/SS8xx
Figure 39. The Power Source Connected to a Different PM866/BC820 Segment, see
114 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing SM810/TP855
Installing SM810/TP855
The SM810 is mounted directly to the CEX-Bus on the processor unit base plate or
to the CEX-Bus interconnection unit BC810. The communication interfaces are
then mounted to the CEX-Bus on the SM810. See Figure 31 on page 104 and
Figure 32 on page 105 for configuration examples.
Digital I/O Connection

The SM810 has a connector with two digital inputs and three digital outputs that can
be used for High Integrity related digital I/O (not process I/O). See Table 11.
In a redundant configuration, the corresponding digital inputs to both the
SM810s must be connected to common digital input switches.
For example, the I2s of both SM810s must be connected to a common switch. If
separate sources are used, connect the sources to a common switch, and then
derive connections from the switch to both the SM810s.
The input signals are used for system function, see AC 800M High Integrity
documentation.
Table 11. SM810 Digital I/O Connector
PIN Designation Description

1 UP Common I/O power
2 I1 Digital input 1 (Reset all forces)
3 I2 Digital input 2 (Access enable)
4 I3 Digital input 3
5 O1 Digital output 1 (Any force active)
6 O2 Digital output 2 (System alarm)
7 ZP Common I/O return
3BSE036351-600 115
Installing SM810/TP855 Section 2 Installation
Connection of Input Signals to SM810
0V B 0V A
I1: Reset all forces

I2: Access enable
24V A
24V B
Figure 40. Connection of input signals to redundant SM810.
116 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing SM810/TP855
Connection of Output Signals to SM810
24V B 24V A
O1: Any force active

O2: System alarm
0V
Figure 41. Connection of output signals from redundant SM810.
3BSE036351-600 117
Installing SM811/TP868 or SM812/TP868 Section 2 Installation
Installing SM811/TP868 or SM812/TP868

The SM811/SM812 is mounted directly to the CEX-Bus on the processor unit base
plate or to the CEX-Bus interconnection unit BC810. The communication interfaces
are then mounted to the CEX-Bus on the SM811/SM812. See Figure 31 on page
104 and Figure 32 on page 105 for configuration examples. Use the enclosed cable
TK852V010 to connect the SM Link of the two SM811/SM812 in case of redundant
configuration.
Digital I/O Connection

The SM811/SM812 has a connector with three digital inputs and two digital outputs
that can be used for High Integrity related digital I/O (not process I/O). See
Table 12.
The Access Enable input (I2) must be connected to a key switch in the operators
panel. The Reset all Forces input (I1) and Hot-insert input (I3) must be connected to
impulse type panel if they are used.
In a redundant configuration, the corresponding digital inputs to both the
SM811/SM812s must be connected to common digital input switches.
For example, the I3s of both SM811/SM812s must be connected to a common
switch. If separate sources are used, connect the sources to a common switch, and
then derive connections from the switch to both the SM811/SM812s.
The input signals are used for system function, see AC 800M High Integrity
documentation.
Table 12. SM811/SM812 Digital I/O Connector

1 UP Common I/O power
2 I1 Digital input 1 (Reset all forces)
3 I2 Digital input 2 (Access enable)
4 I3 Digital input 3 (Hot-insert of SM)
5 O1 Digital output 1 (Any force active)
118 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing SM811/TP868 or SM812/TP868
Table 12. SM811/SM812 Digital I/O Connector (Continued)

6 O2 Digital output 2 (System alarm)
7 ZP Common I/O return
3BSE036351-600 119
Installing SM811/TP868 or SM812/TP868 Section 2 Installation
Connection of Input Signals to SM811/SM812
0V B 0V A
I1: Reset all forces

I2: Access enable
I3: Hot-insert of SM
24V A
24V B
Figure 42. Connection of input signals to redundant SM811/SM812
120 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing SM811/TP868 or SM812/TP868
Connection of Output Signals to SM811/SM812
24V B 24V A
O1: Any force active

O2: System alarm
0V
Figure 43. Connection of output signals from redundant SM811/SM812
3BSE036351-600 121
Installing the RS-232C Interface, CI853/TP853 Section 2 Installation
Installing the RS-232C Interface, CI853/TP853

CI853 is powered from the processor unit via the CEX bus and requires therefore no
additional external power source.
Use the following procedure to install the CI853/TP853:
1. Mount the unit onto the DIN-rail, see Mounting AC 800M Units onto DIN-
Rail on page 69 and Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Single
2. Connect the cable (maximum 15 m (16.4 yd)) to one of the contacts on the
baseplate. Connect the cable screen to the ground terminal within the connector
to ground the screen via CI583.
3. If cables longer than 15 m (16.4 yd.) are required, then a short distance modem
TC562 must be used. In this case mount the modem onto a DIN-rail in a
suitable position, connect a 24 V DC power supply to the modem and connect
cable TK853 from CI853 to the TC562 modem input terminals
4. Connect the TC562 modem output terminals to the outgoing cable.
The TC562 modem can be used for the following distances/speeds:
Up to 1000 m (1100 yd) with transmission speed 19200 bit/s
Up to 12000 m (13100 yd) with transmission speed 1200 bit/s
Connectors
Connect the RS-232C channels to the RJ45 connectors marked COM1 and COM2
on the TP853 Baseplate.
Table 13. CI853 RS23-C Interface COM1 and COM2 Connectors

19 See COM3 on TP830, Table 6 on page 89.
Note that there is no unit redundancy for the CI853 unit.
122 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the PROFIBUS DP Interface, CI854/CI854A/CI854B/TP854
Installing the PROFIBUS DP Interface,

CI854/CI854A/CI854B/TP854
The CI854/CI854A/CI854B is powered from the processor unit via the CEX-Bus
and requires therefore no additional external power source.
Use the following procedure to install the CI854/CI854A/CI854B/TP854:
2. Install a connector on the PROFIBUS DP cable. A connector with a switchable
built-in bus termination is recommended. Connect the cable screen to the metal
case of the connector to ground the screen via CI854/CI854A/CI854B. Connect
the data cable wire A to the terminal PIN8 (RxD/TxD-N) and the data cable
wire B to the terminal PIN3 (RxD/TxD-P). If the data transfer cable has data
wires with red and green insulation, then the following assignment should be
used:
Data cable wire A: green
Data cable wire B: red
3. Connect the cable shield for both lines to functional ground, for example by
using a grounding clamp.
4. Connect the PROFIBUS DP cable to one of the connectors PROFIBUS A or
PROFIBUS B on the baseplate. For support of Line Redundancy connect a
second PROFIBUS DP cable to the other contact.
5. If the CI854/CI854A/CI854B is at the end of the PROFIBUS DP cable, switch
the bus termination ON. Otherwise leave the bus termination switched OFF.
The following applies for CI854A/CI854B:
6. If the CI854A/CI854B is installed in a redundant configuration connect the
PROFIBUS DP cable to primary and backup module. Do it like described in
Figure 44 on page 124. Switch the termination ON for the interface on primary
or backup module that is at the end of the line.
3BSE036351-600 123
Installing the PROFIBUS DP Interface, CI854/CI854A/CI854B/TP854 Section 2 Installation
F F
R R
RxA RxA
RxB RxB
PRIM PRIM
DUAL DUAL
CI854A CI854A
PROFIBUS A
PROFIBUS B
PROFIBUS A
PROFIBUS B
ON ON
Line A Line B
Figure 44. Connection of Redundant PROFIBUS DP (CI854A/CI854B)
PROFIBUS DP Connection
The PROFIBUS DP cable is connected via the 9-pin female D-type connector
located on TP854.
124 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the PROFIBUS DP Interface, CI854/CI854A/CI854B/TP854
Installation of PROFIBUS DP
Table 14. CI854/CI854A/CI854B PROFIBUS DP Connector

1 Shield Shield/protective ground
2 Not Used
3 RxD/TxD-P Receive/Transmit Data P-line (B-line)
4 CNTR-P Indicates Direction to Repeater (TTL)
5 DGND Digital Ground
6 VP +5 V, for terminating resistors
7
8 RxD/TxD-N Receive/Transmit Data N-line (A-line)
9 DGND Digital Ground
For installation of the fieldbus and recommended certified fieldbus devices and
components, see fieldbus documentation and Appendix C, Recommended
Components. The PROFIBUS DP must be connected with shielded twisted pair
cables.
Note that there is no unit redundancy for the CI854 unit. Only for
CI854A/CI854B.
Hot swap is supported for CI854A/CI854B (not CI854).
3BSE036351-600 125
Installing the MasterBus 300 Interface, CI855/TP853 Section 2 Installation
Installing the MasterBus 300 Interface, CI855/TP853

The CI855 is powered from the processor unit via the CEX-Bus and requires
therefore no additional external power source.
The baseplate, TP853, provides two Ethernet ports for connection of redundant
Ethernet network for MasterBus 300.
1. Mount the unit on the DIN-rail, see Mounting AC 800M Units onto DIN-Rail
on page 69 and Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Single
2. Connect the Ethernet twisted pair cable to the contact on the baseplate.
3. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to an Ethernet Switch.
If an interface to an AUI is required, a converter from 10BaseT to AUI is needed.
The communication unit, CI855, can not provide power to the transceiver, therefore
a separate power source must be used.
Ethernet twisted pair Connection

The Ethernet twisted pair is connected via the 10BaseT RJ45 connector located on
TP853. For a description of the connector, see Table 5 on page 88.
126 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the S100 I/O Interface, CI856/TP856
Installing the S100 I/O Interface, CI856/TP856

1. Mount the unit on the DIN-rail, see Mounting AC 800M Units onto DIN-Rail
2. Connect the S100 I/O cable, TK575/TK580, to the contact on the baseplate. A
bus extender, DSBC174/DSBC176/DSBC173A, must be used.
S100 I/O Connection and Installation

Connect the S100 I/O rack cable TK575/TK580 to the I/O-labeled 36-pin
centerline miniature ribbon connector located on TP856.
Installation of S100 I/O

For installation of the S100 I/O-related components, see S100 I/O documentation.
3BSE036351-600 127
Installing the INSUM Interface, CI857/TP853 Section 2 Installation
Installing the INSUM Interface, CI857/TP853

2. Connect the Ethernet twisted pair cable to the COM1 connector on the
baseplate (COM2 is not used for connection to INSUM).
3. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the INSUM equipment via
Ethernet/LON Gateway.
Ethernet Twisted Pair Connection

The Ethernet twisted pair is connected via the 10BaseT RJ45 connector located on
TP853. For a description of the connector see Table 5 on page 88.
128 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the DriveBus Interface, CI858/TP858
Installing the DriveBus Interface, CI858/TP858

The CI858 is powered from the processor unit via the CEX bus and requires
therefore no additional external power source. The unit is mounted onto a horizontal
DIN rail.
Mount the unit onto the DIN-rail, see Mounting AC 800M Units onto DIN-Rail on
page 69, Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Single Configuration on
page 82 and CI858 and TP858 DriveBus Interface on page 332.
Optical Connectors
The CI858 board connects to the drive system via three optical receiver/transmitter
pairs. HP/Agilent Technologies Versatile Link Series (HFBR family) optical
transmitter/receivers are used. Transmission speed of the optical fibres is 4 Mbit/s.
Table 15. Optical Connectors
Connector Designation Description

DriveBus TxD Transmit data
DriveBus RxD Receive data
I/O Bus TxD Transmit data
I/O Bus RxD Receive data
PC Tools TxD Transmit data
PC Tools RxD Receive data
3BSE036351-600 129
Installing the FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet Interface, CI860/TP860 Section 2
Installing the FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet

Interface, CI860/TP860
1. Mount the unit onto the DIN-rail, see Mounting AC 800M Units onto DIN-Rail
2. Connect the Ethernet twisted pair cable to the COM connector on the
baseplate.
3. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to Ethernet network via standard
Ethernet components.
4. Please make sure to meet the FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet
specification of the network and the network devices.

The Ethernet twisted pair is connected via the RJ45 connector located on TP860.
For a description of the connector see Table 5 on page 88.
130 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the TRIO Fieldbus Interface CI862
Installing the TRIO Fieldbus Interface CI862

The CI862 is powered from the processor unit via the CEX-Bus and requires no
additional external power source. No field device is powered from the CI862.
Use the following procedure to install the CI862:
1. Mount the unit onto the DIN-rail.
2. Connect the field bus cable to the LAN connector (right most connector). See
the CI862 Installation book for TRIO field bus guidelines, cable types and
length.
The Hand-Held Monitor, if used, is connected to the HHM connector.
Unit to Baseplate Alpha Code Lock

The CI862 unit and baseplate have the locking device removed because of the
placement of the electronics inside the unit. The electronics will not allow the CI862
unit to be installed in any baseplate with a locking device. However, other units
could be inserted into the CI862 baseplate.
The CI862 baseplate has no locking device. Insert only the CI862 unit into this
baseplate. Insertion of other unit types may cause damage to the equipment.
Bus Termination
The appropriate terminating resistor must be attached to both the beginning and end
of the bus. The characteristic impedance for each type of cable is listed in
Table 148. If the CI862 is at either end of the bus, the characteristic resistance is set
by a switch on the Field Bus Interface Module, Table 16. If a TRIO module is at the
beginning or end of the bus, the bus can be terminated with a resistor or a
terminating resistance plug, 6202FP00150 for 150 W or 6202FP00075 for 75 W.
BSM stubs should not be terminated.
Table 16. Field Bus Termination Switch Settings of the CI862
Dip Switch(1) Setting

1 75 ohms
2 110 ohms(2)
3BSE036351-600 131
Bus Termination Section 2 Installation
Table 16. Field Bus Termination Switch Settings of the CI862 (Continued)
Dip Switch(1) Setting

3 150 ohms
4 Not Used
(1) The dip switch must be closed to make the termination connection. The
default is open, (no internal termination).
(2) The 110 ohm option may be used to terminate cables with an
impedance in the range of 100 to 120 ohms.
As shown in Figure 84, the dip switch is located on the bottom of the housing when
looking from the front. Switch 1 is towards the top of the housing.
132 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the Satt I/O Units and CI865 Module
Installing the Satt I/O Units and CI865 Module

The CI865 is powered from the processor unit via the CEX-Bus and requires no
additional external power source. No field device is powered from the CI865.
Use the following procedure to connect the ControlNet to the BNC connector of the
I/O systems and the CI865 module. For more information see Satt I/O Interface for
AC 800M (3BSE042821*).
The BNC connector is located:
Rack I/O - at the rear of the 200-RACN module.
Series 200 I/O - at the front of the 200-ACN module.
CI865 - at the front of the CI865 module.
1. Select a suitable location for the tap within one meter from the ControlNet
BNC connector. When selecting the tap location, keep in mind the routing of
the drop and trunk cables. They should not be routed close to high-voltage
cables. Avoid bending the trunk cable too much.
2. The tap can be mounted in various ways, for example using a DIN rail or
screwed into a suitable structure. Even if the tap is not mounted on a DIN rail,
the universal mounting bracket should be used to avoid galvanic connection to
a conducting structure.
3. Connect the tap drop cable to the BNC connector. Before starting up the
system, all ControlNet cable connections should be tested. Check the pulling
strength of applied connectors.
4. Define the network node address:
Rack I/O - by turning the two switches (x10 and x1) on front of the 200-
RACN module to the correct position. A node address in the range 02-99
should be selected for the 200-RACNs.
Series 200 I/O - by clicking the push button switches on the front of the
200-ACN module. A node address in the range 02-99 should be selected
for the 200-ACNs.
CI865 - The node address is fixed to 01.
3BSE036351-600 133
Installing the Modbus TCP Interface CI867/TP867 Section 2 Installation
Installing the Modbus TCP Interface CI867/TP867

The CI867 is powered from the processor unit via the CEX-Bus and no additional
external power source is required.
Railon page 69 and Installing the PM86x/TP830 Processor Unit in Single
Configurationon page 82.
2. Connect the 10/100Mbps Ethernet twisted pair cable to the CH1 connector on
the baseplate.
3. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to a Fast Ethernet network via
standard Ethernet components.
4. Connect the 10Mbps Ethernet twisted pair cable to the CH2 connector on the
baseplate.
5. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to a Ethernet network via standard
Ethernet components.

The Fast 10/100 Mbps Ethernet twisted pair is connected via the RJ45 connector
(CH1) located on TP867. The slower 10 Mbps Ethernet twisted pair is connected
via the RJ45 connector (CH2) located on TP867.
For a description of the connectors see Table 5 on page 88.
134 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the IEC 61850 Interface CI868
Installing the IEC 61850 Interface CI868

The CI868 is powered from the processor unit via the CEX-Bus with no additional
external power source required.
To install CI868:
Railon page 69.
2. Connect the 100Mbps Ethernet twisted pair cable to the CH1 connector on the
baseplate.
3. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to a Fast Ethernet network via
standard Ethernet components. Refer to PTUST04-3211- Switch Management
for IEC 61850 for switches that are certified for IEC 61850.
Installing the AF 100 Interface CI869

The CI869 unit is powered from the processor unit via the CEX-Bus with no
additional external power source required.
To install CI869:
1. Mount the CI869 unit onto the DIN-rail. See Mounting AC 800M Units onto
DIN-Rail on page 69.
2. Connect the AF 100 twisted pair to the 4-pin contact of CI869.
In case of redundant media, connect the other AF 100 twisted pair to the other
4-pin contact.
3. Connect the other end of the twisted pair to the AF 100 bus.
For details on AF 100 connections, refer to the Advant Fieldbus 100 User Manual
(3BSE000506*).
3BSE036351-600 135
Installing the PROFINET IO Interface CI871 Section 2 Installation
Installing the PROFINET IO Interface CI871

The CI871 unit is powered from the processor unit through the CEX-Bus, which
requires no additional external power source.
To install CI871:
1. Mount the CI871 unit on the DIN-rail.
2. Connect the 100 Mbps Ethernet cable to the CH1 connector on the baseplate.
3. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the PROFINET IO network.
Installing the MOD5 Interface CI872

The CI872 unit is powered from the processor unit through the CEX-bus, and does
not require any additional external power source.
To install CI872:
2. Connect the fiber optic cables to the CH1, CH2, and CH3 connectors on the
CI872. Leave the protective plugs mounted on unused ports.
3. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to a MOD5 controller.
Fiber Optics Specifications

The following data applies for the fiber optics connections between the AC 800M
controller and MOD5 controllers:
Wavelength: 820 nm.
Fiber size: 62.5/125 m multimode glass fiber.
Connector type: ST.
Max nominal fiber damping including connectors: 11 dB.
136 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the EtherNet/IP Interface CI873
Installing the EtherNet/IP Interface CI873

The CI873 is powered from the processor unit through the CEX-Bus, which
requires no additional external power source.
Follow the steps below to install CI873:
2. Connect the 100 Mbps Ethernet twisted pair cable to the CH1 connector on the
baseplate.
3. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the Fast Ethernet network
through the standard Ethernet components.
3BSE036351-600 137
Installing the ModuleBus for PM8xx Section 2 Installation
Installing the ModuleBus for PM8xx

This topic does not apply to PM891. See Installing the ModuleBus for PM891 on
page 139.
The ModuleBus has an electrical and a fiber optical interface that are logically the
same buses. A maximum of 12 I/O units can be connected to the Electrical
ModuleBus and up to seven clusters to the fiber optical ModuleBus. The fiber
optical interface is intended for local distribution of I/O clusters and for connection
of engineered and standard drives.
Figure 45 on page 138 provides details of the fiber optic connectors, together with
the PM8xx optical ModuleBus ports.
PM860
Tx Tx Tx Tx
Rx Rx Rx Rx L+
L
SA
SB
CN1 CN2 COM3 COM4
Duplex Fiber Optic Cable Connector
Rx
Tx
Simplex Fiber Optic Cable Connector
Figure 45. PM8xx Connectors for Optical ModuleBus
138 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the ModuleBus for PM891
Installing the ModuleBus for PM891

The ModuleBus for PM891 has a fiber optical interface. The interface is designed
for a maximum of seven clusters, of twelve non-redundant or six redundant modules
(that is, 7x12 = 84 modules). Redundant and non-redundant modules can be mixed.
The fiber-optical interface is intended for local distribution of I/O clusters. .
Figure 46 on page 139 provides details of the fiber optic connectors, together with
the PM891 optical ModuleBus ports.
Rx
Tx
Duplex Fiber Optic Cable Connector
Simplex Fiber Optic Cable Connector
Figure 46. PM891 connectors for Optical ModuleBus
3BSE036351-600 139
Installing the SD83x Power Supply Section 2 Installation
Installing the SD83x Power Supply

The SD83x power supply units (SD831 / SD832 / SD833 / SD834) should be
mounted horizontally at a DIN rail. The units have to be used in non-hazardous
locations only.
The four PSUs have data as follows:
SD831 = Input a.c. 100-240 V or d.c. 110-300 V.
Output d.c. 24 Volts regulated @ 3 A.
SD832 = Input a.c. 100-120 or 200-240 V.
Output d.c. 24 Volts regulated @ 5 A
SD833 = Input a.c. 100-120 or 200-240 V.
Internal primary main fuses are arranged to meet the requirements of electrical
safety publications for connection to the Phase - Neutral terminals of primary main
network; TN network, 1 (one) fuse. When SD831 and SD834 are used with d.c.
input, connect + terminal to L and - terminal to N.
Recommended mounting space and weight:
Table 17. PSUs SD831, 832, 833, 834 - Mounting space and weight.
SD831 SD832 SD833 SD834

Parameter
Converter Converter Converter Converter
Mounting spacing top(1) 40 mm 40 mm 40 mm 40 mm
Mounting spacing bottom(2) 20 mm 20 mm 20 mm 20 mm
Mounting spacing side 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm
Weight 430 g 500 g 700 g 1200 g
(1) Do not place temperature sensitive units above the PSU.
(2) Do not place units with high power dissipation below the PSU.
140 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the Mains Breaker Unit
Installing the Mains Breaker Unit

The mains breaker unit is supplied in separate components that must be mounted
onto a DIN-rail in order to form a complete assembly. Different distribution options
are available, see Figure 66 on page 182 and Figure 67 on page 183. For the sake of
simplicity, the installation described covers the redundant power
supplies/independent power supplies option.
Use the following procedure to correctly install the mains breaker unit:
1. Mount the mains breaker unit components onto the DIN-rail, from left to right,
close to the incoming power supply, in the order given below (see Figure 47 on
page 142).
a. A DIN-rail end-stop (1).
b. The terminal for the incoming protective ground (2).
The protective ground terminal (2) is fitted with a knife-like device to provide
automatic grounding to the DIN-rail.
c. The two terminals for the incoming Live and Neutral mains power (3).
These terminals are equipped with built-in jumpers which, if necessary,
can be opened to provide complete mains input power isolation.
d. The miniature mains breaker unit (4).
e. The protective ground distribution terminal (5).
f. The mains distribution terminal block (6), depending on the required
configuration.
g. A DIN-rail end-stop (1).
2. Connect the incoming mains, the protective ground terminals, the mains
breaker and the distribution terminals as shown in Figure 47 on page 142.
3. Install the two required links (7), fuse holders (8) and jumpers (9) onto
the distribution terminals. Fit the required fuses into the fuse holders, (glass
tube type, 5 x 20 mm (0.2 x 0.8 in)).
3BSE036351-600 141
Installing the Mains Breaker Unit Section 2 Installation
Removing the fuse holders or the jumper connections provides visual indication if
the power supply has been disconnected. The fuse holders have built-in red LEDs to
indicate a ruptured (defective) fuse.
3
PE Green/Yellow
5
4
2 6
1
8
To Power
PE Green/Yellow supply for
Field Equipment
PE Green/Yellow
MAINS
To Power
supply for
PE = Protective Ground
units
PE Green/Yellow
Figure 47. Installation of Mains Breaker Assembly
142 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the SS823/SS832 Voting Unit
Installing the SS823/SS832 Voting Unit

The SS8xx voting unit is used to connect two redundant power supplies to a
common load. Depending on the system configuration requirements, the two
redundant power supplies may be connected to completely separate mains supplies
or to the same mains supply, as shown in Figure 48 on page 144 for SS823,
Figure 49 on page 145, and Figure 50 on page 146 for SS832.
Use the following procedure to install the voting unit SS8xx:
1. Mount the voting unit SS8xx onto the DIN-rail, adjacent to the power supplies.
2. Connect the voting unit to the selected SD83x power supply units, in required
configuration. See Figure 49 on page 145 and Figure 50 on page 146 for
SS832.
3BSE036351-600 143
Installing the SS823/SS832 Voting Unit Section 2 Installation
Figure 48. Redundant Power Supply for SS823
144 3BSE036351-600
Figure 49. SS832 Redundant Configuration up to 10 A
3BSE036351-600 145
3. Connect the SS82x voting unit to the processor unit. Figure 51 on page 147
shows the connection to PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867 in
redundant configuration.
146 3BSE036351-600
From Mains
Breaker
Protective Ground
Figure 51. Redundant Power Supply Powering Redundant CPUs
3BSE036351-600 147
Power Supply Supervision

The status of power supplies in redundant configuration can be supervised via the
SS8xx voting unit. The supervision signals SA and SB from the SS8xx are
connected to the corresponding terminals of the CPU.
+ 24 V on the SA/SB indicates working power supplies. 0 V on SA/SB indicates an
error in the corresponding power supply and lack of redundancy. SA/SB signal
connection is shown in Figure 51 on page 147, Figure 52 on page 148 and Figure 53
on page 149.
Figure 51 on page 147 show redundant power supplies powering AC 800M units.
Here the SA/SB signals also indicate physical power supplies.
Figure 53 on page 149 shows one redundant power supply powering the AC 800M
units and one for powering field equipment. An SA/SB error indication can not
indicate which physical power supply that has failed, only that there is a failure.
To avoid error indications from SA/SB when single power supply is used, it is
recommended to connect the input terminals SA/SB on the CPU to +24 V,
see Figure 52.
+24 V
0V
Figure 52. Connection of SA/SB using Single Power Supply
148 3BSE036351-600
SA
Supervision
signals to
SB CPU unit via TP830
L+ L+ L L L+ L+ L L OK + F OK + F
OK OK A B
SD821 SD821 SS822

N L PE N L PE A+ B+ L+ L+ L
L+
From Mains +24 V
Powering
Breaker Units
L
Protective Ground 0V
L+ L+ L L L+ L+ L L OK+ F OK + F
OK OK A B
SD821 SD821 SS822

N L PE N L PE A+ B+ L+ L+ L
L+
From Mains +24 V Powering
Breaker Field
L Equipment
Protective Ground 0V
Figure 53. Redundant Power Supply Powering Units and Field Equipment
3BSE036351-600 149
Installing the SB821 External Battery Unit Section 2 Installation
Installing the SB821 External Battery Unit

Use the following procedure to connect the external battery unit:
1. Mount the SB821 external battery unit at a suitable position on the DIN-rail.
2. For connecting the SB821 external battery unit, use the 2 m (2.2 yd) cable
TK821V020. Plug one end into the battery unit and the other into the external
battery supply socket of the PM8xx processor unit (see Figure 2 on page 36).
3. In redundant CPU configuration containing two
PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867 processor units, use also two
SB821 battery units, one for each processor unit.
4. Due to the batteries being connected in parallel, it is necessary, when using the
external battery, to remove the internal battery from the PM8xx in order to
avoid reducing available memory back-up time.
Do not connect the TK821V020 cable until the AC 800M Controller has been
powered-up normally and the memory back-up function has been activated,
that is, the B(attery) LED flashes. If no normal power supply is connected to
the PM8xx processor unit, the CPU memory will immediately start to consume
battery power when the cable is connected.
150 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installing the SB822 Rechargeable External Battery Unit
Installing the SB822 Rechargeable External Battery Unit

Use the following procedure to connect the rechargeable external battery unit:
1. At delivery the Li-Ion battery package is not connected internally. Follow the
steps in the Data and installation sheet, which is enclosed in the packing box, to
connect the battery package properly.
2. Mount the SB822 rechargeable external battery unit at a suitable position on
the DIN-rail.
3. Connect the 24V supply to the connector enclosed in the packing box.
4. Connect the 24V supply to the battery unit (X3)
5. Make sure that the AC 800M controller is powered and that the battery LED in
the front of PM8xx is flashing
6. Connect the SB822 rechargeable external battery unit, use the 2 m (2.2 yd)
cable TK821V020. Plug one end into the battery unit and the other into the
external battery supply socket of the PM8xx processor unit (see Figure 2 on
page 36).
7. Make sure that the green Power LED and the yellow Charge LED on SB822
are turned on.
8. In redundant CPU configuration containing two
PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867/PM891 processor units, use
also two SB822 battery units, one for each processor unit.
9. Due to the batteries being connected in parallel, it is necessary, when using the
external battery, to remove the internal battery from the PM8xx in order to
Do not connect the TK821V020 cable until the AC 800M Controller has been
powered-up normally and the memory back-up function has been activated, that is,
the B(attery) LED flashes. If no normal power supply is connected to the PM8xx
processor unit, the CPU memory will immediately start to consume battery power
when the cable is connected
3BSE036351-600 151
Installation of I/O Units Section 2 Installation
Installation of I/O Units

For further information regarding mounting, removing and releasing procedures for
I/O Units, refer to the appropriate I/O system documentation.
Installation in Cabinets
The figures listed below are examples of how the AC 800M Controllers, Power
Supply units, Voting units and S800 I/O units can be configured and mounted within
cabinets:
Figure 54 on page 153: Wall Cabinet Single Power Supply Arrangement
Figure 55 on page 154: Wall Cabinet Dual Power Supply (Local/Field)
Arrangement
Figure 56 on page 155: Floor Mounted Cabinet Unit Arrangement
(Redundant PSU)
The DIN-rails are using the supporting Al-profile to ensure rigidness.
See Figure 124 on page 423.
The cabinets shown in the figures are ABB manufactured cabinets:
RE820: Wall Cabinet
RM550: Floor Cabinet
152 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installation in Cabinets
ModuleBus
Expansion
Cable
Aluminum
Profile
Cable
Duct
Mains Breaker SD831 24 V Distribution

Unit Terminals
Figure 54. Wall Cabinet Single Power Supply Arrangement
3BSE036351-600 153
Installation in Cabinets Section 2 Installation
Mains Breaker SD831 SD831

Unit (Units) (Field)
24 V Distribution 24 V Distribution
(Units in Cabinet) (Field Equipment)
Figure 55. Wall Cabinet Dual Power Supply (Local/Field) Arrangement
154 3BSE036351-600
Section 2 Installation Installation in Cabinets
SD832
Redundant
Power
Supply Units
(Field
Equipment)
Mains
Breakers
SS832
Voting
Units
SD832 Redundant
Power Supply Units
Figure 56. Floor Mounted Cabinet (Horizontal Unit Arrangement)
3BSE036351-600 155
Mounting Dimensions for Proper Ventilation Section 2 Installation
Mounting Dimensions for Proper Ventilation

To maintain adequate cooling airflow through the AC 800M Controller units, there
must be no obstruction within 50 mm (2 in) above and 25 mm (1 in) below the
units, as shown in Figure 57 on page 156. Note that the CPU and Communication
Interfaces must be mounted on a horizontal DIN-rail.
>50 mm (2.0 in)
Unobstructed areas
>261 mm
(10.3 in)
>25 mm (1.0 in)
>50 mm (2.0 in)
Unobstructed areas
>25 mm (1.0 in)
Figure 57. Ventilation Requirements Minimum Mounting Dimensions
156 3BSE036351-600
Section 3 Configuration
General Information
Using the engineering tool Control Builder, it is possible to configure hardware (I/O
and communication units) and make application programs with control languages
according to IEC 61131-3. Programs can be compiled and run off-line as an aid to
process simulation before finally downloading an application to the controller. The
Control Builder offers a set of options, each with its own set of properties. Simply
select the option that is closest to system requirements.
Control Builder documentation for configuration information
Control Software documentation for available functionality.
Control Builder Online Help provides detailed step-by-step information when
creating an application for the AC 800M Controller.
3BSE036351-600 157
Connecting Control Builder Section 3 Configuration
Connecting Control Builder

The Control Builder is installed in a PC that is normally connected to the AC 800M
Controller via the Control Network and the CN1 or CN2 ports on the controller
(see Figure 58 on page 159).
Alternatively, the Control Builder may be connected via the COM4 port (RS-232C)
on the AC 800M Controller. Use the tool cable TK212 and a serial port on the PC.
In redundant configuration, the Control Builder is connected to the Primary CPU
COM4 port. The Backup CPU cannot communicate with Control Builder.

Control Builder as standard does not support CI862. If CI862 is to be used

suitable system extension must be installed.
158 3BSE036351-600
Section 3 Configuration Connection to a Control Network
Connection to a Control Network

Control Network is a private IP network domain for both real time data and general
system communication between industrial computers. It is scalable, from a very
small network with a few nodes, to a large network containing a number of
Network Areas and many hundreds of nodes.
Controllers mounted
in cabinets
AC 800M AC 800M AC 800M AC 800M

I/O I/O I/O I/O
AC 800M AC 800M AC 800M

I/O I/O I/O
Use only
STP inside
areas with
STP STP STP common
grounding
FO or STP FO or STP and observe
Hub Switch Hub maximum
cable length.
USE FO GENERALLY
Within industrial environments, only
use STP cable where full control of FO USE STP EXCEPTIONALLY
the cabling is available.
INDUSTRIAL
ENVIRONMENT
NON-INDUSTRIAL
FO = Fiber Optic link Switch ENVIRONMENT
STP = Shielded Twisted Pair Link
USE STP GENERALLY
Control Builder Operator Station
Figure 58. Example of AC 800M Controllers Connected to a Control Network
3BSE036351-600 159
Communication Possibilities Section 3 Configuration
The network can utilize different and mixed link implementations such as Fast
Ethernet and PPP. It provides for full redundancy, in order to achieve high network
availability.
The AC 800M controller is always connected to the Control Network via an STP
(Shielded Twisted Pair) cable. Should the local environment be of an industrial
nature, the AC 800M / Control Network connection must be converted over to a
Fiber Optic (FO) cable. This is achieved by installing an Ethernet Switch having
both optical and electrical ports. See Figure 58 on page 159.
For more information on Control Network, see Control Network documentation.
Communication Possibilities
The processor unit (PM8XX/TP830 or PM891) contains the following
communication ports, offering the following functions:
CN1 and CN2 are used for connection to the Control Network. Both are RJ45
ports for Ethernet (IEEE802.3) and connection is normally achieved using
category 5 shielded twisted pair cable (STP class 5). However, as mentioned
previously, within industrial environments it is recommended that all STP
cables are converted to optical fiber.
For single or redundant CPUs and single networks: All CN1 ports are
connected to the network (CN2 can be used, but requires reconfiguration
of the communication set-up for the concerned CPU).
For single or redundant CPUs and redundant networks: All CN1 ports
are connected to the primary network and all CN2 ports to the secondary
network.
Details on cable selection, switches and so forth, are provided in Appendix C,
Recommended Components.
160 3BSE036351-600
Section 3 Configuration Communication Possibilities
COM3 is an RJ45 port for RS-232C with modem signals. Examples of

protocols are Modbus, Siemens 3964R, COMLI or custom-design. For more
details, see protocol-specific documentation.
COM3 port is not available for PM891.
COM4 is an RJ45 port for connection of service tools (see Connecting Control
Builder on page 158). The port has no modem signals.
By adding communication interfaces to the CEX-Bus, the number of protocols and
processor unit ports can be expanded. The available CEX-Bus interface quantities
are shown in Table 18 on page 162.
3BSE036351-600 161
Communication Possibilities Section 3 Configuration
Table 18. Interfaces Available on the CEX-Bus
Number of Interfaces on
CEX-Bus Number of
Interface Maximum of Maximum ports per
each total on Interface
interface CEX-Bus(1)(2)
CI853 (RS-232C) 12 2
CI854/CI854A/CI854B 12 2
(PROFIBUS DP)
CI855 12 2
(Ethernet for MasterBus 300)
CI856 (S100) 12 1
CI857 (INSUM) 6 1
CI858 (DriveBus) 2 3
12
CI860 (FOUNDATION Fieldbus HSE) 12 1
CI862 (TRIO) 4 1
CI865 (Satt I/O) 4 1
CI867 (Modbus TCP) 12 2
CI868 (IEC 61850) 12 1(3)
CI869 (AF100) 12 2
CI871 (PROFINET IO) 12 2(3)
CI872 (MOD5) 4 8 3
CI873 (EtherNet/IP) 4 12 2(3)
(1) PM851/PM851A is restricted to a maximum of one CEX module.
(2) The maximum total limit on CEX-Bus is the electrical one, there might be further limitations due
to performance for a particular unit.
(3) Only one port (CH1) is used in the interfaces CI868, CI871 and CI873.
162 3BSE036351-600
Section 3 Configuration Controller IP Addresses
For information on available serial protocols for the CI853 interface, see COM3
above.
If redundant controllers (PM8XX) are used along with redundant communication
interfaces, it ensures full redundancy and supports the online upgrade of
firmware.
Controller IP Addresses
It is recommended to make a practice of always starting an IPConfig session with

a Restore factory settings command before assigning the intended IP addresses.
This will erase previously stored alternative MAC and IP addresses if any. See
MAC and IP Address Handling in Redundant Configuration on page 53.
Single CPU Configurations

The IP address of the CN1 port on the controller is set using the IPConfig tool (this
tool is installed together with the 800xA system). See IPConfig online help.
If network redundancy is used, make sure that the CN1 port is connected to the
primary network, and the CN2 port is connected to the secondary network. In this
case, you also have to set the IP address for the CN2 port. See IPConfig online help.
Redundant CPU Configurations

In configurations with redundant CPU, the IP address must be set as follows:
1. Switch off the backup CPU (power down).
When setting the IP address of the primary CPU in Control Builder, the
backup CPU must be turned off (powered down). Otherwise the backup
CPU will take over and you get disconnected.
2. Connect the IPConfig tool to the primary CPU and set the IP address of the
CN1 port on the primary CPU. See IPConfig online help.
At the first power-up, the primary processor is always the one connected to the
RCU Link connector marked UPPER.
If network redundancy is used, the IP address of the CN2 port of the primary
processor cannot be set using IPConfig. This address must be set in Control
Builder
3BSE036351-600 163
I/O Systems Section 3 Configuration
3. Set the IP address of the CN1 port on the backup CPU. Use default settings
(0.0.2.0 is added to the address of the primary CPU), unless your network
administrator requires otherwise. See IPConfig online help.
If network redundancy is used, you also have to set the IP address of the CN2
port of the backup processor using IPConfig. See IPConfig online help.
4. Start your 800xA Workplace.
5. Create a representation of the controller in the Project Explorer hardware tree.
Make sure the PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867/PM891
processor unit is defined as redundant. See Control Builder online help.
6. In Project Explorer, set the IP address of the controller to the IP address of the
primary CPU. See Control Builder online help.
7. Switch on the secondary CPU. Check that you have communication with the
controller.
There is no need to set IP address(es) for the backup CPU in Control Builder.
The IP address of the backup CPU, CN1 and CN2 ports will only be used for
internal communication between the primary and backup CPUs. When the
backup CPU takes over, it also takes over the primary IP address that is defined
in Control Builder. Other units on the control network will never notice the
switchover.
I/O Systems
There are several methods of connecting I/O systems to the AC 800M Controller:
S100 I/O via CI856.
S800 I/O units via the ModuleBus. Support for hot configuration during run,
redundancy on all levels, HART routing, and Sequence-of-Events (SOE).
S800 I/O units via CI854/CI854A/CI854B and CI840/CI840A, PROFIBUS
DP. Support for HART routing, redundancy on all levels, and hot configuration
during run.
S800 I/O units via CI854/CI854A/CI854B and CI801, PROFIBUS DP.
Support for HART routing, and hot configuration during run.
S900 I/O units can be connected to PROFIBUS DP.
164 3BSE036351-600
Section 3 Configuration I/O Systems
ABB Drives can be connected to the ModuleBus, via CI801 and also via
Modulebus on the PM8xx. Some Drives equipment can be connected directly
to PROFIBUS or PROFINET IO. Please refer to Drives-specific
documentation for more information.
Genius remote I/O (TRIO) via the CI862 Interface
Satt I/O on ControlNet (19 Satt rack I/O, S200 I/O and S200L I/O) via the
CI865
PROFINET IO via CI871
For more information on supported I/O systems and units, see I/O documentation.
ModuleBus
The ModuleBus in the AC 800M controller, except PM891, consists of one
electrical and one optical unit. The PM891 consists of optical ModuleBus only.
The following are the details of the ModuleBus:
Electrical ModuleBus, (see Figure 59 on page 166) 1 cluster (group), with a
maximum of 12 S800 I/O units connected.
Note that the electrical ModuleBus can only be used for connection of S800 I/O
when AC 800M is running in single CPU configuration.
Optical ModuleBus (see Figure 59 on page 166) 7 clusters (groups), with

maximum 7 x 12 = 84 S800 I/O units connected.
PM851/PM851A is restricted to one optical ModuleBus cluster.
Use of redundancy will reduce the maximum number of S800 channels. Each
cluster may contain up to 12 single S800 I/O units or up to 6 redundant S800 I/O
units.
3BSE036351-600 165
This provides a total of eight clusters (groups), with a maximum 8 x 12 = 96 S800

I/O units connected to an AC 800M Controller with single CPU configuration.
Optical Electrical
ModuleBus ModuleBus
PM8xx
Local
TB840 Central/Remote
TB840
Optical
ModuleBus
Maximum of 7
clusters (groups)
(Maximum of 1
cluster for PM851)
TB840
Maximum of 12 x I/O units
Figure 59. Electrical and Optical ModuleBus Configuration
166 3BSE036351-600
In redundant CPU configuration, S800 I/O is connected through the optical

ModuleBus. Each CPU is connected to one TB840 on each cluster (see Figure 60 on
page 167).
Redundant CPUs
Electrical ModuleBus cannot be used
Local
2 x TB840 Central/Remote
Optical
ModuleBuses 2 x TB840
Maximum of 7
clusters (groups)
2 x TB840
Maximum of 12 x I/O units
Figure 60. Optical ModuleBus connection in redundant CPU configuration
3BSE036351-600 167
PROFIBUS DP
A PROFIBUS DP segment, capable of providing up to 32 nodes, can be directly
connected to a PROFIBUS DP Interface unit type CI854A/CI854B/TP854. This
segment can be further extended using repeater units.
PROFIBUS PA can be connected to PROFIBUS DP via the PROFIBUS linking
device LD 800P, see Appendix C, Recommended Components. For further details
refer to PROFIBUS documentation, available at the PROFIBUS Internet site.
It is possible to connect the following I/O systems to the PROFIBUS DP:
S800 I/O and/or S800L I/O via FCI refer to S800 I/O documentation.
S900 I/O via FCI CI920 - refer to S900 I/O documentation.
S200 I/O and/or S200L I/O via Fieldbus Adapter 200-APB12 refer to S200
I/O documentation. Restrictions apply for PROFIBUS DP.
Other I/O systems can also be connected to PROFIBUS DP. Refer to the
relevant manufacturers documentation.
Note that the total number of I/O units to be configured within a controller may
be restricted, depending on the unit range parameter of your license.
For further information on the various I/O systems, see specific I/O documentation.
168 3BSE036351-600
Figure 61. Example of System Structure for PROFIBUS
PROFINET IO
PROFINET IO describes a device model oriented to the PROFIBUS framework.
It consists of places of insertion (slots) and groups of I/O channels (subslots). The
PROFINET IO engineering is performed in a way familiar to PROFIBUS. The
distributed field devices are assigned to the controllers during configuration.
3BSE036351-600 169
The PROFINET IO is interfaced to the AC 800M controller , using the

PROFINET IO communication interface, CI871.
Figure 62. PROFINET IO with AC 800M
170 3BSE036351-600
FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet (FF HSE)

FOUNDATION Fieldbus (FF) is a fieldbus protocol based on international
standards and designed for applications in the manufacturing industry, process
automation and buildings automation. The guidelines for this fieldbus standard are
published by the Fieldbus Foundation.
FF defines two communication profiles, H1 and HSE. The H1 profile allows a
transmission rate of 31.25 kbit/s. It is preferably used for direct communication
between field devices in one link (H1 link). The HSE profile is based on standard
ethernet serves first and foremost as a powerful backbone for the link between H1
segments. Typically transmission rates are: 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s. The first
devices that are already available on the market and support the HSE profile are FF
linking devices (for example LD 800HSE). They serve as a gateway between the
field devices on the H1 segments and the HSE backbone.
The FOUNDATION Fieldbus is linked to the AC 800M via the high-performance
HSE bus using FF linking devices.
More detailed information on the HSE profile can be found in the FF specifications.
The fundamental concepts behind HSE are explained in the FF specifications
System Architecture (FF-581) and HSE Profiles (FF-941).
The FF subsystem consists of FF linking devices (for example LD 800HSE, see
Appendix C, Recommended Components) which communicate with one another
using the HSE protocol. An FF linking device usually provides more than one
FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 segments (H1 link). FF linking devices with a device
class of 42c allow process data that have been published cyclically on the subsidiary
H1 segments to be republished on the HSE segment. By using HSE republishing,
it is possible to configure cyclical communication between field devices on different
H1 segments and devices on the HSE segment.The FOUNDATION Fieldbus HSE
and H1network and the devices are configured with the Fieldbus Builder
FOUNDATION Fieldbus.
The FF subsystem is interfaced to the IEC 61131 controller (AC 800M) using a
FF HSE unit CI860 in the AC 800M, see Figure 7 on page 43. From the perspective
of FF the FF HSE unit is an HSE device which participates in the HSE
communication.
3BSE036351-600 171
FF linking devices operate as gateways between the AC 800M and the field devices
on the H1segments both for the configuration data of the field devices and for the
process data which is exchanged cyclically between AC 800M and the field devices.
Figure 63. Example of system structure for FOUNDATION Fieldbus HSE
TRIO/Genius Remote I/O

TRIO is a Genius remote I/O product that provides discrete, analog and high-speed
counter blocks for connection to the AC 800M. Configuration of the I/O block units
and the CI862 is done using Control Builder M.
172 3BSE036351-600
Section 3 Configuration Drive System
Drive System
ABB Standard (Std) and Engineered (Eng) Drives can be connected to AC 800M
through any of the following:
The optical ModuleBus
CI801 and PROFIBUS DP
NPBA-12, RPBA-01, or FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adaptor modules along
with CI854
RETA-02 or FENA-01/-11 Ethernet Adapter modules along with CI871
(PROFINET IO)
CI858 DriveBus Interface.
ModuleBus
In single CPU configuration, ABB Drives can be connected to the processor unit via
the optical ModuleBus. See Figure 64 on page 176. The number of ABB Drives
which can be connected to the optical ModuleBus, can be described by the
following equation:
(No. of ABB Drives) < 84 - (12 x (No. of TB820s))
that is, each Drive uses one ModuleBus cluster.
PROFIBUS DP and CI801

In single and redundant CPU configuration, ABB Drives can be connected via
PROFIBUS DP and CI801. See Figure 64 on page 176. Only Standard Drives can
be connected to CI801. Fourteen (14) Standard Drives can be connected to each
CI801 if there are no I/O units connected. For the number of Drives that can be
connected to the same CI801, when both I/O units (TB820) and Standard Drives are
connected, refer to documentation about FCI for PROFIBUS DP.
For more information about ABB Drives and its types (Std and Eng) refer to
S800 I/O documentation.
For information about Branching Unit (Figure 64 on page 176) see ABB Drive
System documentation.
3BSE036351-600 173
Drive System Section 3 Configuration
ABB drives can also be connected via PROFIBUS DP (CI854/CI854A/CI854B),

with direct connection to PROFIBUS DP slave modules NPBA-12, RPBA-01, and
FPBA-01.
PROFINET IO and CI871

The RETA-02 Ethernet Adapter module and FENA-01/-11 Ethernet Adapter
module are optional devices for ABB drives, which enables the connection of the
drive to a PROFINET IO (PNIO) network. The drive is considered as a PNIO
device on the PROFINET IO network, and it is compatible with all PNIO controller
stations that support PROFINET IO and sub-slots.
DriveBus Interface CI858

ABB drives can be connected to the AC 800M via the CI858 unit, see Figure 64 on
page 176 and Figure 65 on page 177. The drive interface can be used for controlling
up to 24 drives or inverter units.
Main communication functions of the drive connection are:
Dataset communication
Broadcast system time
Supervision and diagnostics functions
The data exchange between the AC 800M and the CI858 consists of eight datasets.
The drive connection is able to transfer at the maximum 8 datasets / 1 ms.
Connection of multiple drives requires the use of a branching unit, which enables
the construction of a logical bus with physical star topology, see Figure 65 on page
177. The branching units can be chained.
The following drives are supported by the drive connection:
ACS 600 single drive
ACS 600 multi drive
ACS 600 thyristor supply units
ACS 600 IGBT supply units
ACS 800 product family
174 3BSE036351-600
ACS 140-AC S400

DCS 600 and DCS 400
ACS 6000 product family/large drives
ACS 1000 product family
See also CI858 and TP858 DriveBus Interface on page 332
3BSE036351-600 175
Drive System Section 3 Configuration
CI854
CI858

Optical
Optical ABB Std Drive
See DriveBus TB820

topology ABB Std Branching ABB Std Drive
Drive Unit
ABB Std Drive

Optical Max 12 Modules per Cluster
1 Segment of
PROFIBUS DP
CI801

Optical
Optical ABB Std Drive

TB820
ABB Std Branching ABB Std Drive

Drive Unit
ABB Std Drive

Optical
Figure 64. Example of Connection of ABB Drives in Single CPU Configuration
176 3BSE036351-600
DRIVEBUS CI858
MSTR
Branching CH0 MSTR ...

Units NDBU NDBU
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH1 CH2 CH3
CH0 CH0
CH0 CH0
CH0 CH0
... ...
Drive Drive
Drive Drive
Drive Drive
Up to 24 Drives
Figure 65. DriveBus Topology
3BSE036351-600 177
Power Supply System Section 3 Configuration
Power Supply System

The configuration of a power supply system for an AC 800M controller is very
straightforward.
Configurations
Figure 66 on page 182 and Figure 67 on page 183 gives a series of simple circuit
diagrams showing various possibilities for connecting the incoming mains power
via the mains breaker, the power supply units and the SS83X voting devices to the
24 V DC distribution terminals.
The AC 800M Controller and its I/O system are normally located in one or several
enclosures or cabinets. The cabinet housing the AC 800M Controller can also
contain I/O units connected to the controller via the electrical ModuleBus, the
optical ModuleBus or the communication interfaces for PROFIBUS DP.
Cabinet Containing AC 800M Controller

From this cabinet power may be required for:
Powering Units: power to the electronic circuitry for each unit in the cabinet.
Powering Field Equipment: power to equipment, relay contacts etc. located
outside the cabinet, but connected to the inputs/outputs of the I/O units in the
cabinet.
It is strongly recommended to:
use a power supply in each cabinet for Powering Units (only when cabinets
are mounted side by side, and the maximum cable length is less than 10 m,
can power to the units be taken from another cabinet)
use separate power supplies for Powering Units (including S800 cluster
modems) and Powering Field Equipment
Cabinet Containing I/O System

Use the recommendations given above if no other information is given in the I/O
system documentation.
178 3BSE036351-600
Section 3 Configuration Powering Units in the Cabinet
Powering Units in the Cabinet

This power supply is only connected to units within the cabinet such as:
PM8XX, which also powers all communication interfaces (via the CEX-Bus)
and all S800 I/O units connected to its electrical ModuleBus.
BC810/BC820 powers all communication interfaces connected to its own
segment.
TB820V2/TB840 (optical modem for S800 I/O) which also powers all S800
I/O units connected to its electrical ModuleBus.
CI840 and CI801 (PROFIBUS DP interface for S800 I/O) which also powers
all S800 I/O units connected to its electrical ModuleBus.
PROFIBUS DP adapters for other I/O systems (depending on the supply
arrangement for the I/O units, it may be necessary to connect power to each I/O
unit).
Communication modems located in the cabinet.
The main configuration rule for this power supply is to retain the 24 V cables within
the cabinet.
Powering Field Equipment outside the Cabinet

This is intended for supplying power to process signals and equipment located
outside the cabinet.
Interference
Powering field equipment from a power supply located in the AC 800M Controller
cabinet often requires the use of long 24 V DC cables that can easily pick up local
interference and direct it straight back to the power supply units. When installing
the cables, follow the instructions for Field Cables, given under Cables on page 66.
Short-Circuit at Power Supply Output

The SD83X series power supply has no extra energy reservoir at its outputs. In the
event of a short circuit the power supply output voltage will fall rapidly.
3BSE036351-600 179
Powering Field Equipment outside the Cabinet Section 3 Configuration
Short circuits (even with fuses installed in the 24 V DC distribution system) or large
load changes can produce unwanted voltage dips in supply.
To avoid the AC 800M Controller being influenced by field equipment, it is
strongly recommended that separate power supplies be installed (see Figure 55 on
page 154 and Figure 56 on page 155).
Sectioning Field Equipment

If field equipment connected to an AC 800M Controller is to be sectioned into
groups thus avoiding a power failure in one group from influencing the power to
other groups then it is recommended to use separate power supplies for each field
equipment group.
The use of fuses in the 24 V DC distribution system is not a fail-safe measure. If a
short circuit occurs in one group, then voltage will most likely drop before a fuse
blows; consequently all groups will experience a drop in voltage.
Cable Protection
24 V DC distribution system cables must be fuse-protected. In order to allow for
overload/short circuit situations, the power supply output current is limited. Allow
the power supply an extra capacity of at least 3-4 times the rated current value of the
largest connected fuse and remember to include long cable resistance in the
calculation.
Connection Alternatives
The field equipment power supply can be connected in the same manner as that used
for connecting and powering the AC 800M units (see Figure 66 on page 182 and
Figure 67 on page 183). However, it should be noted that the same Mains Breaker
Unit can be used to control and isolate both power supplies. Alternatively,
independent Mains Breakers can be used on each spur (see Figure 67 on page 183).
180 3BSE036351-600
Section 3 Configuration Powering from an External Source
Powering from an External Source

The AC 800M Controller can be powered from an external +24 V DC source. This
source is often common for many different types of plant equipment, resulting in
long power cables to the AC 800M Controller. Furthermore, heavy load changes can
cause variations in controller supply voltage making it necessary to take precautions
against low voltage in order to prevent controller malfunction.
Should there be a risk that the +24 V at the PM8XX power terminals could drop
below 19.2 V for more than 1 ms, then an energy reservoir must be used for
Powering Units.
ABB requires the use of DC/DC converter and extra energy reservoir in case
external DC-supply with longer cables than 10 m is used.
For redundant power supplies to the AC 800M controller and associated units,
always derive connections from the SS8xx voting device. See Figure 66 on page
182.
3BSE036351-600 181
Powering from an External Source Section 3 Configuration
Single Power Supply Supply to

Units
SD
Mains 8xx
24 V DC
Mains Breaker Power Distribution
Supply Terminals
Redundant Power Supplies
Mains SD
8xx Supply to
Units
Mains Breaker
SS
8xx
24 V DC
SD Distribution
Voting Terminals
8xx Device
Power
Supplies
Redundant Mains Power Supplies
Mains 1 SD
8xx Supply to
Units
Mains Breaker
SS
8xx
24 V DC
SD Voting Distribution
Mains 2 Device Terminals
8xx
Mains Breaker
Power
Supplies
Figure 66. Power Supply Options for AC 800M Units
182 3BSE036351-600
Section 3 Configuration Powering from an External Source
Powering Field Equipment Supply to

Units
Mains SD
8xx
Mains Breaker 24 V DC
Distribution
Terminals
Independent
Power Supplies
Supply to
Field
Equipment
SD
8xx
24 V DC
Distribution
Terminals
Supply to
Units
SD
Mains 8xx
Distribution
Independent Terminals
Power Supplies
Supply to
Field
Equipment
SD
8xx
Distribution
Independent Mains Terminals
Breaker Units
Figure 67. Powering Field Equipment
3BSE036351-600 183
Powering from an External Source Section 3 Configuration
184 3BSE036351-600
Section 4 Operation
This section describes the operation of the AC 800M Controller, comprising a

PM8xx (single or redundant configuration) processor unit, together with various
optional units. For additional technical information on optional units, see Appendix
A, Hardware Units.
AC 800M Controller (PM8xx)

Equipped with Control Software, the basic PM8xx/TP830 or PM891 hardware units
mounted on the AC 800M hardware platform constitute an AC 800M Controller.
LED Indicators
See Figure 2 on page 36, for description of placement.
Table 19. PM8xx LED Indicators
Marking Color Function

F(ault) Red Normal state OFF
Re-start (INIT) temporarily lit F(ault).
May also be operated by software program.
R(un) Green Normal state ON
Re-start (INIT) temporarily extinguishes
R(un). At restart press the (INIT) push button
(3 sec. or more) until R(un) flashes.
May also be operated by software program.
3BSE036351-600 185
AC 800M Controller (PM8xx) Section 4 Operation
Table 19. PM8xx LED Indicators (Continued)
Marking Color Function

P(ower) Green Normal state ON
When lit, indicates that the CPU DC/DC
converter is generating valid +5 V and +3.3 V
DC supply voltages.
No software control.
B(attery) Green Normal state ON
Lit when internal or external battery voltage is
above 3.1 V. The LED is controlled by a
software battery voltage test(1).
Tx Yellow Data Transmission(4),
Green(2) CN1 + CN2 and COM3(3) + COM4
Flashes in synchronization with Tx traffic
Rx Yellow Data Reception(4),
Green(2) CN1 + CN2 and COM3(3) + COM4
Flashes in synchronization with Rx traffic
Valid for PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867/PM891
PRIM(ary) Yellow Lit in single and redundant configuration.
Indicates Primary CPU in redundant
configuration. Controlled by software.
DUAL Yellow Lit when the CPU is running in redundant
configuration and synchronized state.
(1) The software performs cyclic battery voltage level tests via a dedicated LED control input. The
battery provides back-up power for both the application memory and the real time clock during
power down. The battery is either accessible via the PM8xx cover panel or externally connected
to the external battery connector. Battery voltage is checked by the software. Voltage is common
for both the internal and external battery. For this reason the internal battery should be removed
when using the external battery, since having two batteries connected in parallel will result in
greatly reduced capacity.
(2) Only for PM891
(3) Not valid for PM891
(4) Only CN1 for PM851/PM851A. Do not connect to CN2.
186 3BSE036351-600
Section 4 Operation AC 800M Controller (PM8xx)
Switches and Push buttons
Table 20. PM8xx Switches and Push buttons
Marking Type Function

INIT Manual Push Initiates
button 1. Cold Restart if INIT is held less than 2.5
seconds.
2. Controller Reset if INIT is held more than
3 seconds.
If INIT is pushed on the Primary CPU in
redundant configuration a switchover to the
backup CPU will be initiated.
Connectors
Table 21. PM8xx/TP830 and PM891 Connectors
Marking Function
External Power Supply Connection
L+ +24 V DC supply
L 0V
SA Redundant Power Supply monitoring input
SB Redundant Power Supply monitoring input
External Battery Connection
SH Shield (Screw Connector)
B+ Battery Positive (Screw Connector)
B Battery Negative (Screw Connector)
ModuleBus Connection
Tx Data Transmission Port (Optical)
Rx Data Reception Port (Optical)
Note Duplex or Simplex optical cables may be used.
MODULEBUS(1) Provides expansion of I/O unit capability.
3BSE036351-600 187
Start-up Section 4 Operation
Table 21. PM8xx/TP830 and PM891 Connectors (Continued)
Marking Function
CEX-BUS Provides extension of on-board communication ports.
Valid for PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867
RCU Link Connector Provides information and data transfer between Primary
and Backup CPU in redundant configuration.
Valid for PM891
RCU Data Link Provides transfer of data required to keep the backup
Connector CPU synchronized with the primary CPU.
RCU Control Link Provides role selection and CPU identity assignment.
Connector
(1) Electrical ModuleBus not valid for PM891.
Start-up
Refer to relevant document for information on:
Firmware download
Controller IP address
Downloading application
Updating firmware
Start-up in Redundant Configuration (CEX Bus Considerations)

The redundant configuration using CEX bus and CEX modules is supported along
with the processor modules PM861, PM862, PM864, PM865, PM866, PM867 and
PM891.
At start-up, some things regarding the CEX bus and CEX modules have to be
considered when starting up a redundant AC 800M system:
Without using BC810 units:
188 3BSE036351-600
Section 4 Operation Start Modes
At least one CEX module must be inserted, if there are base plates without
inserted modules in other positions.
After having rebuilt the hardware on the CEX bus, that is, after removing
or adding a number of base plates (equipped with CEX modules or not)
the upper CPU (the CPU connected to the part of the RCU Link cable that
is marked UPPER) must be started as the primary CPU the first time.
Start Modes
Warm Start
Application-controlling tasks are initiated. Variable values are initialized unless
marked Retain or Cold retain.
To initiate a warm restart, disconnect the power supply for a few seconds.
Following a power failure, the warm restart function will be automatically initiated
on power restoration.
After a power fail, instead of doing a warm restart of the application SIL3
applications are restarted using cold retain marked values saved in the controller
periodically with a cycle time set by the user.
Cold Restart
The application program restarts. Variable values are initialized unless marked Cold
retain.
To initiate a cold restart, the Controller must be restarted by briefly pressing
the INIT push button (less than 2.5 seconds).
Cold Restart in Redundant Configuration

To restart CPUs running in redundant configuration:
1. Perform a Controller Reset of the backup CPU (see below). The system will go
into single CPU state.
2. Wait a few seconds and then restart the Primary CPU by pressing the INIT
push button less than 2.5 seconds.
3BSE036351-600 189
Automatic Switch-Over to Backup CPU Section 4 Operation
3. The system will be upgraded to synchronized CPU state once again.
Controller Reset
The system stops. The application program and variables are erased.
To initiate Controller Reset, press and hold the Controller INIT push button (more
than three seconds) until the Run LED begins to flash. A Controller Reset must be
performed if the system is in an undefined position and consequently unavailable to
the user.
Controller Reset in Redundant Configuration

Follow the steps below to perform a Controller Reset in redundant configuration:
1. Perform a Controller Reset of the backup CPU. The system will go single CPU
state.
2. Wait a few seconds and then perform a Controller Reset on the Primary CPU.
Automatic Switch-Over to Backup CPU

In a redundant configuration an automatic switch-over from the Primary CPU to the
Backup CPU occurs in the following situations, provided they are in synchronized
state (DUAL LED is lit):
Memory error in the Primary CPU.
Other HW-error in the Primary CPU, which causes CPU crash.
Severe communication errors on the Control network, that is, loss of both
network ports in the Primary CPU.
Severe communication errors on the ModuleBus (if ModuleBus is part of the
HW configuration) that is, loss of clusters in the Primary CPU.
Note that a Backup CPU with severe communication errors on the ModuleBus
will be rejected (if ModuleBus is part of the HW configuration) and
synchronized state will never be reached as long as error remains.
190 3BSE036351-600
Section 4 Operation Verification of Satisfactory AC 800M Operation
Verification of Satisfactory AC 800M Operation

To affirm, following start-up, that the AC 800M Controller and all associated units
are operating correctly, see Table 22 on page 191.
Verification of Single CPU

Check the status of each LED indicator and compare it against the criteria listed in
the table. If the status is other than that listed, see Fault-Finding Procedures on page
211.
Table 22. AC 800M Controller Verification of Satisfactory System Operation
AC 800M
LED Indicator Status Controller
Status
PM8xx Processor Unit
F(ault) Red LED must be OFF OK
R(un) Green LED must be ON (steady) OK
P(owok) Green LED must be ON (steady) OK
B(attery) Green LED must be ON (steady) OK
BC810 CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit
EPOK Yellow LED must be ON (if external power is connected) OK
SM810/SM811/SM812
CI853 RS-232C Interface Unit
3BSE036351-600 191
Verification of Single CPU Section 4 Operation
Table 22. AC 800M Controller Verification of Satisfactory System Operation (Continued)
AC 800M
Status
CI854/CI854A/CI854B PROFIBUS DP Unit
CI855 Ethernet Interface Unit for MasterBus 300
CI856 S100 I/O Interface Unit
C(omm. fail) Red LED must be OFF OK
CI857 INSUM Unit
CI858 DriveBus Unit
CI860 FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet Unit
CI862 TRIO I/O Interface Unit
192 3BSE036351-600
Section 4 Operation Verification of Single CPU
Table 22. AC 800M Controller Verification of Satisfactory System Operation (Continued)
AC 800M
Status
CI865 Satt I/O Interface Unit
CI867 Modbus TCP Interface Unit
CI868
CI869
CI871
CI872
CI873
3BSE036351-600 193
Verification of Redundant CPU Section 4 Operation
Verification of Redundant CPU

Check, in redundant configuration, the following LED indicators on
PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867/PM891 and, if used,
SM810/SM811/SM812
(see Table 23 on page 194).
Table 23. AC 800M Controller

(PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867/PM891/SM810/SM811/SM812)
Verification of Satisfactory System Operation in Redundant configuration
LED Indicator Status AC 800M Controller

Primary CPU Back-up CPU Status
PRIM(ary) yellow ON PRIM(ary) yellow OFF OK

DUAL yellow ON DUAL yellow ON OK
Primary Back-up
SM810/SM811/SM812 SM810/SM811/SM812
PRIM(ary) yellow ON PRIM(ary) yellow OFF OK
SYNC yellow ON SYNC yellow ON OK
To check that the redundancy, is working correctly, perform a manual switch-over

from the Primary CPU to the Backup CPU. This should be performed with caution,
and consideration to possible impact on the process.
A manual switch-over is initiated by:
Resetting the Primary CPU
Powering off the Primary CPU
The RCU Link Cable must NEVER be removed from the primary Processor Unit
during redundant operation. Removal of the cable may cause the unit to stop.
194 3BSE036351-600
Section 4 Operation Verification of Redundant CPU
Check that the yellow DUAL LED subsequently lights up on both CPUs, and that
the PRIM LED lights up on the former Backup CPU now acting as Primary CPU.
For other units see Table 22 on page 191.
3BSE036351-600 195
Verification of Redundant CPU Section 4 Operation
196 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance
This section describes preventive and corrective maintenance measures for the
AC 800M Controller together with troubleshooting procedures for both the system
and individual units.
Before attempting maintenance or troubleshooting, read the Safety Summary on
page 13. Failure to do so could lead to personal injury or damage to equipment.
Preventive Maintenance Frequency Schedule
Table 24. Preventive Maintenance Frequency Schedule
Frequency Equipment Procedure

At regular, user- Complete system Carry out a visual inspection of all system
defined intervals hardware, connectors and wiring. Check for
the:
Physical damage and deterioration
Secure attachment
Condition of connectors and wiring
LED function
Correct any defects.
2 Years PM8xx Change battery
Internal Battery See Internal Battery on page 198
(if fitted)
3BSE036351-600 197
Replacing the Battery Section 5 Maintenance
Table 24. Preventive Maintenance Frequency Schedule (Continued)
Frequency Equipment Procedure

5 Years SB821 Change battery
External Battery See SB821 External Battery Unit on page
(if fitted) 201
3 years or 400 SB822 Change battery

discharge cycles Rechargeable See SB822 Rechargeable External Battery
External Battery Unit on page 203
(if fitted)
Replacing the Battery

Internal Battery
This topic does not apply to PM891, which does not contain internal battery.
The internal battery is mounted inside the PM8xx processor unit (except PM891).
Since the battery is not rechargeable, it is important to exchange it on a regular basis
(refer to the Maintenance Frequency Schedule for further details). For details of
correct battery polarity, remove the right-hand cover from the battery housing
(see Figure 68 on page 199 and Figure 69 on page 200).
Specifications for the internal battery:
Type: Low-rate lithium battery, 3.6 V, 950 mAh.
Size: ANSI Size AA / IEC size R6
Lithium contents: 0.3 g
Due to the batteries being connected in parallel, it is necessary, when using the
SB821 external battery, to remove the internal battery from the PM8xx in order to
It is possible to replace the internal battery with the AC 800M Controller online.
However, be sure to observe standard safe working practices at all times.
198 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance Internal Battery
The battery must be exchanged whenever:

The PM8xx B(attery) LED flashes or is extinguished.
Multiple or extended power cuts have occurred.
Extended periods of system downtime have occurred for maintenance or
malfunctions.
For reasons of safety, exchange the battery only when the AC 800M is powered up.
Captive screw
Cover
Internal
battery
holder
Figure 68. Right-hand Cover Removal here shown with PM860
3BSE036351-600 199
Internal Battery Section 5 Maintenance
To exchange the internal battery:

1. Using a blade screwdriver, release the captive screw from the PM8xx and
remove the right-hand cover.
2. Identify and remove the internal battery.
Insert a serviceable battery and check that battery polarity and orientation are
correct, according to the marking on the housing.
3. When power is re-established, ensure that the B(attery) LED is illuminated
4. Replace the PM8xx right-hand cover and tighten the screw.
5. Dispose of the run-down Lithium battery in an approved manner.
F
R
P
B
INIT
Internal
battery
PM860
Tx Tx Tx Tx
Rx Rx Rx Rx
CN1 CN2 COM3 COM4
Figure 69. Internal Battery Location here shown with PM860
200 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance SB821 External Battery Unit
SB821 External Battery Unit

The external battery is mounted inside the SB821 External Battery unit. Since the
battery is not rechargeable, it is important to exchange it on a regular basis (refer to
the Maintenance Frequency Schedule for further details). For access to the battery
and housing, remove the cover (see Figure 70 on page 202). When replacing the
battery, be sure to check that polarity and orientation are correct.
Specifications for the external battery:
Type: Low-rate lithium battery, 3.6 V, 16 Ah
Size: ANSI Size D / IEC R20
Lithium contents: 5.6 g
Due to the batteries being connected in parallel, it is necessary, when using the
SB821 external battery, to remove the internal battery from the processor unit
in order to avoid reducing available memory back-up time.
The battery must be exchanged whenever:
The PM8xx B(attery) LED flashes or is extinguished.
Multiple or extended power cuts have occurred.
Extended periods of system downtime have occurred for maintenance or
malfunctions.
Replacing the Battery in an SB821 External Battery Unit

To replace an external battery:
1. Disconnect the SB821 unit cable connector.
2. Release the SB821 unit from the DIN-rail.
3. Carefully remove the SB821 unit cover and identify the external battery.
4. Read and comply with the Warning label/text on the external battery.
5. Carefully remove the battery.
6. Insert a serviceable battery and check that battery polarity and orientation are
correct. For further battery details see SB821 External Battery AC 800M
Memory Back-up on page 411.
3BSE036351-600 201
SB821 External Battery Unit Section 5 Maintenance
7. Replace the cover, mount the unit onto the DIN rail, and reconnect the cable.
8. When power is re-established, check that the B(attery) LED lights up.
9. Dispose of the run-down Lithium battery in an approved manner.
SB821 3.6 V Lithium Battery Unit

Note the warning
! text on the battery.
X1
B B+ SH
Figure 70. SB821 External Battery Unit Cover Removed
202 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance SB822 Rechargeable External Battery Unit
SB822 Rechargeable External Battery Unit

The Li-Ion battery package is mounted inside the SB822 unit. To prevent problems
you need to charge it on a regular basis.
Specification for the battery package:
Type: Rechargeable Lithium-Ion, 3.75V 2.3 Ah
Size: Prismatic 14.5x43x50 mm
Lithium equivalent content: 0.8 g
Replacing the Battery in an SB822 Rechargable External Battery Unit

To replace the Li-Ion battery:
1. Disconnect the TK821V020 cable connector.
2. Disconnect the 24V supply cable connector
3. Release the SB822 unit from the DIN-rail.
4. Attach a properly grounded ESD wrist strap to your wrist before you proceed.
5. Carefully remove the SB822 unit cover and identify the battery package.
6. Carefully disconnect the battery connector from the PCB.
7. Carefully remove the battery package.
8. Insert the new battery and connect. Reassemble is reverse from disassemble.
9. Install the unit.
10. Dispose of the worn battery package in an approved manner.
3BSE036351-600 203
Online Replacement of Unit Section 5 Maintenance
Online Replacement of Unit

Replacement online entails adding or removing units in a controller without
disturbing the execution of the running application program. Units are connected to
the CEX-Bus and the electrical ModuleBus (S800 I/O).
CEX-Bus
Communication interfaces (CI8xx) Can be removed or replaced online.
Restrictions apply, refer to the
installation section for each interface
and to Appendix A, Hardware Units.
Baseplates for CI8xx (TP8xx) Must not be replaced online.
ModuleBus
S800 I/O units Can be removed or replaced online.
Module Terminal Units (MTUs) Must not be replaced online
Redundant CPUs
Processor unit Can be removed or replaced online
(see the next following pages)
RCU Link Cables Can be removed or replaced online.
However, the following restriction
applies; you cannot replace the RCU
link cable online in a previous than 4.1
software version. For more
information, see the instructions given
in Exchanging Defect RCU Link
Cables Online on page 208.

204 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance Exchange of CPU in Redundant Configuration without BC810/BC820
Exchange of CPU in Redundant Configuration without

BC810/BC820
For PM86x, only the CPU unit can be exchanged during operation, and not the
associated baseplate. Removing the baseplate jeopardizes the functioning of
CEX-bus interfaces, if any.
For PM891, the entire unit cannot be exchanged during operation, without
jeopardizing the functioning of CEX-bus interfaces, if any
Before replacing, the new CPU must be loaded with the correct firmware as in the
existing CPU.
Follow the steps below to exchange a halted processor unit:
1. Disconnect the Power Supply Socket from the processor unit.
2. Disconnect the RCU link cables and optical ModuleBus cable from the
processor unit to be exchanged.
You do not have to disconnect the RCU link cables completely in order to
exchange a halted processor unit. Disconnect only the backup CPU, thus keeping
the RCU link cables connected to the primary CPU (now running in a single
state). However, if you must replace the RCU link cables, see Exchanging Defect
RCU Link Cables Online on page 208.
3. If PM86x is used, use a blade screwdriver to release the two spring-loaded
captive screws on the processor unit cover, and then carefully remove the
processor unit. If PM891 is used, carefully remove the unit.
4. Fit the new processor unit (which already has the correct firmware installed)
and tighten the screws.
5. Reconnect the Power Supply Socket to the new processor unit.
The F(ault) LED of the new processor unit is temporarily lit when the power
supply is connected. This is not an indication of fault.
6. Reconnect the optical ModuleBus and RCU Link Cable.
7. Press the INIT push button on the replaced processor unit.
Pressing the INIT button initiates the restart that is required to keep the new
processor unit in redundant mode.
3BSE036351-600 205
Exchange of CPU in Redundant Configuration with BC810/BC820 Section 5 Maintenance
8. Observe the startup procedure and make sure that Dual mode is reached, that is,
the Dual LED is lit on both processor units.
During synchronization, the new processor unit inherits the IP address from the
running processor unit.
Reuse of CPU modules replaced from redundant configurations within the

same control network, might cause control network problems due to the MAC
and IP address handling. See MAC and IP Address Handling in Redundant
Configuration on page 53. Such reuse should not be fulfilled unless both the
replaced module and the module previously acting together with it in redundant
configuration are known to be restored from the previous mutual address swap.
It is recommended to set up an IP-config session and use the Restore factory
settings option subsequently followed by reassignment of the IP address or
Exchange of CPU in Redundant Configuration with

BC810/BC820
Before replacing, the new CPU must be loaded with the correct firmware as in the
existing CPU.
If the BC810/BC820 is powered from an external power source, the entire CPU,
with baseplate, can be replaced during operation.
Follow the steps below to exchange a halted processor unit
1. Disconnect the Power Supply Socket from the processor unit.
2. Disconnect the RCU Link Cable and optical ModuleBus cable from the
processor unit to be exchanged.
Removing the RCU link cable from the primary CPU in some rare cases might
cause the CPU to stop. Hence, the recommendation is to remove the RCU link
cable from the processor unit to be exchanged.
3. Disconnect the Control Network cables.
4. Rotate the locking device to the SLIDE position (2) on the unit baseplate,
206 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance Exchange of CPU in Redundant Configuration with BC810/BC820
5. Gently ease the unit/baseplate sideways in order to release the contacts of the
unit.
6. Turn the locking device anti-clockwise to the OPEN position (1) and ease the
unit baseplate outward and upward at the base. Lift the unit to remove it from
the DIN-rail.
The unit baseplates are easily disconnected from each other by gently prying
them apart with a blade screwdriver (see Figure 23 on page 78).
7. Mount the new unit (which already has the correct firmware installed). See
Mounting AC 800M Units onto DIN-Rail on page 69. Fit the unit to BC810
CEX-Bus.
8. Reconnect the Power Supply Socket to the new processor unit.
The F(ault) LED of the new processor unit is temporarily lit when the power
supply is connected. This is not an indication of fault.
9. Reconnect the optical ModuleBus and the RCU Link Cable.
10. Reconnect the Control Network cables.
11. Press the INIT push button on the replaced processor unit.
Pressing the INIT button initiates the restart that is required to keep the new
processor unit in redundant mode.
12. Observe the startup procedure and make sure that Dual mode is reached, that is,
the Dual LED is lit on both processor units.
During synchronization, the new processor unit inherits the IP address from the
running processor unit.
Reuse of CPU modules replaced from redundant configurations within the

same control network, might cause control network problems due to the MAC
and IP address handling. See MAC and IP Address Handling in Redundant
Configuration on page 53. Such reuse should not be fulfilled unless both the
replaced module and the module previously acting together with it in redundant
configuration are known to be restored from the previous mutual address swap.
It is recommended to set up an IP-config session and use the Restore factory
settings option subsequently followed by reassignment of the IP address or
3BSE036351-600 207
Exchanging Defect RCU Link Cables Online Section 5 Maintenance
Exchanging Defect RCU Link Cables Online

In Configuration with BC810
Do not replace the RCU link cable online in a previous version than 5.0. The
support for online replacement also depends on hardware Product Revision
levels. Please consult Release Notes (3BSE021377*) for detailed information.
If online change proves to be supported, after the caution above has been
considered, and the BC810 are externally supplied with 24V the same steps as in
configuration without BC810 can be followed.
In Configuration with BC820

Do not replace the optical cable online in a previous version than 5.0. The support
for online replacement also depends on hardware Product Revision levels. Please
consult Release Notes (3BSE021377*) for detailed information.
If online change proves to be supported, after the caution above has been
considered, and the BC820s are externally supplied with 24V the same steps as in
configuration without BC820 can be followed.
In Configuration without BC810

To exchange a RCU link cable in a redundant CPU configuration, perform the
following steps:
1. Switch OFF the Power for the backup CPU. (Power on the primary CPU must
still be On.)
2. Disconnect the RCU link cable from the backup CPU.
3. Disconnect the RCU link cable from the primary CPU.
4. Attach the new RCU link cable to the primary CPU, note the UPPER
orientation on the cable.
The new cable-ends must be connected to the redundant CPUs (exactly) in the
same way as the replaced cable was. Thus, the UPPER mark on the cable-end
must be located to the same CPU as before the exchange.
5. Attach the other end of RCU link cable to the backup CPU.
208 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance Exchanging Defect BC820 TK857V0003 Cable
6. Switch ON the Power to the backup CPU.
Exchanging Defect BC820 TK857V0003 Cable
Any disconnection of BC820 cables, that is, TK857V0003, the gigabit cross-over
cable and the optical 50/125m OM3 fiber is only allowed to take place at the
backup end of a running controller.
Exchange of faulty TK857V0003 is allowed only when both the PM866 and the
BC820 are OFF.
To exchange a TK857V0003 cable in a redundant CPU configuration, perform the
following steps:
1. Switch OFF or disconnect Power for the backup CPU.
2. Switch OFF or disconnect Power for the BC820, if external power is
connected.
3. Disconnect the cable from the backup CPU.
4. Disconnect the cable from the BC820.
5. Attach the new cable to the backup CPU
6. Attach the other end of the cable to the BC820.
7. Switch ON or reconnect the Power to the backup CPU and the BC820.
3BSE036351-600 209
Corrective Maintenance Procedures Section 5 Maintenance
Corrective Maintenance Procedures
Changing Fuses ModuleBus and CEX-Bus
This topic does not apply to PM891, which does not contain internal fuses.
To change the TP830 internal ModuleBus and CEX-Bus fuses:

1. Using a blade screwdriver, release the two spring-loaded captive screws on the
PM8xx cover.
2. Carefully remove the processor unit.
3. Identify both the ModuleBus and CEX-Bus fuse-holders to the right on the
TP830 Baseplate.
Upper Fuse-holder ModuleBus fuse 2 AF
Lower Fuse-holder CEX-Bus fuse 3.15 AF
4. Using a blade screwdriver, carefully unscrew the fuse-holder containing the
defective fuse. Remove the fuse.
5. Insert a new fuse and replace the fuse holder.
Upper Fuse-holder ModuleBus fuse 2 AF
Lower Fuse-holder CEX-Bus fuse 3.15 AF
6. Replace the processor unit and tighten the cover screws.
7. Check that the relevant LED lights up.
210 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance Fault-Finding Procedures
Fault-Finding Procedures
The following sections describe elementary fault-finding procedures. For complete
instructions contact ABB Support.
PM8xx Processor Unit in Single CPU Configuration

Table 25. PM8xx Fault-Finding Procedure
Fault Possible Cause and Corrective Action

F(ault) LED is ON Controller Re-start, (INIT), in progress.
Wait for Controller restart to finalize.
Missing firmware.
Upgrade firmware.
Firmware upgrade in progress.
Wait for FW upgrade to finalize.
Firmware upgrade failure.
Use serial FW upgrade.
Missing TB852
Check TB852 connection
(PM861, PM862, PM864, PM865, PM866 and
PM867).
Other
Check controller log.
F(ault) LED is flashing Firmware upgrade in progress:
Wait for FW upgrade to finalize.
Other
Check controller log.
R(un) LED is OFF No application loaded in the Controller.
Download application.
Controller application failed.
Restart Controller (INIT push button).
Download application.
3BSE036351-600 211
PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867/PM891 Unit in Redundant Configuration Section 5
Table 25. PM8xx Fault-Finding Procedure (Continued)

B(attery) LED is flashing Battery voltage (Internal or External) is below 3.1 V
or non-existent.
Install new battery.
External battery cable disconnected.
Connect external battery cable.
See Fault-Finding Table 30 on page 216.
PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867/PM891 Unit in Redundant

Configuration
Table 26. PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM867/PM891 Redundant
Configuration Fault-Finding Procedure

DUAL LED is OFF on both The CPUs are in the process of being re-started
CPUs or configured. Allow time for this to finalize.
RCU Link Cable disconnected.
Connect the RCU Link Cable.
Different Control Software in the two CPUs.
Upgrade the CPUs with the same control
software.
Fault LED is ON Check controller log.
212 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit - BC810
CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit - BC810
Table 27. BC810 Fault-Finding Procedure

Fault LED is ON No 3.3 V caused by internal short circuit or
overvoltage from power supply
Check external 24 V voltage with voltmeter.
Send unit for repair.
Run LED is OFF Hardware error.
Internal fuse blown (BC810)
External fuse blown (TP857)
EPOK LED is OFF when Hardware error.
external power is connected External fuse blown (TP857)
C1 LED OFF No CEX-Bus activity
C2 LED OFF on Primary side Backup side is not connected or inactive
C2 is always OFF on backup side.
3BSE036351-600 213
CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit - BC820 Section 5 Maintenance
CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit - BC820
Table 28. BC820 Fault-Finding Procedure

Fault LED is ON The red Fault LED indicates that the FPGA
doesn't work.
Check external 24 V voltage with voltmeter.
Run LED is OFF Hardware error.
Internal fuse blown (BC820)
External fuse blown (TP850)
EPOK LED is OFF when Hardware error.
external power is connected External fuse blown (TP850)
C1 or C2 LED OFF despite CEX-Bus units using no interrupt, no action is
accessing CEX-units needed.
Yellow LED Indicates when connection is established on the
optical link and is twinkling during connection
attempts.
214 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance SM810/SM811 /SM812
SM810/SM811/SM812
Table 29. SM810/SM811/SM812 Fault-Finding

Neither R(un) nor F(ault) LEDs The SM810/SM811/SM812 board is in the
are ON process of being restarted or configured. Allow
time for this to finalize.
If the condition persists, and no other unit LED on
the CEX-Bus is lit:
Check the Log File
Check the CEX-Bus fuse inside the CPU
unit.
Initiate a reset signal (INIT) from the CPU
unit.
Replace the SM810/SM811/SM812 unit.
F(ault) LED is ON Unit error. Replace the SM810/SM811/SM812
unit.
PRIM LED is flashing Unit error. Replace the SM810/SM811/SM812
unit.
PRIM LED is OFF in single Unit error. Replace the SM810/SM811/SM812
configuration. unit.
SYNC LED is flashing Upgrade in progress. When the LED is blinking
with a symmetric pattern, allow time for this to
finalize. If the LED is blinking with a 3 blinks and a
pause sequence, the SM811/SM812 is ready for
acknowledgment of SIL3 hot insert, see SM811
and TP868 on page 294 and see SM812 and
TP868 on page 300. If the condition persists for a
longer time, replace the SM811/SM812 unit.
3BSE036351-600 215
Internal Battery / SB821 External Battery/SB822 Rechargeable External Battery Section 5
Internal Battery / SB821 External Battery/SB822 Rechargeable External

Battery
The PM891 unit does not contain internal battery.
Table 30. Internal / SB821/SB822 External Battery/ Fault-Finding

B(attery) LED indicator on Internal battery
PM8xx processor unit is Renew the PM8xx internal battery
flashing SB821:
Check external battery connections.
If condition persists:
Renew the External battery, see SB821
External Battery Unit on page 201.
SB822:
Check external battery connections.
If Charge LED and or Power LED on SB822 are
turned off:
Check 24V supply connections.
If condition persists:
Renew the Li-Ion battery package, see
SB822 Rechargeable External Battery Unit
on page 203.
The system time is incorrect Renew the External Battery.
following a power failure
216 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance On-board RS-232C Channels CI853
On-board RS-232C Channels CI853
Table 31. On-board RS-232C Channels CI853 Fault-Finding

The PM8xx is transmitting and the Check that the communication
Tx1/Tx2 LEDs are flashing, but interface cable is connected.
the connected device is not Check the hand-shake signals.
receiving data.
OR
The connected device is
transmitting, but the Rx1/Rx2
LEDs are not flashing.
The Tx/Rx signals are flashing Check that the baud rate, parity, and
concurrently with number of data and stop bits are as
transmission, but the messages specified for the connected device.
are not being received correctly Check that the handshake procedures
by the connected device. are as specified at both ends.
Check that the driver routines are
adequate, both in the controller and
the connected device.
Disconnect power to the controller,
wait a moment and then power-up
again.
Halt the program and initiate a reset
signal (INIT) from the PM8xx
processor unit.
CI853 supports hot swap.
3BSE036351-600 217
PROFIBUS DP CI854/CI854A/CI854B Section 5 Maintenance
PROFIBUS DP CI854/CI854A/CI854B
Table 32. PROFIBUS DP CI854/CI854A/CI854B Fault-Finding
Indication Possible Cause and Corrective Action

Neither R(un) nor F(ault) The CI854/CI854A/CI854B board is in the process
LEDs are ON of being restarted or configured. Allow time for this
to finalize.
If the condition persists, and all other units on the
CEX-bus have non-illuminated LEDs:
Check that a valid HW configuration including
the CI854 is downloaded to the controller.
Check the CEX-bus fuse inside the PM8xx
processor unit.
Initiate a reset signal (INIT) from the PM8xx
processor unit.
Replace the CI854/CI854A/CI854B unit.
F(ault) LED is ON Check that the CI854 board is in the process of
being restarted. Allow time for this to finalize.
Check that there is no configuration fault reported
from CI854/CI854A/CI854B in CBM.
If the status remains initiate a reset signal (INIT)
from the PM8xx processor unit. If the status still
remains after the reset replace the
CI854/CI854A/CI854B unit.
RxA LED is OFF No communication on Line A.
Check that slaves are configured and
connected to this line.
If redundant slaves are used check that the
redundancy is working properly. The backup
slave has to answer to the life list requests
sent by the master.
Check all cables and connectors for damage
and loose or poor connections.
218 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance PROFIBUS DP CI854/CI854A/CI854B
Table 32. PROFIBUS DP CI854/CI854A/CI854B Fault-Finding (Continued)

RxB LED is OFF No communication on Line B.
Check that slaves are configured and
connected to this line.
If redundant slaves are used check that the
redundancy is working properly. The backup
slave has to answer to the life list requests
sent by the master.
Check all cables and connectors for damage
and loose or poor connections.
DUAL LED is OFF on both The CI854A board is in the process of being
modules (CI854A only) restarted or configured. Allow time for this to
finalize.
Check that the redundancy for this module is set
within CBM and the configuration is downloaded.
CI854A supports hot swap.
3BSE036351-600 219
MasterBus 300 Interface CI855 Section 5 Maintenance
MasterBus 300 Interface CI855

Table 33. MasterBus 300 CI855 Fault Finding

Neither R(un) nor F(ault) LEDs The CI855 board is in the process of being
are ON restarted or configured. Allow time for this to
finalize.
the CEX-Bus is lit:
Check that a valid HW configuration including the
CI855 is downloaded to the controller.
Check the CEX-Bus fuse inside the processor unit
Initiate a reset signal (INIT) from the processor
unit
Replace the CI855 unit
F(ault) LED is ON Check all cables and connectors for damage and
loose or poor connections.
Repair as necessary
R(un) LED is flashing Check that the relevant units are sending data.
Check if the CI855 board is in the process of
being restarted or configured. If so, allow time for
this to finalize.
If the condition persists:
Halt the application program and initiate a restart.
Replace the CI855 board.
Tx1 LED is ON (not flashing) The unit is not transmitting data.
Check the CB for a failure message.
Rx1 LED is ON (not flashing) The unit is not receiving data.
Check all cables and connections.
220 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance S100 I/O Interface CI856
S100 I/O Interface CI856

Table 34. S100 I/O CI856 Fault Finding

Neither R(un) nor F(ault) The CI856 unit is in the process of being
LEDs are ON configured. Allow time for this to finalize.
the CEX-Bus is lit:
Check the CEX-Bus fuse inside the PM8xx
processor unit
processor unit
F(ault) LED is ON The CI856 unit is in the process of being
restarted. Allow time for this to finalize.
Replace unit if the condition persists.
3BSE036351-600 221
INSUM Interface CI857 Section 5 Maintenance
INSUM Interface CI857

Table 35. INSUM CI857 Fault-Finding

finalize
the CEX-Bus is lit:
Check the CEX-Bus fuse inside the
processor unit.
Initiate a reset signal (INIT) from the
processor unit.
Replace the CI857 unit.
loose or poor connections. Repair as necessary.
this to finalize.
Halt the application program and initiate a
restart.
Tx1 LED is ON (not flashing) The unit is not transmitting data.
Rx1 LED is ON (not flashing) The unit is not receiving data.
222 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance DriveBus Interface - CI858
DriveBus Interface - CI858

Table 36. DriveBus CI858 Fault-Finding

finalize
the CEX-Bus is lit:
processor unit.
processor unit.
F(ault) LED is ON Unit error or initializing.
Check all cables and connectors for damage and
Repair as necessary.
Dbus;Rx1 LED is ON (not The unit is not receiving data.
flashing) Check all cables and connections.
Dbus;Rx1 LED is OFF No signals are sent to the unit or unit error.
Dbus;Tx1 LED is ON (not The unit is not transmitting data.
flashing) Check the CB for a failure message.
If there is no failure message in the CB
replace the CI858 unit.
3BSE036351-600 223
DriveBus Interface - CI858 Section 5 Maintenance
Table 36. DriveBus CI858 Fault-Finding (Continued)

Dbus;Tx1 LED is OFF The unit is not properly configured or unit error.
If there is no failure message replace the
CI858 unit.
I/O;Rx1 LED is ON (not The unit is not receiving data.
flashing) Check all cables and connections.
CI858 unit.
I/O;Rx1 LED is OFF No signals are sent to the unit or unit error.
I/O;Tx1 LED is ON (not The unit is not transmitting data.
flashing) Check the CB for a failure message.
If there is no failure message in the CB
replace the CI858 unit.
I/O;Tx1 LED is OFF The unit is not properly configured or unit error.
CI858 unit.
224 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet - CI860
FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet - CI860

Table 37. FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet CI860 Fault-Finding

finalize.
the CEX-Bus is lit:
Check the Log File
Check the CEX-Bus fuse inside the CPU
unit.
Initiate a reset signal (INIT) from the CPU
unit.
Repair as necessary.
this to finalize.
Stop the application program and initiate a
restart.
Check the Log File
100Mbit/s is ON If RxTx LED is flashing:
A valid connection with100 MBit/s is established.
3BSE036351-600 225
FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet - CI860 Section 5 Maintenance
Table 37. FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet CI860 Fault-Finding

(Continued)

100Mbit/s is OFF If RxTx LED is flashing:
A valid connection with10 MBit/s is established.
RxTx LED is ON A link to the corresponding ethernet device is
established. No Ethernet packages are
sent/received.
RxTx LED is flashing A link to the corresponding ethernet device is
established. Ethernet packages are sent/received
RxTx LED is OFF A link with the corresponding ethernet unit is not
established
Check the Log File
Check the ethernet cable to the
corresponding ethernet device.
Check the corresponding ethernet device.
Check CI860 unit.
PRIM A yellow LED for indicating the primary unit in
DUAL The yellow LED indicates the redundant
configuration.
226 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance TRIO Interface - CI862
TRIO Interface - CI862

Table 38. TRIO Interface CI862 - Fault Finding

Neither R(un) nor The CI862 is in the process of being restarted or
F(ault) LEDs are ON configured. Allow time for this to finalize.
If the condition persists, and all other units on the CEX-
bus have non-illuminated LEDs:
Check that a valid HW configuration including the
CI862 is downloaded to the controller.
Check the CEX-bus fuse inside the PM8xx
processor unit.
processor unit.
Replace the CI862.
F(ault) LED is ON Check that the CI862 is in the process of being
Check that there is no configuration fault reported from
CI862 in CBM.If the status remains, initiate a reset signal
(INIT) from the PM8xx processor unit. If the status still
remains after the reset replace the CI862.
COMM ERROR LED is Field Bus Communication Error from the Genie slave
ON module.
PRIM LED is OFF The CI862 is in the process of being restarted or
configured. Allow time for this to finalize.
Check that there is no configuration fault reported from
CI862 in CBM.
DUAL LED is OFF on The CI862 is in the process of being restarted or
both CI862s configured. Allow time for this to finalize.
Check that the redundancy for this module is set within
CBM and the configuration is downloaded.
3BSE036351-600 227
Satt I/O Interface CI865 Section 5 Maintenance
Satt I/O Interface CI865

Table 39. Satt I/O CI865 Fault Finding
Possible Cause and Corrective

Fault
Action
Neither R(un) nor F(ault) LEDs are ON The CI865 unit is in the process of being
configured. Allow time for this to finalize.
If the condition persists, and no other
unit LED on the CEX-Bus is lit:
Check that a valid HW
configuration including the CI865 is
downloaded to the controller.
PM8xx processor unit
Initiate a reset signal (INIT) from
the PM8xx processor unit
COM A/COM B LED is OFF Power OFF or Reset Mode
COM A/COM B LED is solid green Channel OK
COM A/COM B LED is flashing green Temporary error or need initial setup
COM A/COM B LED is solid red Module is broken, has to be replaced
COM A/COM B LED is flashing red Bad channel cable
COM A/COM B LED is railroad red The road is not configured right for the
network
COM A/COM B LED is flashing red/green Network has data flow problem
COM A/COM B LED is railroad red/green Self test
228 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance Modbus TCP Interface CI867
Modbus TCP Interface CI867

Table 40. Modbus TCP Interface CI867 - Fault Finding

Neither R(un) nor F(ault) LED's are The CI867 unit is in the process of being
ON configured. Allow time for this to finalize. If
the condition persist, and no other unit LED
on the CEX-Bus is lit:
Check that a valid HW configuration
including the CI867 is downloaded to
the controller.
PM8xx processor unit.
RxTx1/RxTx2 LED is OFF No Receive or transmit activity for
respective Ethernet channels.
RxTx1/RxTx2 LED is flashing Receive or transmit activity for respective
Ethernet channels is normal.
PRIM is OFF In non-redundant mode:
This module is not started by the
application.
In redundant mode:
This module is not started by the
application or this module act as
backup interface.
3BSE036351-600 229
Modbus TCP Interface CI867 Section 5 Maintenance
Table 40. Modbus TCP Interface CI867 - Fault Finding (Continued)

PRIM is ON In non-redundant mode:
This module is started by the
application.
In redundant mode:
This module is started by the
application and this module act as the
primary interface.
DUAL is OFF In non-redundant mode:
This is always OFF in non-redundant
mode.
In redundant mode:
This module is not synchronized or the
other module in this redundant pair is
not started.
DUAL is ON In non-redundant mode:
N/A
In redundant mode:
This module is not synchronized or the
other module in this redundant pair is
not started.
230 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance IEC 61850 Interface CI868
IEC 61850 Interface CI868

Table 41. IEC 61850 Interface CI868 - Fault Finding

Neither R(un) nor F(ault) LED's are The CI868 unit is in the process of being
ON configured. Allow time for this to finalize. If
the condition persist, and no other unit LED
on the CEX-Bus is ON:
Check that a valid HW configuration
including the CI868 is downloaded to
the controller.
None application is downloaded.
RxTx1/RxTx2(1) LED is OFF No Receive or transmit activity for
RxTx1/RxTx2(1) LED is flashing Receive or transmit activity for respective
Ethernet channels is normal.
(1) LED will always be switched off due to disabling of channel CH2
Since CI868 does not support redundancy, the PRIM and DUAL LED is not used.
However, the PRIM LED is ON in a single configuration of CI868.
3BSE036351-600 231
AF 100 Interface - CI869 Section 5 Maintenance
AF 100 Interface - CI869

The Mast LED in the CI869 module is not used. Table 42 lists the other indications.
Table 42. AF 100 Interface, CI869 - Indications and Fault Finding
Indication Possible Cause and Corrective Action (for faults)

Both R(un) and F(ault) Possible Cause 1: The CI869 module is connected
LED's are OFF to the controller, but the configuration is not
downloaded to the controller for that position.
Corrective Action 1: Ensure that the CI869 module
is configured in the Hardware Tree (in the Control
Builder) for that position, and that the configuration is
downloaded to controller.
Possible Cause 2: The CI869 module is just
powered up or it is being configured and
downloaded.
Corrective Action 2: Allow time for the module to
initialize.
Corrective Action 3: If the indication persists after
performing the corrective actions 1 and 2, then one
of the following corrective actions is recommended:
Remove and insert the CI869 module to the
CEX-Bus and allow time for it to initialize.
If this CI869 is the only module on the
CEX-Bus, or if the CEX-Bus already contains
other communication modules and all the LED's
on those modules are OFF, then one of the
following corrective actions is recommended:
- Initiate a reset signal (INIT) from the PM8xx
processor unit.
- Check the CEX-Bus fuse inside the PM8xx
processor Unit
Corrective Action 4: If the indication still persists
after performing the corrective actions 1 to 3, replace
the CI869 module.
232 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance AF 100 Interface - CI869
Table 42. AF 100 Interface, CI869 - Indications and Fault Finding (Continued)

F(ault) LED is ON Possible Cause 1: The CI869 module is in the
process of upgrading the firmware (if the upgrade is
in progress).
Corrective Action 1: Wait for the firmware to be
upgraded.
Possible Cause 2: Fault in the CI869 module.
Corrective Action 2: Hot remove and hot insert the
CI869 module.
performing the corrective actions 1 and 2, then
replace the CI869 module.
Rx LED is ON (without The CI869 module is operational, and it is receiving
flashing) and transmitting data.
Rx LED is flashing with Possible Cause 1: The twisted wire pair (TWP) is
less frequency not connected or it is not connected properly to the
4-pin contact.
Corrective action 1: Check the TWP connections.
Rx LED is flashing with Possible Cause 1: The configuration is not
50% more frequency than downloaded from the Hardware Tree (in the Control
when the TWP is not Builder) to the controller.
connected Corrective Action 1: Ensure that the CI869 module
is configured in the Hardware Tree for the correct
position and the configuration is downloaded to
controller.
Rx LED is flashing with Possible Cause: At least one of the configured
75% more frequency than DSPs does not respond when polled.
when the TWP is not Corrective Action: Configure the DSPs correctly.
connected
3BSE036351-600 233
AF 100 Interface - CI869 Section 5 Maintenance
Table 42. AF 100 Interface, CI869 - Indications and Fault Finding (Continued)

Dual LED is ON The CI869 module is run in redundant configuration.
Prim(ary) LED is ON The CI869 module is run in redundant configuration,
and it functions as the primary module.
Note: Even if the backup CI869 module runs with
errors or fails in redundant configuration, the Prim
LED is still ON in the primary CI869 module in
If the corrective action is to replace the faulty CI869 module, replace it with
another CI869 module which has the same version of hardware and firmware.
234 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance PROFINET IO Interface - CI871
PROFINET IO Interface - CI871

Table 43. PROFINET IO Interface, CI871 - Indications and Fault Finding

Neither R(un) nor F(ault) LEDs are The CI871 unit is in the process of
ON configuration. If the condition persist, and
no other unit LED on the CEX-Bus is ON:
Check that a valid hardware
configuration including the CI871 is
downloaded to the controller.
restarted. Wait until the restart operation is
complete.
RxTx1/RxTx2 LED is OFF Reception and transmission of I/O data
does not occur at the respective Ethernet
channels.
RxTx1/RxTx2 LED is flashing Reception and transmission of I/O data
occurs normally at the respective Ethernet
channels.
PRIM is OFF The CI871 is not started by the application.
PRIM is ON The CI871 is started by the application.
DUAL is OFF Default, as no redundancy is supported with
PROFINET IO.
3BSE036351-600 235
MOD5 Interface - CI872 Section 5 Maintenance
MOD5 Interface - CI872

Table 44 provides the indications and possible causes, and the corrective actions for
the faults, appearing in the MOD5 communication interface, type - CI872.
Table 44. MOD5 Communication Interface, Type CI872 - Indications and Fault Finding
Indication Possible Causes, and Corrective Actions (for faults)

Both R(un) and F(ault) Possible Cause 1: The CI872 module is connected to the
LED's are OFF controller and the configuration is not downloaded to the
controller for that position.
Corrective Action 1: Ensure that the CI872 module is
configured in the Hardware Tree (in the Control Builder) for
that position, and that the configuration is downloaded to
controller.
Possible Cause 2: The CI872 module is just powered up or
it is being configured and downloaded.
Corrective Action 2: Allow time for the module to initialize.
performing the corrective actions 1 and 2, then one of the
following corrective actions is recommended:
Remove and insert the CI872 module to the CEX-Bus
and allow time for it to initialize.
If the CEX-Bus already contains other communication
modules and all the LED's on those modules are OFF,
or if this CI872 is the only module on the CEX-Bus,
then check the CEX-Bus fuse inside the PM86x
Processor Unit.
Corrective Action 4: If the indication still persists after
performing the corrective actions 1 to 3, replace the CI872
module.
236 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance MOD5 Interface - CI872

F(ault) LED is ON Possible Cause 1: The CI872 module is in the process of
upgrading the firmware (if the upgrade is in progress).
Corrective Action 1: Wait for the firmware to be upgraded.
Possible Cause 2: Fault in the CI872 module.
Corrective Action 2: Hot remove and hot insert the CI872
module.
performing the corrective actions 1 and 2, then replace the
CI872 module.
R(un) LED is ON The green R(un) LED indicates that CI872 is operational.
Rx/Tx1, Rx/Tx2, and There is one LED corresponding to each port on the CI872
Rx/Tx3 LEDs are flashing module. When the LED corresponding to a port flashes, it
indicates that communication is happening on that particular
port.
Rx/Tx1, Rx/Tx2, Rx/Tx3 Possible Cause 1: The fiber optic cable is not connected or
LED is OFF it is not connected properly to the port.
Corrective action 1: Do any of the following:
Check the corresponding optical cable connections,
that is, the connections for reversed transmitter and
receiver optical cables for that particular port, and the
connections on the DOW MOD5 controller.
Check the Network Controller Board (NCB) on the
MOD5 Controller connected to that particular port.
Possible Cause 2: The configuration is not downloaded
from the Hardware Tree (in the Control Builder) to the
controller.
Corrective Action 2: Ensure that the module is configured
in the Hardware Tree for the correct position and the
configuration is downloaded to controller.
3BSE036351-600 237
MOD5 Interface - CI872 Section 5 Maintenance

DUAL LED is ON The yellow DUAL LED is illuminated when the CI872
module is run in redundant configuration. The module that
has the DUAL LED illuminated is the primary [active]
module in a redundant configuration.
Note: Even if the backup CI872 module runs with errors or
fails in redundant configuration, the DUAL LED is still ON in
primary CI872 module in redundant configuration.
DUAL LED is OFF The yellow DUAL LED is OFF when any of the following
conditions are met:
CI872 is run in single configuration.
CI872 is run in redundant configuration, but it acts as a
backup module.
All LED's are OFF Possible Cause 1: Difference in the CI872 position in the
Hardware Tree (in the Control Builder) as compared to the
CI872 position on the CEX-Bus.
Corrective Action 1: Check and correct the position of
CI872 module in the Hardware Tree in accordance with the
position on CEX-Bus, or vice-versa.
Possible Cause 2: The CI872 module is hot inserted and
the configuration is not downloaded to the controller.
Corrective Action 2: Ensure that the module is configured
in the Hardware Tree (in the Control Builder) for that
position, and that the configuration is downloaded to
controller.
Possible Cause 3: The CI872 is just hot inserted and it is in
the process of configuration.
Corrective Action 3: Allow time for the module to initialize.
238 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance MOD5 Interface - CI872

Rx/Tx LED's are flashing, Possible Cause 1: MTMConnect and/or MTMReadCyc
but there is no and/or MTMDefCyc are disabled.
communication Corrective Action 1: Enable MTMConnect, MTMReadCyc,
and MTMDefCyc function blocks.
Possible Cause 2: MTMConnect and/or MTMReadCyc
and/or MTMDefCyc function blocks show a bad status.
Corrective Action 2: Check the reason for the bad status
(see the status codes for MTMCommLib in the Online Help),
and take the appropriate corrective action for the bad status.
Possible Cause 3: The value for the Channel parameter in
the MTMConnect function block is not in accordance with
the position of the CI872 module in the Hardware Tree.
Corrective Action 3: Ensure that the value of the Channel
parameter in the function block is in accordance with the
position of the CI872 module in the Hardware Tree.
Corrective Action 4: If the condition persists even after
performing corrective actions 1 to 3, then hot remove and
hot insert the CI872 module on the CEX-Bus and allow time
for the module to initialize.
If the corrective action is to replace the faulty CI872 module, replace it with
another CI872 module which has the same version of hardware and firmware.
3BSE036351-600 239
EtherNet/IP Interface - CI873 Section 5 Maintenance
EtherNet/IP Interface - CI873
Table 45. EtherNet/IP Communication Interface CI873 - Indications and Fault

Finding

Fault
Action
Neither R(un) nor F(ault) LEDs are ON The CI873 unit is in the process of being
configured. Wait until the configuration
is complete. If the condition persist, and
no other unit LED on the CEX-Bus is
ON:
Initiate a reset signal (INIT) from
the PM8xx processor unit.
restarted. Wait until the restart operation
is complete.
RxTx1/RxTx2(1) LED is OFF No Receive or transmit activity for
RxTx1/RxTx2(1) LED is flashing Receive or transmit activity for
respective Ethernet channels is normal.
240 3BSE036351-600
Section 5 Maintenance EtherNet/IP Interface - CI873
Table 45. EtherNet/IP Communication Interface CI873 - Indications and Fault

Finding (Continued)

Fault
Action
Dual LED is ON The CI873 module is run in redundant
configuration.
Prim(ary) LED is ON The CI873 module is run in redundant
configuration, and it functions as the
primary module.
Note: Even if the backup CI873 module
runs with errors or fails in redundant
configuration, the Prim LED is still ON in
the primary CI873 module in redundant
configuration.
(1) LED can be switched off by disabling CH2 channel.
3BSE036351-600 241
EtherNet/IP Interface - CI873 Section 5 Maintenance
242 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units
PM851/PM856/PM860 and TP830 Processor Unit
Key Features
MPC860 Microprocessor running at 48 MHz.
8 MB RAM with internal or external battery
back-up facility.
12 x S800 I/O units can be connected to the
electrical ModuleBus.
Four on-board communication ports:
CN1 + CN2, Ethernet ports
(IEEE 802.3, 10BaseT)
COM3, serial port (RS-232C) with modem
support
COM4, serial port (RS-232C) for service
tool
Basic communication is extendable by using
additional communication interface units.
The data for PM851 is the same as for PM856 except, no support for CN2.
The data for PM856 is the same as for PM860 except for performance of
application program execution, see Performance Data on page 248.
Compact Flash interface which supports loading of application and cold retain
data storage.
3BSE036351-600 243
Technical Data Appendix A Hardware Units
Technical Data
Technical data for PM851/PM856/PM860 and TP830 is described in Table 46 on
page 244.
Table 46. PM851/PM856/PM860 and TP830 Technical data
Item Value
Memory 2 MB flash PROM (firmware storage).
8 MB of SDRAM.
Power Dissipation 5 W typical
10 W typical (incl. full supply to ModuleBus and CEX-
Bus, see Appendix B, Power Consumption).
Current Consumption 180 mA typical (300 mA max.)
(excl. supply of ModuleBus and CEX-Bus, see Appendix
B, Power Consumption).
Power Input Connector Four pin, screw connector L+, L, SA and SB.
Power Supply Inputs designated L+ and L 24 V nominal, variation
Requirements between 19.2V DC and 30V DC.
Redundant Power Inputs designated SA, SB
Supply Status Inputs Max input voltage 30 V
Min. input voltage for high level 15 V
Max input voltage for low level 8 V
These inputs are status inputs. The threshold levels are
logical 0 or 1 input limits, not power fail limits.
Power Reservoir The processor unit has an internal 5ms power reservoir,
sufficient for the CPU to make a controlled power down.
Protection Rating IP20 according to EN60529, IEC 529.
244 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units Technical Data
Table 46. PM851/PM856/PM860 and TP830 Technical data (Continued)
Item Value
Weight 1100 g (2.4 lb) (package PM856K01 with PM856,
TP830 and bus terminations).
1100 g (2.4 lb) (package PM860K01 with PM860,
TP830 and bus terminations).
Dimensions W 119 x H 186 x D 135 mm (4.7 x 7.3 x 5.3 in.)
Width is measured along the DIN-rail, depth from the
wall, and height vertically, including lock mechanism.
Communication Ports and Interfaces

Technical data for communication ports and interfaces is described in Table 47 on
page 245.
Table 47. PM851/PM856/PM860 and TP830 Interfaces Technical data
Item Value
CN1 and CN2 Ethernet Communication(1)
Communication speed 10 Mbit/s (half duplex)
Signal levels IEEE802.3, 10Base-T
Connector RJ45
COM3 Serial Communication
Communication speed Selectable in steps from 75 to 19200 baud.
75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2000, 2400,
9600, 19200 baud.
Protocol specific restrictions apply.
Signal levels RS-232C
Connector RJ45
Modem support Yes
3BSE036351-600 245
Table 47. PM851/PM856/PM860 and TP830 Interfaces Technical data
Item Value
Communication speed 9600 baud
Connector RJ45
Modem support No
I/O capacity 1 x S800 I/O base cluster with up to 12 x S800 I/O units.
Supply current Max 24 V 1.0 A (short circuit proof, fuse 2 A fast)
Max 5 V 1.5 A (short circuit proof)
Supply voltage variation 24 V follows the input power at L+
Optical ModuleBus(2)
I/O capacity up to 7 x S800 I/O clusters each with 12 units
Connector Duplex Fiber Optic Cable
Simplex Fiber Optic Cable
CEX-Bus(3)
Capacity up to 12 communication interfaces
Supply current Max 24 V 2.4 A (fuse 3.15 A fast)
(1) Only (CN1) Ethernet Communication is supported for PM851.
(2) Maximum one S800 I/O cluster is possible on the optical ModuleBus with PM851.
(3) Maximum one communication interface on the CEX-bus is possible with PM851.
246 3BSE036351-600
Battery
The memory content is backed up with either an internal or external battery unit
(SB821). For back-up time see Table 48 on page 247.
The figures given in Table 48 on page 247 are valid if the batteries are installed
after a normal CPU power-up, allowing for the memory back-up function to be
activated.
Table 48. Back-up times for PM851/PM856/860
Source Back-up time

Internal battery Minimum 48 hours
External battery SB821 Minimum 1 month
External battery SB822 Minimum 100 hours when fully
Note: Recharge time for an empty battery is charged
approximately 7 hours.
Table 49 on page 247 shows Internal battery data. For external battery data,
see SB821 External Battery AC 800M Memory Back-up on page 411 and SB822
Rechargeable External Battery AC 800M Memory Back-up on page 413.
Table 49. PM851/PM856/PM860 and TP830 Internal battery data
Item Value
Internal battery
Battery Type Low rate lithium, 3.6 V, 950 mAh
Size ANSI size 1/2 AA, IEC size 1/2 R6
Lithium content 0.3 g
Electro-magnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety

PM851/PM856/PM860/TP830 meets the requirements specified in
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.
3BSE036351-600 247
Performance Data Appendix A Hardware Units
For more information regarding EMC and safety, see Appendix D, Directive
Considerations.
LED Indicators
See Table 19 on page 185.
Performance Data
The PM851/PM856/PM860 differ in performance when executing an application
program.
Using the same application program in PM851/PM856 and PM860, the difference
in execution time can be expressed as:
Execution time in PM851/PM856 = 2 *Execution time in PM860
Example: If a certain application program has an execution time of 100 ms in
PM860, the same application program will have an execution time of 200 ms in
PM851/PM856.
248 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units PM851A/PM856A/PM860A and TP830 Processor Unit
PM851A/PM856A/PM860A and TP830 Processor Unit
Key Features
For PM851A, 12 MB RAM with internal or
external battery back-up facility.
12 x S800 I/O units can be connected to the
electrical ModuleBus.
CN1 + CN2, Ethernet ports
(IEEE 802.3, 10BaseT)
COM3, serial port (RS-232C) with modem
support
COM4, serial port (RS-232C) for service tool
Basic communication is extendable by using additional communication
interface units.
The data for PM851A is the same as for PM856A, except for the RAM and that
there is no support for CN2 in PM851A.
The data for PM856A is the same as for PM860A except for performance of
application program execution, see Performance Data on page 248.
data storage.
3BSE036351-600 249
Technical Data
Technical data for PM851A/PM856A/PM860A and TP830 is described in Table 50.
Table 50. PM851A/PM856A/PM860A and TP830 Technical data
Item Value
12 MB of SDRAM for PM851A.
16 MB of SDRAM for PM856A and PM860A.
Requirements between 19.2V DC and 30V DC.
250 3BSE036351-600
Table 50. PM851A/PM856A/PM860A and TP830 Technical data (Continued)
Item Value
Weight 1100 g (2.4 lb) (package PM851AK01 with
PM851A, TP830 and bus terminations).
1100 g (2.4 lb) (package PM856AK01 with
1100 g (2.4 lb) (package PM860AK01 with
Dimensions W 119 x H 186 x D 135 mm (4.7 x 7.3 x 5.3 in.)

Technical data for communication ports and interfaces is described in Table 51.
Table 51. PM851A/PM856A/PM860A and TP830 Interfaces Technical data
Item Value
CN1 and CN2 Ethernet Communication(1)
Signal levels IEEE802.3, 10Base-T
Connector RJ45
75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2000, 2400,
9600, 19200 baud.
Connector RJ45
Modem support Yes
3BSE036351-600 251
Table 51. PM851A/PM856A/PM860A and TP830 Interfaces Technical data
Item Value
Communication speed 9600 baud
Connector RJ45
Modem support No
I/O capacity 1 x S800 I/O base cluster with up to 12 x S800 I/O units.
Supply current Max 24 V 1.0 A (short circuit proof, fuse 2 A fast)
Max 5 V 1.5 A (short circuit proof)
Supply voltage variation 24 V follows the input power at L+
Optical ModuleBus(2)
I/O capacity up to 7 x S800 I/O clusters each with 12 units
Connector Duplex Fiber Optic Cable
Simplex Fiber Optic Cable
CEX-Bus(3)
Capacity up to 12 communication interfaces
Supply current Max 24 V 2.4 A (fuse 3.15 A fast)
(1) Only (CN1) Ethernet Communication is supported for PM851A.
(2) Maximum one S800 I/O cluster is possible on the optical ModuleBus with PM851A.
(3) Maximum one communication interface on the CEX-bus is possible with PM851A.
Battery
(SB821). For back-up time see Table 52 .
The figures given in Table 52 are valid if the batteries are installed after a normal
CPU power-up, allowing for the memory back-up function to be activated.
252 3BSE036351-600
Table 52. Back-up times for PM851A/PM856A/PM860A
Source Back-up time

Internal battery Minimum 2 weeks
External battery SB821 Minimum 8 months
External battery SB822 Minimum 4 weeks when fully
Table 53 shows Internal battery data. For external battery data, see SB821 External
Battery AC 800M Memory Back-up on page 411 and SB822 Rechargeable
External Battery AC 800M Memory Back-up on page 413.
Table 53. PM851A/PM856A/PM860A and TP830 Internal battery data
Item Value
Internal battery
Battery Type Low rate lithium, 3.6 V, 950 mAh
Size ANSI size 1/2 AA, IEC size 1/2 R6
Lithium content 0.3 g

PM851A/PM856A/PM860A/TP830 meets the requirements specified in
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.
For more information regarding EMC and safety, see Appendix D, Directive
Considerations.
LED Indicators
3BSE036351-600 253
Performance Data
The PM851A/PM856A/PM860A differ in performance when executing an
application program.
Using the same application program in PM851A/PM856A and PM860A, the
difference in execution time can be expressed as:
Execution time in PM851A/PM856A = 2 *Execution time in PM860A
Example: If a certain application program has an execution time of 100 ms in
PM860A, the same application program will have an execution time of 200 ms in
PM851A/PM856A.
254 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units PM861/PM861A and TP830 Processor Unit
PM861/PM861A and TP830 Processor Unit
Key Features
MPC860 Microprocessor running at
48 MHz.
16 MB RAM with internal or external
battery back-up facility.
12 x S800 I/O units can be connected to
the electrical ModuleBus.
CN1 + CN2, Ethernet ports (IEEE
802.3, 10BaseT)
COM3, serial port (RS-232C) with
modem support
COM4, serial port (RS-232C) for
service tool
Basic communication is extendable by
using additional communication interface
units.
Redundancy Control Link, for use in
redundancy configuration.
Compact Flash interface which supports
loading of application and cold retain data
storage.
3BSE036351-600 255
Technical Data
For technical data on PM861 and TP830, see Table 54 on page 256.
Table 54. PM861 and TP830 Technical data
Item Value
16 MB of SDRAM.
Requirements between 19.2 V DC and 30 V DC.
sufficient for the CPU to make a
controlled power down.
256 3BSE036351-600
Table 54. PM861 and TP830 Technical data (Continued)
Item Value
Weight 1200 g (2.6 lb) (package PM861K01).
2800 g (6.1 lb) (package PM861K02).
Dimensions W 119 x H 186 x D 135 mm (4.7 x 7.3 x 5.3 in)

page 245.
Battery
(SB821). For back-up time see e Table 55 on page 257.
The figures in Table 55 on page 257 are valid if the batteries have been installed
activated.
Table 55. Back-up times for PM861 and PM861A
Back-up time
Source
PM861 PM861A
Internal battery Minimum 36 hours Minimum 118 hours
External battery SB821 Minimum 3 weeks Minimum 12 weeks
External battery SB822 Minimum 85 hours Minimum 285 hours
when fully charged when fully charged
Table 49 on page 247 shows internal battery data. For external battery data,
Rechargeable External Battery AC 800M Memory Back-up on page 413
3BSE036351-600 257

PM861/TP830 meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive EMCD
2004/108/EC.
For more information regarding electrical safety, see Appendix D, Directive
Considerations.
LED Indicators
Performance Data
The PM861 processor unit, in single configuration, has the same performance data
as the PM860. In redundant configuration the execution performance is somewhat
lower than in single configuration.
Switch over time from Primary CPU to Backup CPU, in redundant CPU
configuration, is less than 10 ms.
258 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units PM862 and TP830 Processor Unit
PM862 and TP830 Processor Unit
Key Features
133 MHz.
battery backup facility.
802.3, 10BaseT)
modem support
service tool
units.
data storage.
3BSE036351-600 259
Technical Data
Table 56. PM862 and TP830 Technical data (PRELIMINARY DATA)
Item Value
32 MB of SDRAM.
Power Dissipation 5.1 W typical
8.6 W typical (incl. full supply to ModuleBus and CEX-
Bus. For details, refer to 3BSE036351R, AC 800M -
Controller Hardware, Hardware and Operation).

(excl. supply of ModuleBus and CEX-Bus. For details,
refer to 3BSE036351R, AC 800M - Controller Hardware,
Hardware and Operation).
logical "0" or "1" input limits, not power fail limits.
260 3BSE036351-600
Table 56. PM862 and TP830 Technical data (PRELIMINARY DATA) (Continued)
Item Value
2800 g (6.1 lb) (package PM862K02).

page 245.
Battery
(SB821 or SB822). For backup time see Table 63 on page 273.
after a normal CPU power-up, allowing for the memory backup function to be
activated.
Table 57. Back-up time for PM862
Source Back-up time for PM862

External battery SB821 Minimum 15 weeks
External battery SB822 Minimum 16 days when fully charged
Note: Recharge time for an
empty battery is
3BSE036351-600 261

2004/108/EC.
Considerations.
LED Indicators
Performance Data
The PM862 processor unit has performance data which is approximately 0.7 times
the performance of PM864A. In redundant configuration the execution performance
is somewhat lower than in single configuration.
Switch over time from Primary CPU to Backup CPU, in redundant configuration, is
less than 10 ms.
262 3BSE036351-600
Key Features
96 MHz.
802.3, 10BaseT)
modem support
service tool
units.
data storage.
3BSE036351-600 263
Technical Data
Item Value
32 MB of SDRAM.
264 3BSE036351-600
Item Value
2800 g (6.1 lb) (package PM864K02).

page 245.
Battery
activated.
Table 59. Back-up times for PM864 and PM864A
Back-up time
Source
PM864 PM864A
Internal battery Minimum 36 hours Minimum 235 hours
External battery SB821 Minimum 3 weeks Minimum 24 weeks
External battery SB822 Minimum 85 hours Minimum 3 weeks
Note: Recharge time for an when fully charged when fully charged
empty battery is
3BSE036351-600 265

2004/108/EC.
Considerations.
LED Indicators
Performance Data
The PM864 processor unit, in single configuration, has performance data which
theoretically peaks at twice the performance compared to the PM860. The useful
sustained performance improvement is, however, a bit lower and somewhat
dependent on the actual application program but can be expected to be 10 to 50%
compared to PM860. In redundant configuration the execution performance is
somewhat lower than in single configuration.
less than 10 ms.
266 3BSE036351-600
Key Features
MPC862P Microprocessor running at
96 MHz.
802.3, 10BaseT)
modem support
service tool
units.
Redundancy Control Link, for use in redundant configuration.
High Integrity Controller (with SM810 and certified software)
Overvoltage protection
Internal voltage supervision
Runs application code in non-SIL and SIL1-2 applications
Supports S800 I/O High Integrity.
3BSE036351-600 267
Technical Data
Item Value
32 MB of SDRAM.
11.9 W typical (incl. full supply to ModuleBus and
CEX-Bus, see Appendix B, Power Consumption).
268 3BSE036351-600
Item Value
2800 g (6.1 lb) (package PM865K02).

page 245.
Battery
activated.
Table 61. Back-up times for PM865
Source Back-up time

External battery SB822 Minimum 3 weeks when fully
3BSE036351-600 269

2004/108/EC.
Considerations.
LED Indicators
Performance Data
The PM865 processor unit, in single configuration, has performance data which
theoretically peaks at twice the performance compared to the PM860. The useful
sustained performance improvement is, however, a bit lower and somewhat
dependent on the actual application program but can be expected to be 10 to 50%
compared to PM860. In redundant configuration the execution performance is
somewhat lower than in single configuration.
PM865 is designed for use in a High Integrity controller. If it is run as a non-SIL
controller without any SIL applications, its performance will be the same as
stated above, while performance will be lower when running SIL applications.
less than 10 ms.
270 3BSE036351-600
Key Features
133 MHz.
802.3, 10BaseT)
modem support
service tool
units.
data storage.
3BSE036351-600 271
Technical Data
For technical data on PM866/PM866A and TP830, see Table 62 on page 272.
Table 62. PM866/PM866A and TP830 Technical data
Item Value
64 MB of SDRAM.
Bus. For details, refer to 3BSE036351R, AC 800M -
Controller Hardware, Hardware and Operation).

272 3BSE036351-600
Table 62. PM866/PM866A and TP830 Technical data (Continued)
Item Value
2800 g (6.1 lb) (package PM866K02).

page 245.
Battery
activated.
Table 63. Back-up time for PM866/PM866A

empty battery is
3BSE036351-600 273

PM866/PM866A/TP830 meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive
EMCD 2004/108/EC.
Considerations.
LED Indicators
Performance Data
The PM866/PM866A processor unit has performance data which is approximately
1.4 times the performance of PM864. In redundant configuration the execution
performance is somewhat lower than in single configuration.
less than 10 ms.
274 3BSE036351-600
Key Features
133 MHz.
802.3, 10BaseT)
modem support
service tool
units.
data storage.
High Integrity Controller (with SM812 and certified software)
Overvoltage protection
Internal voltage supervision
Runs application code in non-SIL and SIL1-3 applications
Supports S800 I/O High Integrity.
3BSE036351-600 275
Technical Data
Table 64. PM867and TP830 Technical data (PRELIMINARY DATA)
Item Value
64 MB of SDRAM.
8.6 W typical (incl. full supply to ModuleBus and
CEX-Bus. For details, refer to 3BSE036351R,
AC 800M - Controller Hardware, Hardware and Operation).

276 3BSE036351-600
Table 64. PM867and TP830 Technical data (Continued)(PRELIMINARY DATA)
Item Value
2800 g (6.1 lb) (package PM867K02).

page 245.
Battery
activated.
Table 65. Back-up time for PM867

empty battery is
3BSE036351-600 277

2004/108/EC.
Considerations.
LED Indicators
Performance Data
The PM867 processor unit has performance data which is approximately 1.35 times
the performance of PM865. In redundant configuration the execution performance
is somewhat lower than in single configuration.
less than 10 ms.
PM867 is designed for use in a High Integrity Controller.
278 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units PM891 Processor Unit
PM891 Processor Unit
Key Features
MPC8270 Microprocessor
running at 450 MHz.
256 MB RAM with integrity
check (shadow memory).
Optical ModuleBus interface
that is designed for a
maximum of seven clusters,
of twelve non-redundant or
six redundant modules (that
is, 7x12 = 84 modules).
Redundant and non-
redundant modules can be
combined.
Three on-board
communication ports:
CN1 + CN2 (built in, 10/100Mbit/s) Ethernet ports (IEEE 802.3u, 10
Base-T/100Base-Tx).
COM4 (built in) serial port (RS-232C) for service tool.
Two Redundancy Control Links RCU Control Link and RCU Data Link
for use in redundant configuration.
Secure Digital (SD) card slot that supports the SD card for loading of
application and for saving the cold retain values cyclically. The SD cards of
various manufacturers are supported.
3BSE036351-600 279
Technical Data
For technical data on PM891, see Table 66.
Table 66. PM891 Technical data
Item Value
256 MB of DDR2 SDRAM with integrity check.
Bus.
(excl. supply of ModuleBus and CEX-Bus).
These are status inputs and the threshold levels are
limits for logic "0" or "1" on the inputs, that is, not power
fail limits.
Power Reservoir 5 ms
Weight 1.6 kg (1.9 kg with package)
wall, and height vertically, including lock
mechanism.
280 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units Performance Data

For details on communication ports and interfaces, see Key Features on page 279
Battery
The memory content is backed up with an external battery unit (SB822). For backup
time, see Table 67.
The figures in Table 67 are valid if the batteries have been installed after a normal
CPU power-up, allowing for the memory backup function to be activated.
Table 67. Backup time for PM891

External battery SB822 Minimum 33 hours when fully charged
empty battery is

PM891 meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive 2004/108/EEC.
Considerations.
LED Indicators
Performance Data
The PM891 processor units performance is approximately three times the
performance of PM864. In redundant configuration too, the execution performance
is approximately three times the performance of PM864.
3BSE036351-600 281
BC810 and TP857 - CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit Appendix A Hardware Units
BC810 and TP857 - CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit
Key Features
Supports redundant communication interface units.
Supports on-line replacement of the CPU.
External power supply.
Supports hot swap.
Description
The BC810 unit consists of two basic parts: baseplate
(TP857) and power supply/logic board.
The baseplate is where the connectors to CEX-Bus and
the external power reside. It is grounded to the DIN-rail
through metal parts of the housing. The board also
carries the external power voting diode and fuse.
The power supply and logic board contains the +3.3 V
converter, logic, drivers for CEX-Bus interconnection
and the connector for interconnection cable.
In a fully redundant system with two interlinked BC810
and primary/backup CPU pair, the BC810 support
online replacement of the CPU baseplate without
disturbing the CEX traffic.
If the BC810 has to be replaced, all traffic to the
connected CEX segment are stopped.
282 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units BC810 and TP857 - CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit
Functional Block Diagram
Communication Communication
Extension Bus Extension Bus
Bus Bus
interface interface
+24 V
+3.3 V
Interface
BC810 Unit
Baseplate
Toward next BC810 +24 V
Figure 71. Block Diagram BC810
3BSE036351-600 283
Indicators
Table 68. BC810 CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit LED Indicators
Designation/Color Function
F(ault) /Red Power supply error detected. Controlled by
hardware. Set and cleared by the Hardware
during power up.
R(un) /Green Operating. Controlled by the Hardware.
EPOK(external power OK) Indicates that the external power is connected
/Green and powered up.
C1 /Yellow Indicates traffic on the directly connected CEX-
segment.
C2 /Yellow Indicates traffic on the interconnected CEX-
segment.
Technical Data
Table 69. BC810 CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit Specifications
Item Value
Power Input Connector Two pin, screw connector L+, L.
Power Supply Requirements Inputs designated L+ and L 24 V nominal,
variation between 19.2 V DC and 30 V DC.
Current consumption 50 mA typical (70 mA max)
Power dissipation 1.2 W typical
Protection Rating IP20 according to EN60529,
IEC 529
Weight 700 g (1.5 lb) (package BC810K01)
Dimensions W 59 x H 185 x D 127.5 mm
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
284 3BSE036351-600
BC820 and TP850 - CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit
Key Features
Supports RCU-link for PM862, PM866 and
PM866A for redundant controller feature.
Supports CEX-bus with up to 6 modules with each
BC820.
Supports redundant communication interface units.
Supports extension of RCU-link and CEX-bus.
Supports on-line replacement of the CPU.
External DC-power supply.
Description
The BC820 unit consists of two basic parts: baseplate
(TP850) and power supply/logic board. The baseplate is
where the connectors to CEX-Bus and the external
power reside. It is grounded to the DIN-rail through
metal parts of the housing. The board also carries the
external power voting diode and fuse.
The power supply and logic board contains the +3.3 V
converter, logic, drivers for CEX-Bus interconnection
and the connector for interconnection cable. In a fully
redundant system with two interlinked BC820 and
primary/backup CPU pair, the BC820 support online replacement of the CPU
baseplate without disturbing the CEX traffic. If one BC820 has to be replaced it is
necessary to power off both the adjacent Controller CPU and the external
DC-supply for the BC820.
BC820 transmits the RCU-Link and extends the CEX-Bus and RCU-Link cable
length up to 200 m.
3BSE036351-600 285
Figure 72. Block Diagram BC820
286 3BSE036351-600
Indicators
Table 70. BC820 CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit LED Indicators
F(ault) /Red Power supply error detected. Controlled by
hardware. Set and cleared by the Hardware
during power up.
R(un) /Green Operating. Controlled by the Hardware.
EPOK(external power Indicates that the external power is connected
OK)/Green and powered up.
C1 /Yellow Indicates traffic on the directly connected CEX-
segment.
C2 /Yellow Indicates traffic on the interconnected CEX-
segment.
RCU /Yellow The yellow LED serves two functions.
Normal: indicates that there is RCU service data
traffic flowing in both directions between the
RCUs in the PMs.
Fault: indicate problem with UPPER/LOWER
switches, that RCU data link (fibre optical) is down
or that RCU control link is down.
When there is no fault condition the LED will show
if RCU service data is flowing or not. If there is
one or more of the fault conditions above the LED
will change behavior and blink a number of times
to indicate the fault. This is done in three seconds
intervals with one interval for each fault. This
persists while any fault remains.
- 1 blink = up/lo switches in same position
- 2 blinks = RCU data link down (opto link)
- 3 blinks = RCU control link down
3BSE036351-600 287
Technical Data
Table 71. BC820 CEX-Bus Interconnection Unit Specifications
Item Value
Power Input Connector Two pin, screw connector L+, L-.
Power Supply Requirements Inputs designated L+ and L-24 V nominal,
variation between 19.2 V DC and 30 V DC.
Current Consumption 120 mA typical (200 mA max).
Power Dissipation 2,9 W typical
Protection Rating IP20 according to EN60529, IEC 529
Weight 700 g (1.5 lb) (BC820 and TP850)
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
288 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units SM810 and TP855
SM810 and TP855
Key Features
MPC862P Microprocessor running at 96 MHz.
32 MB RAM
Provides supervision of the PM865 controller
during SIL1-2 operations.
Over voltage protection.
Internal voltage monitoring.
Supports hot swap.
Supports redundancy.
Description
Physically SM810 Unit consists of two parts:
Termination Plate (TP855) and SM810.
The SM810 contains two pc-boards. The main board
contains the MPC862, SDRAM, Flash PROM, and
CEX-Bus slave interface. A daughter board contains
digital I/O, +3.3V supply with over-voltage
protection and voltage monitoring. The termination
plate contains CEX-Bus connectors and connectors
for the digital I/O.
3BSE036351-600 289
SM810 and TP855 Appendix A Hardware Units

CEX-Bus Interface
DC/DC
Converter
FPGA
System and user

mem. Double inverted
memory
text
CPU
MPC862
Digital Digital
Inputs Outputs
Communication
Extension Module
Communication
Extension
Baseplate
Digital Inputs Digital Outputs
Figure 73. Block Diagram SM810
290 3BSE036351-600
Indicators
Table 72. SM810 LED Indicators
F(ault) /Red Unit error detected. Controlled by Control
Software. Set and cleared by the Hardware during
controller Reset.
R(un) /Green Operational. Controlled by the Control Software.
Cleared by the Hardware during controller Reset.
ACCESS EN(abled) /Yellow Access Enable switch active.
DEGR(aded) MODE /Yellow Reserved for future use.
PRIM /Yellow Indicates that the unit is used as the primary
SM810.
SYNC(hronized) /Yellow Indicates that the SM810 is synchronized.
Flashes during SM810 synchronization.
Technical Data
Table 73. SM810 Specifications
Item Value
32 MB of SDRAM.
Galvanic isolation Yes
Connector One 7 pin screw connector
(from CEX-Bus 24 V DC)
3BSE036351-600 291
Table 73. SM810 Specifications (Continued)
Item Value
Weight 700 g (1.5 lb) (package SM810K01 with
SM810 and TP855).
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
Table 74. SM810 - Digital Input Specifications
Item Value
Electric isolation Yes
Overvoltage category II
Rated insulation voltage 50 V
Insulation test voltage 500 V a.c. 1 min
Nominal voltage 24 V
Voltage limits - 30 V < UL < 5 V
(UL = logic 0, UH = logic 1) 15 V < UH < 30 V
Nominal current 12 mA
Current limits - 22 mA < IL < 2 mA
6 mA < IH < 18 mA
Input impedance 1.8 kOhm
292 3BSE036351-600
Table 75. SM810 - Digital Output Specifications
Item Value
Process voltage range (UP) 12... 32 V
On-state output voltage (UA) UP - 0.5 V < UA < UP
Maximum continuous load current 0.5 A
Off-state output leakage current < 10 mA
Maximum short circuit current < 2.4 mA
Output impedance < 0.4 ohm
3BSE036351-600 293
SM811 and TP868
Key Features
MPC862P Microprocessor running at 96 MHz.
32 MB RAM
during SIL1-2 operations and together with the
PM865 forms a 1oo2 diverse architecture for
SIL3 applications.
Supports hot swap.
SM Link for synchronization of redundant pair.
Description
294 3BSE036351-600
3BSE036351-600 295
Indicators
controller Reset.
SM811.
SYNC(hronized) /Yellow Indicates that the SM811 is synchronized. Flashes
during SM811 synchronization.
Technical Data
Item Value
32 MB of SDRAM.
Connectors One 7 pin screw connector
One RJ45 connector (SM Link)
296 3BSE036351-600
Item Value
SM811 and TP868).
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
Item Value
6 mA < IH < 18 mA
3BSE036351-600 297
Item Value
The High Integrity controller is able to run SIL3 applications using SM811.
Performing a Hot swap or inserting an additional/replacement SM811 into a running
system affects SIL3 applications.
For performing the hot swap of SM811 running a SIL3 application, the
Access enable digital input (I2) must be turned ON through the key switch before
the Hot-insert digital input (I3) is turned ON.
The Module should be configured in order to get synchronized. When running SIL3
applications, the start of the synchronization must be accepted by the user, to
configure the inserted module.
If one or more SIL3 applications are running in the controller, they are temporarily
interrupted in order to get a consistent state of the application to the newly inserted
SM811. The user must acknowledge the application stop by creating a edge on
digital input 3 on the primary, already running, Safety Module.
298 3BSE036351-600
This is performed by connecting a physical push-button to the digital input. The

system waits for 30 minutes for the acknowledgement, if acknowledgement is not
received the inserted SM811 will shut down. To recover, a new hot insert needs to
be initiated i.e. the SM811 has to be removed and inserted again.
Synchronization of the SM811 includes:
1. Make sure that the synchronization link between the SM811s is in place, that
is, the enclosed TK852V010 cable is properly connected into both SM Link
connectors respectively.
2. Insert the SM811 in its position.
3. When the SM811 starts the synchronization LED flashes, and later it continues
to blink with 3 blinks and a pause in a sequence.
4. Push the button (create an edge on digital input 3 on the already running Safety
Module), once it starts blinking repeatedly with 3 blinks and a pause sequence.
5. The Sync LED flashes faster until the synchronization is complete.
6. The Sync LED turns yellow when the module is synchronized.
Hot-insert will not be completed until all tasks have executed one scan.
Make sure that SM Link Cable TK852V010 is connected before hot-insert and
OLU. The SM Link Cable TK852V010 can be replaced if needed, except during
hot-insert and OLU. Removing the cable results in a diagnostic error and the
cable must be repaired or replaced.
Non-SIL and SIL1-2 applications are not affected by synchronization of SM811.

They continue to execute as normal throughout the entire synchronization
without being interrupted.
A Hot Swap of SM811 requires the two safety modules to be connected with a
synchronization link, used to transfer the application state.
During a hot swap it is not possible to download a new configuration from
Control Builder, the controller is reserved. The Control Builder user is notified
with an information dialog. The reservation is released when the hot insert is
concluded or aborted. If a configuration download is ongoing, then the hot insert
starts after the download is completed.
3BSE036351-600 299
SM812 and TP868
Key Features
64 MB RAM
during SIL1-2 operations and together with the
PM867 forms a 1oo2 diverse architecture for
SIL3 applications.
Supports hot swap.
SM Link for synchronization of redundant pair.
Description
300 3BSE036351-600
3BSE036351-600 301
Indicators
controller Reset.
SM812.
SYNC(hronized) /Yellow Indicates that the SM812 is synchronized.
Flashes during SM812 synchronization.
Technical Data
Item Value
64 MB of SDRAM.
Connectors One 7 pin screw connector
One RJ45 connector (SM Link)
302 3BSE036351-600
Item Value
SM812 and TP868).
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
Item Value
6 mA < IH < 18 mA
3BSE036351-600 303
Item Value
The High Integrity controller is able to run SIL3 applications using SM812.
Performing a Hot swap or inserting an additional/replacement SM812 into a running
system affects SIL3 applications.
For performing the hot swap of SM812 running a SIL3 application, the
Access enable digital input (I2) must be turned ON through the key switch before
the Hot-insert digital input (I3) is turned ON.
The Module should be configured in order to get synchronized. When running SIL3
applications, the start of the synchronization must be accepted by the user, to
configure the inserted module.
If one or more SIL3 applications are running in the controller, they are temporarily
interrupted in order to get a consistent state of the application to the newly inserted
SM812. The user must acknowledge the application stop by creating a edge on
digital input 3 on the primary, already running, Safety Module.
304 3BSE036351-600
This is performed by connecting a physical push-button to the digital input. The

system waits for 30 minutes for the acknowledgement, if acknowledgement is not
received the inserted SM812 will shut down. To recover, a new hot insert needs to
be initiated i.e. the SM812 has to be removed and inserted again.
Synchronization of the SM812 includes:
1. Make sure that the synchronization link between the SM812s is in place, that
is, the enclosed TK852V010 cable is properly connected into both SM Link
connectors respectively.
2. Insert the SM812 in its position.
3. When the SM812 starts the synchronization LED flashes, and later it continues
to blink with 3 blinks and a pause in a sequence.
4. Push the button (create an edge on digital input 3 on the already running Safety
Module), once it starts blinking repeatedly with 3 blinks and a pause sequence.
5. The Sync LED flashes faster until the synchronization is complete.
6. The Sync LED turns yellow when the module is synchronized.
Hot-insert will not be completed until all tasks have executed one scan.
Make sure that SM Link Cable TK852V010 is connected before hot-insert and
OLU. The SM Link Cable TK852V010 can be replaced if needed, except during
hot-insert and OLU. Removing the cable results in a diagnostic error and the
cable must be repaired or replaced.
Non-SIL and SIL1-2 applications are not affected by synchronization of SM812.

They continue to execute as normal throughout the entire synchronization
without being interrupted.
A Hot Swap of SM812 requires the two safety modules to be connected with a
synchronization link, used to transfer the application state.
During a hot swap it is not possible to download a new configuration from
Control Builder, the controller is reserved. The Control Builder user is notified
with an information dialog. The reservation is released when the hot insert is
concluded or aborted. If a configuration download is ongoing, then the hot insert
starts after the download is completed.
3BSE036351-600 305
CI853 and TP853 RS-232C Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
CI853 and TP853 RS-232C Interface
Key Features
Two RS-232C ports implemented with RJ45
connectors, located on the TP853 Baseplate, (act as
an extension of the onboard RS-232C port on
PM8xx should more RS-232C ports be required).
Modem support
Simple DIN-rail mounting
Transmission speed selectable between 75 baud and
19200 baud.
Ready-made Software options for several protocols
Pre-set, two-letter Alpha code locking device
see Table 4 on page 79, installed in unit base,
prevents mounting of incompatible components.
Description
Provides an RS-232C channel with full modem support
for each of the COM1 and COM2 ports. A modem (for
example TC562) will be required if the cables extend
beyond 15 m.
306 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI853 and TP853 RS-232C Interface
+24 V
DC/DC
converter Bus interface
+5 V
Microprocessor with
FPROM, SRAM,
Dual Port RWM and
two serial interfaces
Communication Extension Unit
Communication Extension Base plate
Communication lines
Figure 76. Block Diagram CI853
3BSE036351-600 307
CI853 and TP853 RS-232C Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
Indicators
Table 84. CI853 RS-232C LED Indications
Indication/ Color Function

F(ault) /Red Error detected in the unit. Controlled by the
Control Software. Set and cleared by the
Hardware during Reset of the controller.
R(un) /Green Operating. Controlled by the Control Software.
Cleared by the Hardware during Reset of the
controller.
Tx1 /Yellow Flashes if transmission to the COM1 port.
Rx1 /Yellow Flashes if receiving from the COM1 port.
Tx2 /Yellow Flashes if transmission from the COM2 port.
Rx2 /Yellow Flashes if receiving from the COM2 port.
Technical Data
Table 85. CI853 RS-232C Communication Interface Specifications
Item Description
Type Double unisolated RS-232C ports with modem
signals.
Number of channels 2 channels
Protocol Determined by software, application and licenses.
Intended for Modbus, Siemens 3964R, COMLI
and custom designed protocols. Please refer to
CB for details.
75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2000,
2400, 9600, 19200 baud.
308 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI853 and TP853 RS-232C Interface
Table 85. CI853 RS-232C Communication Interface Specifications (Continued)
Item Description
Galvanic isolation Unisolated
Status indicators Running normally: Green. Exceptional fault: Red.
Four traffic indictors - Rx and Tx - controlled by
traffic pace: Flashing yellow.
Connector Two RJ45 connectors on TP853.
Current consumption 100 mA typical (150 mA max.)
Weight 700 g (1.5 lb) (package CI853K01with CI853 and
TP853)
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
For further information see Mounting Dimensions
for Proper Ventilation on page 156.
3BSE036351-600 309
CI854/CI854A/CI854B and TP854 PROFIBUS DP Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
CI854/CI854A/CI854B and TP854 PROFIBUS DP

Interface
Key Features
PROFIBUS DP with redundant line interface (two
DB9 female connector located on the TP854
Baseplate). (1)
(1)
Simple DIN-rail mounting.
In addition to the cyclic data transfer the
CI854/CI854A/CI854B supports acyclic DP
communication and slave redundancy.
By using repeaters it is possible to connect a
maximum of 124 nodes to one PROFIBUS DP
(32 nodes are permitted on one segment).
installed in unit base prevents mounting of
incompatible components.
Transmission speed selectable between 9.6 kbit/s
and 12 Mbit/s.
Support of PROFIBUS DP master redundancy
(CI854A).
Supports hot swap (CI854A).
(1) CI854A only

Description
The CI854/CI854A/CI854B/TP854 connects PROFIBUS DP to AC 800M.
PRODFIBUS DP slave devices like the remote I/Os S800 and S900 can be
connected directly. PROFIBUS PA slave devices can be connected via the
PROFIBUS linking device LD 800P.
The Baseplate TP854 has two female DB9 connectors for connecting
PROFIBUS DP with support of line redundancy. The baseplate has a code lock, see
310 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI854/CI854A/CI854B and TP854 PROFIBUS DP Interface
Table 4 on page 79, that prevents the installation of an incorrect type of unit onto
the TP854 Baseplate.
The CI854/CI854A/CI854B expansion unit contains the CEX-Bus logic, the CPU-
kernel with memory, the PROFIBUS interface with line redundancy unit and a
DC/DC converter that supplies the appropriate voltages from the +24V supply, via
the CEX-Bus.
The PROFIBUS DP must always be terminated at the two outer nodes. This is
usually done by using connectors with built-in termination. To guarantee a correct
working termination the connector has to be plugged and power supplied.
The PROFIBUS DP requirements for screening/earthing have to be fulfilled. The
PROFIBUS DP installation guideline requires that the cable shield should be
connected to ground at both ends of the cable. This has to be done although the
CI854/CI854A/CI854B already connects the shield to ground via the connectors.
3BSE036351-600 311
Communication
Extension Bus +24 V
R
DC/DC CEX-Bus Interface
Converter F
PRIM
CPU-Kernel and Memory
DUAL
+5 V / +3.3 V
PROFIBUS Master ASIC
RxA
Line Redundancy Unit
RxB
Communication
Extension Unit
RS485
PROFIBUS A
PROFIBUS B
Communication
Extension Baseplate
Figure 77. Block Diagram CI854A/CI854B. (CI854, same diagram without PRIM/DUAL LEDS)
312 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI854/CI854A/CI854B and TP854 PROFIBUS DP Interface
Indicators
Table 86. CI854/CI854A/CI854B PROFIBUS DP LED Indicators
F(ault) /Red Unit error detected. Set by the Hardware during
controller Reset. Controlled by the Control
Software after Reset.
R(un) /Green Operating. Cleared by the Hardware during
RxA /Yellow Receive Data on Line A. For each telegram
received the LED flashes. In normal operation is
seen as static on.
RxB /Yellow Receive Data on Line B. For each telegram
seen as static on.
PRIM(ary) /Yellow (CI854A This LED is on in single and redundant
and CI854B) configuration. Indicates Primary CI854A in
DUAL /Yellow (CI854A and This LED is on when CI854A is running in
CI854B) redundant configuration.
Technical Data
Table 87. CI854/CI854A/CI854B PROFIBUS DP Interface Specifications
Item Value
Type DP Master Class 1and 2 for DP Services
DP Master Class 2 for DP Services
Protocol PROFIBUS DP
Communication speed 9.6, 19.2, 93.75, 187.5, 500, 1500, 3000,
6000 or 12000 kbit/s
3BSE036351-600 313
Table 87. CI854/CI854A/CI854B PROFIBUS DP Interface Specifications
Item Value
Status indicators Running normally: Green.
Exceptional fault: Red.
Two traffic indictors - RxA and RxB -
controlled by traffic pace: Flashing yellow.
Running as primary: Yellow.
Running in a redundant configuration: Yellow.
Connectors Two DB9, female on TP854.
Current consumption 190 mA typical (max. 240 mA).
Power dissipation 4.6 W typical.
Capacity Max 32 nodes on PROFIBUS without
repeater.
IEC 529.
Weight 700 g (1.5 lb) (package CI854K01 with
CI854 and TP854).
700 g (1.5 lb) (package CI854AK01 with
CI854A and TP854).
700 g (1.5 lb) (package CI854BK01 with
CI854B and TP854).
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
314 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI854B and TP850
CI854B and TP850
Key Features
PROFIBUS-DP Master implemented in a separate
FPGA having a soft core NIOS processor with
own DDR2RAM and serial flash. (1)
(1)
The CI854B module connects a PROFIBUS-DP
with line redundancy to the controller AC800M.
The connection between CI854 and AC800M is
done through the CEX-Bus. The CI854B supports
also PROFIBUS slave and master redundancy.
For PROFIBUS-DP the maximum number of
stations (masters and slaves) in a segment is 32.
Using repeaters the maximum number of stations
can be extended up to 126.
Supports hot swap (CI854B).
Description
The Its purpose is to connect a PROFIBUS-DP with
line redundancy to the controller AC800M. The
connection between CI854B and AC800M is done
through the CEX-Bus.
(1) CI854A only
The Communication Expansion Unit (CEU) consists of
two basic parts: the Communication Expansion
Baseplate (CEB) TP854 and the removable
Communication Expansion Module (CEM) CI854B.
Baseplate and CEM are connected via an 80-pin edge connector.
The Baseplate contains only passive elements. It holds the input and output
connectors for the CEX-Bus, a slot for the CEM and the PROFIBUS-connectors.
3BSE036351-600 315
CI854B and TP850 Appendix A Hardware Units
The CEM contains the MPC880 CPU with Flash memory, RAM, LED indicators,
power supply, CEX-Bus interface with dual port memory, PROFIBUS FPGA and
line redundancy unit.
The CEM can be removed from the Baseplate without disturbing the
communication to other modules on the CEX-Bus.
316 3BSE036351-600
Figure 78. Block Diagram CI854B. (CI854, same diagram without PRIM/DUAL LEDS)
3BSE036351-600 317
CI854B and TP850 Appendix A Hardware Units
Indicators
Table 88. CI854B PROFIBUS DP LED Indicators
F(ault) /Red Unit error detected. Set by the Hardware during
R(un) /Green Operating. Cleared by the Hardware during
RxA /Yellow Receive Data on Line A. For each telegram
seen as static on.
RxB /Yellow Receive Data on Line B. For each telegram
seen as static on.
PRIM(ary) /Yellow (CI854B) This LED is on in single and redundant
configuration. Indicates Primary CI854B in
DUAL /Yellow (CI854B) This LED is on when CI854A is running in
Technical Data
Table 89. CI854B PROFIBUS DP Interface Specifications
Item Value
Type DP Master Class 1and 2 for DP Services
DP Master Class 2 for DP Services
Protocol PROFIBUS DP
Communication speed 9.6, 19.2, 93.75, 187.5, 500, 1500, 3000,
6000 or 12000 kbit/s
318 3BSE036351-600
Table 89. CI854B PROFIBUS DP Interface Specifications (Continued)
Item Value
Two traffic indictors - RxA and RxB -
Connectors Two DB9, female on TP854.
Current consumption 190 mA typical (max. 240 mA).
Capacity Max 32 nodes on PROFIBUS without
repeater.
IEC 529.
Weight 700 g (1.5 lb) (package CI854BK01 with
CI854B and TP854).
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
3BSE036351-600 319
CI855 and TP853 Ethernet Interface for MasterBus 300 Appendix A Hardware Units
CI855 and TP853 Ethernet Interface for MasterBus 300
Key Features
Provides two Ethernet ports, (two RJ45 connectors
located on the TP853 Baseplate).
Provides Redundant Ethernet networks for
MasterBus 300.
Supports Hot swap.
Description
The CI855/TP853 can be used to connect an AC 800M
to single or redundant MB 300 Networks. This allows
DataSet communication and transmission of time
between AC 400 Master and AC 800M. The TP853
Baseplate has two RJ45 Ethernet connectors for
connecting to MB300. The baseplate has a code lock,
see Table 4 on page 79, that prevents the installation of
an incorrect type of unit onto the TP853 Baseplate.
The CI855 expansion unit contains the CEX-Bus logic,
a communication unit and a DC/DC converter that
supplies appropriate voltages from the +24 V supply, via the CEX-Bus. The
Ethernet cable must be connected to the main network through an Ethernet Switch.
320 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI855 and TP853 Ethernet Interface for MasterBus 300
+24V
DC/DC Converter
Bus Interface
+5V
68360 QUICC
+5V
Communication Processor
Glue for Ethernet
Communication Extension Module
Communication Extension Baseplate
Communication
Ethernet Line
3BSE036351-600 321
CI855 and TP853 Ethernet Interface for MasterBus 300 Appendix A Hardware Units
Indicators
Table 90. CI855 MasterBus 300 LED Indicators
controller Reset.
Tx1 /Yellow flashing A yellow LED indicating transmission from the
communication unit COM1 port.
Rx1 /Yellow flashing A yellow LED flashes when data is being received
from the COM1 port.
from the COM2 port.
Technical Data
Table 91. CI855 MasterBus 300 Interface Specifications
Item Value
Type Ethernet unit
Protocol MasterBus 300 based on Ethernet
Status indicators Run normally green, FAIL exceptionally
red, the four traffic indicators RX/TX1,
RX/TX 2, COLL1 and COLL2 are yellow
flashing controlled by the traffic pace.
Connector 2 RJ45
322 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI855 and TP853 Ethernet Interface for MasterBus 300
Table 91. CI855 MasterBus 300 Interface Specifications (Continued)
Item Value
CI855 and TP853)
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
3BSE036351-600 323
CI856 and TP856 S100 I/O Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
CI856 and TP856 S100 I/O Interface
Key Features
Provides one S100 I/O port, (a 36 pin centerline
miniature ribbon connector located on the TP856
Baseplate).
The CI856 handles I/O scanning and updating of
S100 I/O units located in up to five I/O racks. The
minimum cyclic scan/update interval is 0.2ms,
though this will depend on I/O type and number of
I/O points.
Supports Hot swap.
Description
The CI856/TP856 connects S100 I/O to AC 800M.The
TP856 Baseplate has one 36-pin centerline miniature
ribbon connector for connecting S100 I/O racks. The
baseplate has a code lock, see Table 4 on page 79, that
prevents installation of an incorrect type of unit onto
the TP856 Baseplate.
The CI856 expansion unit contains the CEX-Bus logic, S100 I/O-bus logics, CPU
and a DC/DC converter that supplies appropriate voltages from the +24 V supply,
via the CEX-Bus.
324 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI856 and TP856 S100 I/O Interface
+24 V
DC/DC
converter
CEX-Bus interface
+2.5 V
SDRAM
8 MB
+3.3 V
ColdFire P
MCF5307
Flash
2 MB
+5 V S100 I/O-bus interface
Communication Extension Unit
S100 communication cable
3BSE036351-600 325
CI856 and TP856 S100 I/O Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
Indicators
Table 92. CI856 S100 I/O LED Indicators
F(ault) /Red Unit error detected. Controlled by CI856 Software.
Set by the Hardware during controller Reset.
Cleared by the CI856 Software after successful
startup.
TO /Yellow Flashes at S100 I/O access time-outs.
Technical Data
Table 93. CI856 S100 I/O Interface Specifications
Item Value
Type S100 I/O Communication Interface
Galvanic isolation No
red, the indicator TO are yellow flashing at
S100 I/O access time-outs.
Connector 36 pin centerline miniature ribbon
connector, female
Capacity Max 5 I/O racks with 20 I/O units each
326 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI856 and TP856 S100 I/O Interface
Table 93. CI856 S100 I/O Interface Specifications (Continued)
Item Value
CI856 and TP856)
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
3BSE036351-600 327
CI857 and TP853 INSUM Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
CI857 and TP853 INSUM Interface
Key Features
Provides one Ethernet port, (RJ45 connector
located on the TP853 Baseplate). Only COM1 is
used for INSUM.
Provides communication with INSUM via
Ethernet/LON Gateway
Supports Hot swap.
Description
controller to INSUM through TCP/IP over Ethernet and
an INSUM TCP/IP Gateway that has a LON interface
communicating with the underlying INSUM system.
The TP853 Baseplate has two RJ45 Ethernet
connectors, though only the COM1connector is used
for connecting to INSUM.
The baseplate has a code lock, see Table 4 on page 79,
that prevents the installation of an incorrect type of unit
onto the TP853 Baseplate.
The CI857 expansion unit contains the CEX-Bus logic, a communication unit and a
DC/DC converter that supplies appropriate voltages from the +24 V supply via the
CEX-Bus. The Ethernet cable must be connected to the main network through an
Ethernet Switch.
328 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI857 and TP853 INSUM Interface
+24V
DC/DC Converter
Bus Interface
+5V
68360 QUICC
+5V
Communication Processor
Glue for Ethernet
Communication Extension Module
Communication
Ethernet Line
3BSE036351-600 329
CI857 and TP853 INSUM Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
Indicators
Table 94. CI857 INSUM Interface LED Indicators
controller Reset.
from the COM1 port.
Tx2 OFF Not used.
Rx2 OFF Not used.
Technical Data
Table 95. CI857 INSUM Interface Specifications
Item Value
Type Ethernet unit.
Protocol INSUM TCP/IP
Status indicators Running normally: Green. Exceptional fault:
Red. Two traffic indictors - Tx1/Rx1 -
Connector 2 RJ45 (only COM1 is used).
330 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI857 and TP853 INSUM Interface
Table 95. CI857 INSUM Interface Specifications (Continued)
Item Value
Current consumption 150 mA typical (200 mA max.).
Weight 700 g (1.5 lb) (package CI857K01with
CI857 and TP853).
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
3BSE036351-600 331
CI858 and TP858 DriveBus Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
CI858 and TP858 DriveBus Interface
Key Features
Provides three optical connectors for DriveBus,
I/O bus and PC tools.
Description
The CI858 unit consists of a communication expansion
base plate, a communication expansion unit. All
electronic devices and all functions are located on the
communication expansion unit board.
The CI858 has three connectors. DriveBus connector
for connection of ABB Drives, see Drive System on
page 173. Special I/O connection, see I/O Systems on
page 164. A tool connection for downloading firmware
to the communication unit with the ABB Drives tools
DriveDebug or DriveWindow.
that prevents the installation of an incorrect type of unit
onto the Baseplate.
CEX-Bus.
In order to use the tool connection, the PC must be equipped with a
PCMCIA/DDCS (laptop) or an ISA/DDCS (desktop) interface.
332 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI858 and TP858 DriveBus Interface
3BSE036351-600 333
CI858 and TP858 DriveBus Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
Indicators
Table 96. CI858 DriveBus Interface LED Indicators
F(ault) /Red Unit error detected.
R(un) /Green Operating.
Dbus; Rx /Yellow RECIEVE LED indicating reception of data frames
on the DriveBus.
Dbus; Tx /Yellow TRANSMIT LED indicating transmission of data
frames on the DriveBus.
I/O; Rx /Yellow RECIEVE LED indicating reception of data frames
on the I/O bus.
I/O; Tx /Yellow TRANSMIT LED indicating transmission of data
frames on the I/O Bus.
Tools /Yellow RECIEVE LED indicating reception of data frames
on the PC Tool bus(1).
Tools /Yellow TRANSMIT LED indicating transmission of data
frames on the PC Tool Bus(1).
(1) This LED is not visible in the front of the unit. It can be seen through the ventilation holes in the
plastic housing.
Technical Data
Table 97. CI858 DriveBus Specifications
Item Value
Communication speed 4 Mbit/s
Connectors Three optical connectors
334 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI858 and TP858 DriveBus Interface
Table 97. CI858 DriveBus Specifications (Continued)
Item Value
Current consumption 200 mA max.
External supply voltage 17 V minimum
25 V typical
30 V max
Approval CE-marked and meets the requirements
specified in EMC Directive EMCD
2004/108/EC according to the standards
EN 50081-2 and EN 61000-6-2.
3BSE036351-600 335
CI860 and TP860 FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet Appendix A Hardware Units
CI860 and TP860 FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed

Ethernet
Key Features
Provides one Ethernet port, (RJ45 connector
Provides communication with FOUNDATION
Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet devices via Ethernet.
Supports FF HSE redundancy.
Supports hot swap.
Description
controller to FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed
Ethernet through TCP/IP via Ethernet.
The TP860 Baseplate has one RJ45 Ethernet connector
to connect the unit to the FOUNDATION Fieldbus High
Speed Ethernet.
that prevents the installation of an incorrect type of unit onto the TP860 Baseplate.
CEX-Bus. The Ethernet cable must be connected to an Ethernet device.
To operate FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 devices with the CI860 these H1 devices
must be connected via a FOUNDATION Fieldbus Linking Device (for example LD
800HSE) to adapt them to FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet.
336 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI860 and TP860 FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet
Communication
Extension Bus +24 V
R
DC/DC CEX-Bus Interface
Converter F
PRIM
CPU-Kernel and Memory
DUAL
+2.5 V / +3.3 V RxTx

Ethernet Transceiver
100 MBit/s
Communication
Extension Unit
Communication
Extension Baseplate
COM
3BSE036351-600 337
CI860 and TP860 FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet Appendix A Hardware Units
Indicators
Table 98. CI860 FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet Interface LED
Indicators
Software. Set and cleared by the hardware during
controller Reset.
Cleared by the hardware during controller Reset.
100MBit/s is ON A valid connection with100 MBit/s is established
when Rx Tx/Yellow is flashing.
100MBit/s is OFF A valid connection with10 MBit/s is established
when Rx Tx/Yellow is flashing.
RxTx LED is ON A link to the corresponding Ethernet device is
established. No Ethernet packages are
sent/received
RxTx/Yellow flashing A link to the corresponding Ethernet device is
established. Ethernet packages are sent/received.
RxTx LED is OFF A link with the corresponding Ethernet unit is not
established
PRIM A yellow LED for indicating the primary unit in
DUAL The yellow LED indicates the redundant
configuration.
338 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI860 and TP860 FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet
Technical Data
Table 99. CI860 FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet Specifications
Item Value
Type Ethernet unit.
Protocol FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed
Ethernet, TCP/IP.
Communication speed 10 Mbit/s / 100 Mbit/s defined in IEEE
802.3 100baseTX.
One traffic indictor - RxTx - controlled by
traffic pace.
Connector RJ45
Current consumption 100 mA typical (150 mA max.).
CI860 and TP860).
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
3BSE036351-600 339
CI862 and TP862 - TRIO/Genius Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
CI862 and TP862 - TRIO/Genius Interface
Key Features
CEX-Bus interface for communication to AC 800M
LED indicators for R(un), F(ault), Communication Error, Primary (Bus
Master), and Dual (redundancy)
Motorola MCF5307 Microcontroller running at 32 MHz
2 MByte Flash memory for code
8 MByte SDRAM for configuration and dynamic data, also used as Dual Port
Memory between CI862 and AC 800M
Power supply from the CEX bus +24V supply with DC/DC converters to +5V,
+3.3V, and +2.5V
Hand Held Monitor Port used for reading Local I/O Block
Field bus termination switch
The CI862 can be used in a redundant processor module configuration under the
following conditions:
a. If the CI862 is used with redundant PM862/PM866/PM866A/PM867, only the
TK850 CEX-bus extension cable shall be used for interconnection between the
PM866 modules. The BC810/BC820 shall not be used.
b. If the CI862 is used with other redundant processor modules
(PM861A/PM864A/PM865), either BC810/BC820 or TK850 CEX-bus
extension cable can be used for interconnection between the two processor
modules.
The CI862 is not supported with the PM891 processor module.
Description
CI862, Figure 84, connects a TRIO Field Bus to the controller AC 800M. The
connection between CI862 and AC 800M is done via the CEX-Bus.
340 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI862 and TP862 - TRIO/Genius Interface
A single CI862 can connect 30 blocks to a single TRIO LAN. AC 800M can have
up to four single TRIO LANs. The maximum I/O with TRIO is 1000 I/O points.
F
R
COM ERROR
PRIM
DUAL
Bus Termination
Dip Switch Location
CI862
X1
X2
SI
SO
HHM TRL LAN
Figure 84. CI862 TRIO/Genius interface.

TRIO blocks, Figure 85, are self-contained, configurable I/O blocks used to
interface field devices to the CI862 communications bus. These blocks can be
individually installed on machines, in junction boxes, or grouped in racks or panels.
A TRIO block is made of cast aluminum, and weighs approximately 1.8 kgs
(4 pounds). It measures approximately 22.5 x 10 x 7.5 cm (9 x 4 x 3 inches). Each
block has its own communications capability and microprocessor, and provides
from 6 to 32 circuits for connecting input and output devices. You can place blocks
3BSE036351-600 341
on the bus in any combination or sequence. You can use a mix of blocks on the same
bus. Various types of blocks are available as listed in Table 100.
Figure 85. TRIO block.
Table 100. TRIO block types.
Can be
Unit Name Type Description
BSM
4IN2OUT 4 In 2 Out Analog 4 Input, 2 Output No
CSANALOG Current Source I/O Analog 4 Input, 2 Output Yes
TC Thermocouple Analog 6 Input Yes
RTD RTD Analog 6 Input No
CSANAINP Current Source Input Analog 6 Input Yes
CSANAOUT Current Source Output Analog 6 Output Yes
IO_16CKT 16 Circuit I/O Digital 16 Input or Output (configurable) Yes
IO_32CKT 32 Circuit I/O Digital 32 Input or Output (configurable) Yes
342 3BSE036351-600
Table 100. TRIO block types. (Continued)
Can be
Unit Name Type Description
BSM
GRP_8CKT 8 Circuit Grouped Digital 8 Input or Output (configurable) Yes
ISO_8CKT 8 Circuit Isolated Digital 8 Input or Output (configurable) Yes
IN_16CKT 16 Circuit Input Digital 16 Input No
OP_16CKT 16 Circuit Output Digital 16 Output Yes
HSC_A High Speed Counter A Counter 4 16 bit Up/Down Counters No
HSC_B High Speed Counter B Counter 2 Bi-directional 24 bit Up/Down No
Counters
3BSE036351-600 343

A complete CI862K01 unit consists of a TP862 baseplate, a CI862 communication
interface board, and their mechanics, Figure 86. All electronic devices and all
functions are located on the board which also includes the Genie slave module.
The baseplate and CI862 are connected via an 80-pin edge connector. Connections
to the outside world are made on the baseplate.
CI862 Module Base-Pl ate

32 MHz
TP862
Reset
Circuit s
ColdFire p CEX-Bus
MCF5307/ 5407 CPU Bus
5V
BDM 5V Power 24V
..
3.3V
..
..
..
.. BDM I/O 2.5V
R F Base
Debug Connector
..
.. ..
..
..
.. Serial I/O .. ..
.. ..
FPGA .. ..
SDRAM CEX Bus .. ..
8 MByte Interf ace .. ..
.. ..
..
.. ..
Flash Memory ..
2 MByte .. TRIO
.. ..
.. LAN
.. ..
..
.. ... ...
SWT ..
.. Genie LAN ..
FPGA .. .. ..
Watchdog PC-ISA .. Communication
..
.. Processor ..
Interface & .. ..
.. Module .. ..
LVD Level .. ..
Shifter .. .. GENIUS
..
..
.. .. .. HHM
.. ..
.. ..
..
.. .. ..
..
..
..
..
RS422
TRL
Figure 86. CI862 functionality

The baseplate contains only passive elements. It holds the input and output
connectors for the CEX-Bus, a slot for the CI862 unit, a port used for the Genius
Bus Hand Held Monitor, a high speed serial port used for module redundancy link
communications and a port for the TRIO Field Bus connection.
344 3BSE036351-600
CI862 contains the Coldfire MCF5307 Microcontroller with Flash memory, RAM,
LED indicators, power supply, and CEX-Bus interface with dual port memory,
bridged to a GE/Fanuc Genie Communication Module. The Genie handles all
data transfer between the CI862 Carrier module and the TRIO FIELD BUS,
allowing the Carrier CPU to control the remote I/O.
Indicators
LED indicators for R(un), F(ault), Communication Error, Primary (Bus Master), and
Dual (redundancy)
Technical Data
Table 101. TRIO/Genius interface CI862
Item Value
Bus Type Daisy-chained bus cable; single twisted pair plus shield
or Twinax.
Protocol similar to the RS422 standard
Communication speed 153.6 ext, 38.4, 76.8, 153.6 std kbit/s
Bus Capacity (one segment) Max 32 devices. 16 devices at 38.4
Kbaud. Includes CI862 and Hand-held Monitor.
Bus Termination 75, 100, 120, or 150 ohm resistor at both ends of
electrical bus cable.
Maximum Bus Length 7500 feet at 38.4 Kbaud, 4500 feet at 76.8 Kbaud, 3500
feet at 153.6 Kbaud extended, 2000 feet at 153.6
Kbaud, standard. Maximum length at each baud rate
also depends on cable type.
Galvanic Isolation Yes
Status Indicators Red LED for error
Green LED for run
Yellow LED for traffic
Yellow LED for primary
Yellow LED for dual mode
3BSE036351-600 345
Table 101. TRIO/Genius interface CI862 (Continued)
Item Value
Connector one 4 pin (connects TRIO FIELD BUS)
one DB9S (male) (connects Hand-held Monitor)
one DB9, female (connects CEX expansion bus)
Current Consumption Typical 190 mA (max. 200 mA)
from CEX-Bus 24 V d.c.
Dimensions W 58 x H 165 x D 122 mm
(W 2.3 x H 6.4x D 4.81 inches)
Hot swap Supported
346 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI865 and TP865 Satt I/O Interface
CI865 and TP865 Satt I/O Interface
Key Features
Provides one ControlNet port, (a BNC connector
Handles I/O scanning of up to 31 distributed I/O
nodes.
Supports Hot swap.
Description
The CI865/TP865 connects ControlNet to AC 800M. The
module makes it possible to use older Satt I/O system
(Rack I/O and Series 200 I/O) with the AC 800M
controller platform but it can not be used as a general
ControlNet interface. The TP865 Baseplate has one BNC
connector for connecting I/O racks. The baseplate has a
code lock, see Table 4 on page 79, that prevents
installation of an incorrect type of unit onto the TP865
Baseplate.
The CI865 expansion unit contains the CEX-Bus logic, ControlNet bus logic, CPU
and a DC/DC converter that supplies appropriate voltages from the +24 V supply,
via the CEX-Bus.
3BSE036351-600 347
CI865 and TP865 Satt I/O Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
CEX bus
DC/DC LVDS Reset

trancievers Circuits
SDRAM 8MB
+5.0V
+3.3V FLASH 2MB
CEX interf.
+2.5V
FPGA
Spartan-II Processor
JTAG
256BGA ColdFire
MCF5307
RS232
LANXCVR ControlNet ASIC
trancievers SMAC BDM
CN bus
348 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI865 and TP865 Satt I/O Interface
Indicators
Table 102. Satt I/O CI865 Fault Finding
Neither R(un) nor F(ault) The CI865 unit is in the process of being
LEDs are ON configured. Allow time for this to finalize.
the CEX-Bus is lit:
Check the CEX-Bus fuse inside the PM8xx
processor unit
processor unit
COM A/COM B LED is OFF Power OFF or Reset Mode
COM A/COM B LED is solid Channel OK
green
COM A/COM B LED is Temporary error or need initial setup
flashing green
COM A/COM B LED is solid Module is broken, has to be replaced
red
COM A/COM B LED is Bad channel cable
flashing red
COM A/COM B LED is railroad The road is not configured right for the network
red
COM A/COM B LED is Network has data flow problem
flashing red/green
COM A/COM B LED is railroad Self test
red/green
3BSE036351-600 349
CI865 and TP865 Satt I/O Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
Technical Data
Table 103. Satt I/O CI865 Interface Specifications
Item Value
Type Satt I/O Communication Interface
red,
COM A/COM B
Connector BNC
Capacity Up to 3968 binary I/O channels
Weight 700 g (1.5 lb) (package CI865xxx with
CI865 and TP865)
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
350 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI867 and TP867 Modbus TCP Interface
CI867 and TP867 Modbus TCP Interface
Key Features
Provides one 10/100Mbps Fast Ethernet port,
(RJ45 connector located on the TP867 Baseplate).
Provides one 10Mbps Ethernet port, (RJ45
connector located on the TP867 Baseplate).
Provides communication with Modbus TCP
protocol via Ethernet.
installed in unit base prevents mounting
of incompatible components.
Supports hot swap.
Description
The CI867/TP867 can be used to connect an
AC 800M controller to external Ethernet devices
using Modbus TCP protocol.
connectors, where CH1 connector can use 10Mbps
or 100Mbps (Mega bits/sec.) and CH2 use10Mbps only.
The baseplate has a code lock (see Table 4 on page 79)
that prevents the installation of an incorrect type of unit onto the TP867 Baseplate.
Ethernet Switch.
3BSE036351-600 351
CI867 and TP867 Modbus TCP Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
352 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI867 and TP867 Modbus TCP Interface
Indicators
Table 104. Modbus TCP Interface CI867 - LED indicators
F(ault) / Red Unit error detected. Set by the Hardware during
Controller Reset. Controlled by Control Software after
Reset.
R(un) / Green Operating. Cleared by the Hardware during Controller
Reset. Controlled by Control Software after Reset.
RxTx1 / Yellow When flashing. Ethernet packages are sent/received at
CH 1.
RxTx2 / Yellow When flashing. Ethernet packages are sent/received At
CH 2.
PRIM(ary) This LED is on in single and redundant configuration.
Indicates Primary CI867 in redundant configuration.
DUAL This LED is on when CI867 is running in redundant
configuration.
Technical Data
Table 105. Modbus TCP Interface CI867 - Technical Specification
Item Value
Type Ethernet unit
Protocol Modbus TCP
Communication speed CH1 10 Mbit/s / 100 Mbit/s defined in IEEE 802.3u 10/100Base-
Tx
Communication speed CH2 10 Mbit/s defined in IEEE 802.3 10Base-T
3BSE036351-600 353
CI867 and TP867 Modbus TCP Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
Table 105. Modbus TCP Interface CI867 - Technical Specification (Continued)

Two traffic indictors RxTx1 and RxTx2 -- controlled by
traffic pace: Flashing Yellow
Traffic indictor CH2 RxTx2 - controlled by
traffic pace.
Connectors RJ45
Current consumption (from CEX- 160 mA typical (250 mA max)
Bus 24VDC)
Power dissipation 3.8W typical
CI867 and TP867).
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
354 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI868 and TP867 IEC 61850 Interface
CI868 and TP867 IEC 61850 Interface
Key Features
CEX-Bus Module.
MPC862P 96MHz.
32 MB SDRAM with integrity check.
4 MB Flash PROM.
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3u supporting full Fast Ethernet
10/100Mbps operation.
Support IEC 61850 protocol
10/100 Mbps use IEEE standard Media Independent
Interface (MII)
Description
The CI868 can be used to connect an AC 800M controller
to external Ethernet devices using IEC 61850 protocol.
The TP868 Baseplate has two RJ45 Ethernet connectors,
where CH1 connector can use 10Mbps or 100Mbps
(Mega bits/sec.).The baseplate has a code lock
(see Table 4 on page 79) that prevents the installation of
an incorrect type of unit onto the TP867 Baseplate.
Ethernet Switch.
3BSE036351-600 355
CI868 and TP867 IEC 61850 Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
356 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI868 and TP867 IEC 61850 Interface
Indicators
There are six LED indicators on the front panel of CI868 that indicate various states
and conditions on the CI868.
Table 106. IEC 61850 Interface CI868 - LED indicators
F(ault) / Red The red F(ault) LED indicates a fault condition on CI868.
Reset turns the F LED on. Software can turn it on and off
via a register in the CEX-Bus controller.
R(un) / Green The green R(un) LED indicates that CI868 is operational.
Reset turns the LED off. Software can turn the LED on
and off via a register in the CEX-Bus controller.
RxTx1 / Yellow The yellow Rx/Tx1 LED is intended to be lit to indicate a
receiving/transmitting telegram at Ch1. The LED is
controlled by Ethernet PHY. It is turned off by reset.
RxTx2 / Yellow The yellow Rx/Tx2 LED (LED will always be switched
OFF) is intended to be lit to indicate a
receiving/transmitting telegram at Ch2(The channel is
disabled). The LED is controlled by Ethernet PHY. It is
turned off by reset.
PRIM(ary) The PRIM and DUAL LEDs are not enabled when the
module is used in a single configuration (CI868 does not
support redundant configuration).
Technical Data
Table 107. IEC 61850 Interface CI868 - Technical Specification
Item Value
Type Ethernet unit
Protocol IEC 61850
3BSE036351-600 357
CI868 and TP867 IEC 61850 Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
Table 107. IEC 61850 Interface CI868 - Technical Specification (Continued)
Communication speed CH1 10 Mbit/s / 100 Mbit/s defined in IEEE 802.3u 10/100Base-
Tx
Two traffic indicators RxTx1 and RxTx2(LED will always
be switched off) -- controlled by traffic pace: Flashing Yellow
Connectors RJ45
Bus 24VDC)
Power dissipation 3.8W typical (6W max)
Weight 500 g (700g with package) (package CI868K01with
CI868 and TP867).
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
358 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI869 and TP869 - AF 100 Interface
CI869 and TP869 - AF 100 Interface
Key Features
CEX-Bus Module.
Simple DIN rail mounting
Supports communication interface redundancy
Supports redundant connections to AF 100 Bus
through twisted wire pair.
Description
The CI869 is an AC 800M communication interface
that connects to the AF 100 field bus through the
twisted pair (TWP) cable.
The CI869 can be configured for both redundant
cables and redundant communication interfaces.
For details about the operation and configuration of
CI869 connected to AF 100 bus, refer to Advant
Fieldbus 100 User Manual (3BSE000506*).
The Termination Plate (TP869) contains the CEX-Bus
connectors and two 4-pin connectors for AF 100
TWP.
The baseplate has a code lock (see Table 4 on page
79) that prevents the installation of an incorrect type
of unit onto the TP869 Baseplate.
3BSE036351-600 359
CI869 and TP869 - AF 100 Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
Figure 90. Block Diagram - CI869
Indicators
There are six LED indicators on the front panel of CI869. The Mast LED is not used
as CI869 cannot function as bus master. The other LEDs indicate the various states
and conditions of the CI869 unit.
360 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI869 and TP869 - AF 100 Interface
Table 108. AF 100 Interface, CI869 - LED indicators
A reset turns the F LED ON, till the unit is initialized.
R(un) / Green The green R(un) LED indicates that the CI869 is
operational.
A reset turns the R LED OFF.
Rx / Yellow The yellow Rx LED indicates that the CI869 receives
traffic.
The Rx LED is ON, without flashing, when traffic is
normal.
The Rx LED flashes with less frequency when no bus
traffic is detected, flashes with 50% more frequency when
the module has bus traffic and the device is not
configured, and flashes with 75% more frequency when
the device is configured, but the CDPs are not correctly
polled.
A reset turns the Rx LED OFF.
Mast(er) This LED is not used.
Prim(ary) The yellow Prim(ary) LED indicates that the CI869 is the
primary module of a redundant pair.
A reset turns the Prim LED OFF.
Dual The yellow Dual mode LED indicates that the redundancy
is active.
A reset turns the Dual LED OFF.
3BSE036351-600 361
CI869 and TP869 - AF 100 Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
Technical Data
Table 109. AF100 Interface CI869 - Technical Specification
Item Value
Type AF 100 Communication Interface
Protocol Advant Fieldbus 100
Communication speed TWP 1.5 Mbit/s
Traffic indicator Rx -- controlled by traffic pace:
Flashing Yellow
Connectors Twisted Pair (TWP)
Bus 24VDC)
Power dissipation 3.8W typical (6W max)
Weight 500 g
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in)
362 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI871 and TP867 PROFINET IO Interface
CI871 and TP867 PROFINET IO Interface
Key Features
Provides one 10/100 Mbps fast Ethernet port
for PROFINET IO (RJ45 connector located
on the TP867 base plate).
Provides communication with PROFINET IO
protocol through Ethernet with 100 Mbps.
Preset, two letter Alpha code locking device
installed in the unit base, which prevents
mounting of incompatible components.
Supports hot swap.
Description
The CI871 can be used to connect an AC 800M
controller to PROFINET IO devices.
connectors. CH1 connector supports 10 Mbps or
100 Mbps. CH2 connector supports only 10 Mbps.
By default, the CH1 connector is used in PROFINET IO as it supports 100 Mbps.
The Ethernet cable must be connected to the PROFINET IO network through an

Ethernet switch. The baseplate has a code lock (refer Table 4 on page 79), which
prevents the installation of an incorrect type of unit onto the TP867 baseplate.
The CI871 expansion unit contains the CEX-Bus logic, a communication unit, and a
DC/DC converter that supplies the required voltage from +24 V supply through the
CEX-Bus.
3BSE036351-600 363
CI871 and TP867 PROFINET IO Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
364 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI871 and TP867 PROFINET IO Interface
Indicators
There are six LED indicators on the front panel of CI871 to indicate various states
and conditions of CI871.
Table 110. PROFINET IO Interface CI871 - LED indicators
Reset turns the LED on. Software can turn it on and off
through a register in the CEX-Bus controller.
operational. Reset turns the LED off. Software can turn
the LED on and off through a register in the CEX-Bus
controller.
RxTx1 / Yellow The yellow Rx/Tx1 LED is intended to be ON to indicate a
receiving/transmitting telegram at CH1. The LED is
RxTx2 / Yellow The yellow Rx/Tx2 LED is intended to be ON to indicate a
receiving/transmitting telegram at CH2. The LED is
PRIM (ary) The yellow LED indicates if the module is active or not. It
does not describe the redundancy configuration of a
module.
DUAL The LED is ON when CI871 is operational in redundant
configuration.
This LED is always OFF as redundancy is not supported.
3BSE036351-600 365
CI871 and TP867 PROFINET IO Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
Technical Data
Table 111. PROFINET IO Interface CI871 - Technical Specification
Item Value
Type Ethernet unit
Protocol PROFINET IO
Communication speed CH1 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps defined in IEEE 802.3u 10/100
Base-Tx.
Two traffic indicators RxTx1 and RxTx2(LED is always
switched off) controlled by traffic pace: Flashing Yellow.
Connectors RJ45
Current consumption 160 mA typical (250 mA max).
(from CEX-Bus 24VDC)
Power dissipation 3.8 W typical (6 W max).
Weight 500 g (700 g with package) (package CI871K01 with
CI871 and TP867).
Dimensions W 59 x H 185 x D 127.5 mm.
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in).
366 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI872 and TP858 - MOD5 Interface
CI872 and TP858 - MOD5 Interface
Key Features
CEX-Bus Module
Simple DIN rail mounting
Supports communication interface redundancy
Three full duplex fiberoptic ports
Supports MOD5-to-MOD5 protocol
Description
The MOD5 communication interface, type - CI872,
connects the AC 800M controller to the MOD5
controllers.
The baseplate has a code lock that prevents the
installation of an incorrect unit onto the TP858
baseplate.
The CI872 expansion unit contains the CEX-bus logic,
a communication unit, and a DC/DC converter that
supplies appropriate voltages from the +24 V supply
through the CEX-bus.
CI872 should be mounted only on a horizontal DIN- rail. The base plate has a
locking mechanism that contacts the metal back plate to the DIN-rail, which
provides an effective ground connection. The CI872 and its base plate are supplied
as a single unit (CI872), and there is no requirement to separate them during the
mounting procedure. To mount the modules on the DIN-rail, it is necessary to use
only a flat bladed screwdriver.
In case of assembling after a separation (hot insertion), verify that the key coding is
same for the base plate and the electronic module.
3BSE036351-600 367
CI872 and TP858 - MOD5 Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
368 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI872 and TP858 - MOD5 Interface
Indicators
There are six LED indicators on the front panel of CI872 that indicate different
states of the CI872 module including communication on the optical ports states.
Table 112. MOD5 Interface CI872 - LED indicators
R(un) / Green The green R(un) LED indicates that CI872 is operational.
RxTx1 / Yellow The yellow Rx/Tx1 LED is illuminated when receiving or transmitting
a byte at the optical channelCh1.
RxTx2 / Yellow The yellow Rx/Tx2 LED is illuminated when receiving or transmitting
Rx/Tx3/Yellow The yellow Rx/Tx3 LED is illuminated when receiving or transmitting
DUAL/Yellow The yellow DUAL LED is illuminated when CI872 is run in redundant
configuration and a working partnership between the two CI872s is
established.
Technical Data
Table 113. MOD5 Interface CI872 - Technical Specification
Item Value
Type Fiber optic connection.
Protocol MOD5-to-MOD5.
Communication speed Full duplex at a speed of 500 Kbps.
3BSE036351-600 369
CI872 and TP858 - MOD5 Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
Table 113. MOD5 Interface CI872 - Technical Specification (Continued)

Three traffic indicators RxTx1, RxTx2 and RxTx3 -
controlled by traffic pace: Flashing Yellow.
Connectors Wavelength: 820 nm.
Fiber size: 62.5/125 m multimode glass fiber.
Connector type: ST - non threaded.
Max nominal fiber damping including connectors: 11 dB.
Current consumption Max 124 mA.
(from CEX-bus 24VDC)
Power dissipation Max 3.0 W.
Weight 500 g (700 g with package).
Dimensions W 59 x H 185 x D 127.5 mm.
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in).
370 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI873 and TP867 - EtherNet/IP Interface
CI873 and TP867 - EtherNet/IP Interface
Key Features
CEX-Bus Module.
MPC862P 96MHz.
32 Mbps SDRAM with integrity check.
4 Mbps Flash PROM.
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3u supporting full Fast
Ethernet 10/100Mbps operation.
Supports EtherNet/IP protocol.
10/100 Mbps use IEEE standard Media
Independent Interface (MII)
Description
The CI873 can be used to connect an AC 800M
controller to external Ethernet devices using the
EtherNet/IP protocol.
connectors. For CI873, only the CH1 connector that
supports 10 Mbps/100 Mbps is used.The baseplate has
a code lock which prevents the installation of an
incorrect unit type onto the TP867 Baseplate.
DC/DC converter that supplies appropriate voltages from the +24 V supply through
the CEX-Bus. The Ethernet cable must be connected to the main network through
an Ethernet Switch.
3BSE036351-600 371
CI873 and TP867 - EtherNet/IP Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
372 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units CI873 and TP867 - EtherNet/IP Interface
Indicators
There are six LED indicators on the front panel of CI873 that indicate the various
states and conditions on the CI873.
Table 114. EtherNet/IP Interface CI873 - LED indicators
F(ault) / Red The red F(ault) LED indicates a fault condition on
CI873. Reset turns the LED ON. Software can turn it
On and OFF through a register in the CEX-Bus
controller.
operational. Reset turns the LED OFF. Software can
turn the LED ON and OFF through a register in the
CEX-Bus controller.
RxTx1 / Yellow The yellow Rx/Tx1 LED is intended to be ON to
indicate a receiving/transmitting telegram at CH1.
The LED is controlled by Ethernet PHY. It is turned
OFF by reset.
RxTx2 / Yellow The yellow Rx/Tx2 LED (LED will always be switched
OFF) is intended to be ON to indicate a
receiving/transmitting telegram at CH2 (The channel
is disabled). The LED is controlled by Ethernet PHY.
It is turned OFF by reset.
PRIM(ary) This LED is ON if this CI873 acts as the primary in a
DUAL The yellow DUAL LED is ON when both CI873s in a
redundant pair are synchronized. The LED is
controlled by software. It is turned OFF by reset.
3BSE036351-600 373
CI873 and TP867 - EtherNet/IP Interface Appendix A Hardware Units
Technical Data
Table 115. EtherNet/IP Interface CI873 - Technical Specification
Item Value
Type Ethernet unit.
Protocol EtherNet/IP.
Communication speed CH1 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps defined in IEEE 802.3u 10/100 Base-Tx.
Two traffic indicators RxTx1 and RxTx2(LED will always be
switched off) -- controlled by traffic pace: Flashing Yellow
Connectors RJ45.
Current consumption (from CEX- 160 mA typical (250 mA max).
Bus 24VDC)
Power dissipation 3.8W typical (6W max).
Protection rating IP20 according to EN60529, IEC 529.
Weight 500 g (700g with package) (package CI873K01with
CI873 and TP867).
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 in).
374 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units Power Supply Units Types SD821, SD822 and SD823
Power Supply Units Types SD821, SD822 and SD823
Key Features
Class I Equipment (when connected to Protective Ground, (PE))
Overvoltage Category III for connection to primary main TN network of
Installation Category III
Protective separation of secondary circuit from primary circuit
Secondary outputs;
SD823 = 24 Volts DC regulated @ 10 A
SD821 = 24 Volts DC regulated @ 2.5 A
Accepted for SELV and PELV applications
Switch for selection of 115 or 230 V AC
Safety Classification
The Power Supply Units (PSU) are designed to meet all applicable electrical safety
data in accordance with EN 50178 harmonized European Standard Publication, and
the additional safety and function data required by EN 61131-2 and UL 508.
The secondary output circuitry is accepted for SELV or PELV applications.
SELV according to EN 50178, EN 60950 and VDE 0100 Part 410.
For PELV applications; in accordance with EN 50178.
Protection Rating
IP20 according to EN 60529, IEC 529
Protective Class I according to EN 50718; 3.56
3BSE036351-600 375
Power Supply Units Types SD821, SD822 and SD823 Appendix A Hardware Units
110 mm (4.3 in)

50 mm (2.0 in) 103 mm (4.1 in)
97 mm (3.8 in)
L+ L+ L L
OK
(4.9 in)
125 mm
(1.7 in)
44 mm
SD821
N L PE
230
Mains Voltage
Selection Switch
(115 / 230)
Figure 94. SD821 Connections for 2.5 A Power Supply
376 3BSE036351-600
110 mm (4.3 in)
65 mm (2.6 in) 103 mm (4.1 in)

97 mm (3.8 in)
L+ L+ L L
OK
(4.9 in)
125 mm
(1.7 in)
44 mm
SD822
N L PE
230 Mains Voltage

Selection Switch
(115 / 230)
Figure 95. SD822 Connections for 5 A Power Supply
3BSE036351-600 377
110 mm (4.3 in)

120 mm (4.7 in) 103 mm (4.1 in)
97 mm (3.8 in)
(4.9 in)
125 mm
115V
230V
(1.7 in)
SD823 44 mm
N L PE L+ L+ L L
OK
Power Supply Units Types SD821/822/823 Description

ABB recommends the use of these robust and reliable power supply units (PSUs)
for providing power to the AC 800M Controller when connected to an industrial
mains network of installation category III. All three PSUs can be used for both non-
redundant and redundant applications.
The three PSUs were designed as switch mode power converters, converting AC
mains supply voltage to a regulated 24V DC output. Rated output capacity:
SD821 = 24 Volts DC regulated @ 2.5 A
The mains input voltage is set to either 115 or 230 V by means of a switch mounted
on the face of the unit. The factory default position for this switch is 230 V.
378 3BSE036351-600
The output voltage of all three PSUs is a regulated, low noise, 24 V DC. A green
LED on the PSU front panel indicates that the output circuit is providing the correct
output voltage level. The double connectors provided on the 24 V DC output
terminals allow for connecting more than one piece of equipment.
A surge current limiter within the PSU circuit provides a soft-start feature.
Consequently the controlled power-on of a PSU will not trip fuses or ground-fault
circuit breakers. In addition, the normal disturbances that occur within an industrial
main network will not result in transient fault conditions or tripping.
This results in the surge current limiter effectively reducing the peak inrush current
caused by a power disruption, to a level the PSU can tolerate.
This soft-start, surge current limiter facility simplifies designing the system power
distribution circuits.
X1 X2
L Fuse
L+
L+
N
L
PE Chopper
Figure 97. PSUs SD821, 822 and 823 Block Diagram
Insulation of Power Supply Units (PSU)

Basic with protective conductor; primary circuit separated from all other live
circuits by reinforced insulation.
Rated insulation voltage, Primary to Secondary 300 V AC.
3BSE036351-600 379
Dielectric test voltage 3000 V AC (EN 60950).
Fuses and Protective Devices

Internal primary main fuses are arranged to meet the requirements of electrical
safety publications for connection to the Phase Neutral terminals of the primary
main network; TN network, 1 (one) fuse. Recommended primary external fuse:
Micro Circuit Breaker (MCB) 10 Amperes, characteristic B.
Table 116. Power Supply Units Fuses and Protective Devices
Fuse SD821 SD822 SD823

Primary: Internal fuse 3.15 AT 4 AT 6.3 AT
Primary: Recommended external fuse (1) 10 A (1) 10 A (1) 10 A (1)
Secondary: Short circuit <5 A <10 A <20 A
Secondary: Over-load protection 3 A> I 6 A< I 12 A< I
I <5 A I< 10 A I<20 A
Secondary: Over-Voltage protection 32 V typ 29 V typ 35 V typ
(1) Microcircuit Breaker (MCB), Characteristic B
380 3BSE036351-600
Technical Data
Table 117. PSUs SD821, 822 and 823 Technical Data
SD821 SD822 SD823

Parameter
Converter Converter Converter
Rated output current (A) 2.5 A 5A 10 A
Rated output power 60 W 120 W 240 W
Rated output voltage 24 V 24 V 24 V
Rated input power 160 VA 280 VA 690 VA
70 W 135 W 265 W
Mains/input voltage, nominal 115/230 V AC 115/230 V AC 115/230 V AC
Mains voltage variation allowed a.c. 85110% 85110% 85110%
(recommended operating condition)
Mains frequency a.c. (recommended operating 4565 Hz 4565 Hz 4565 Hz
condition)
Absolute maximum supply voltage (short term), 138/275 V AC 138/275 V AC 138/275 V AC
max. a.c. 375 V DC 375 V DC 375 V DC
Surge; Primary peak current at power on 25 A 15 A 30 A
Power Factor (at rated output power) 0.47 typ 0.5 typ 0.5 typ
Heat dissipation 8.6 W 13.3 W 26.7 W
Efficiency factor 87% typ 90% typ 90% typ
Output voltage regulation at max. current 2% 2% 2%
Ripple (peak to peak) 25 mV 25 mV 30 mV
Secondary voltage holdup time at mains blackout >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms
Maximum output current 5A 10 A 20 A
3BSE036351-600 381
Power Supply Units - Types SD831, SD832, SD833, and SD834 Appendix A Hardware Units
Table 118. PSUs SD821, 822 and 823 Mounting Dimensions
SD821 SD822 SD823

Parameter
Converter Converter Converter
Dimensions, Width 50 mm (2.0 in) 65 mm (2.6 in) 120 mm (4.7 in)
HxD = 125 x 110
mm (4.9 x 4.3)
Mounting spacing 10 mm (0.4 in) 15 mm (0.6 in) 15 mm (0.6 in)
W mm
Mounting spacing 25 mm (1.0 in) 25 mm (1.0 in) 25 mm (1.0 in)
H mm
Weight (lbs) 600 g (1.3 lb) 700 g (1.5 lb) 1100 g (2.4 lb)
Power Supply Units - Types SD831, SD832, SD833, and

SD834
Key Features
Class I Equipment, (when connected to Protective Earth, (PE)).
Over-voltage Category III for connection to primary main TN network of
Installation Category III.
Protective separation of secondary circuit from primary circuit.
Accepted for SELV and PELV applications.
The output of the units is protected against over current (current limit) and over
voltage (OVP).
SD834 can be connected in parallel to increase output power.
Both a.c. and d.c. input at SD831 and SD834.
Floating DC-OK relay contact at SD834.
382 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units Power Supply Units - Types SD831, SD832, SD833, and SD834
Equipment Class
The Power Supply Units, (PSU), are designed to meet all the applicable electrical
safety data stated by the EN 50178 harmonized European Standard Publication and
the additional safety and function data required by EN 61131-2 and UL 508.
The secondary output circuitry is accepted for SELV or PELV applications.
SELV according to EN 50178, EN 60950 and VDE 0100 Part 410.
For PELV applications; in accordance with EN 50178.
UL 508, listed E 198865.
Ingress Protection
IP20 according to EN 60529, IEC 60529
Protective Class I according to EN 50718; 3.56
3BSE036351-600 383
Dimensions and Connections
Figure 98. SD831 Dimension and Connections for 3 A Power Supply
Figure 99. SD832 Dimensions and Connections for 5 A Power Supply
384 3BSE036351-600
3BSE036351-600 385
Power Supply Units Types SD831 / 832 / 833 / 834- Description

ABB recommend the use of robust and reliable power supply units, (PSUs), for
providing power to the AC800 and S800I/O system, when connected to an
industrial mains network of installation category III. PSUs can be used for both non-
redundant and redundant applications.
The four PSUs are designed as switch mode power converters. They converting a.c.
or d.c. mains supply voltage to a regulated d.c. 24 V output. The four PSUs have
data as follows:
Output d.c. 24 Volts regulated @ 3 A.
SD832 = Input a.c. 100-120 or 200-240 V.
SD833 = Input a.c. 100-120 or 200-240 V.
The output voltage of the four PSUs is, as stated, a regulated, low noise, d.c. 24 V. A
LED, mounted on the PSU front panel indicates that the output voltage is within
range.
The PCSs provide a soft start feature. The controlled power-on of a PSU therefore,
will not trip fuses or earth-fault circuit breakers. In addition, the normal
disturbances that occur within an industrial main network will not cause any
transient fault conditions or trips to occur.
386 3BSE036351-600
Figure 102. Functional Diagram SD831 for a 3 A Power Supply
3BSE036351-600 387
Figure 103. Functional Diagram SD832/SD833 for a 5 A/ 10 A Power Supply
388 3BSE036351-600
Figure 104. Functional Diagram SD834 for a 20 A Power Supply
Dielectric strength
Basic with protective conductor. The primary circuit is separated from all other live
circuits by reinforced insulation.
3BSE036351-600 389
Table 119. Dielectric Strength
A B C
Dielectric test a.c. 2500V a.c. 3000V a.c. 500V
voltage
Field test a.c. 2000V a.c. 2000V a.c. 500V
Rules for Field test:
Use appropriate test equipment which applies the voltage with a
slow ramp. Connect L and N together as well as all output poles.
DC-OK relay contact (SD834 only)

This feature monitors the output voltage, which is produced by the power supply
itself. It is independent of a backfed voltage from a unit that is connected in parallel
to the power supply output.
Short dips will be extended to a signal length of 250ms. Dips shorter than 1ms will
be ignored.
Contact closes: for output voltage > 90% of the adjusted output voltage.
Contact opens: for output voltage dips > 10% below the adjusted output voltage.
Contact ratings: max 60Vdc 0.3A, 30Vdc 1A, 30Vac 0.5A resistive load
Min. >1mA, >5 V over open contact.
Isolation voltage:Field test: a.c. 2000 V to input. a.c. 500 V to output.
390 3BSE036351-600
SD834 in parallel to increase output power
Table 120. SD834 Schematic and Instructions for parallel use.
Schematic for parallel operation Instructions for parallel use

a) Only SD834 can be used in parallel connection.
b) Adjust the output voltages of all power supplies to
approximately the same value (500mV). Otherwise,
the DC-OK signal might not work properly.
c) A fuse (or diode) on the output is only required if
more than three units are connected in parallel.
d) Do not continuously load the terminals with more
than 25A. Keep an installation clearance of 15mm
(left/right) between two power supplies and avoid
installing the power supplies on top of each other.
Fuses and Protective Devices

Recommended primary external fuse:
Table 121. Power Supply Units - Fuses and Protective Devices Power Supply Units Types SD83x
Fuse SD831 SD832 SD833 SD834
Primary: Recommended external fuse (1) min/max 10 - 20A 10 - 20A 10 - 20A 10 - 20A
(2)
Primary: Recommended external fuse min/max 6 - 20A 6 - 20A 6 - 20A 10 - 20A
Secondary: Short circuit <8 A <14 A <18 A <40 A
Secondary: Over-Voltage protection <39 V <39 V <39 V <37 V
(1) Microcircuit Breaker (MCB), Characteristic B or a delayed action fuse.
(2) Microcircuit Breaker (MCB), Characteristic C
3BSE036351-600 391
Technical Data
Table 122. Technical Data PSUs SD831, 832, 833 and 834
SD831 SD832 SD833 SD834
Parameter
Rated output current (A) 3A 5A 10 A 20 A
Rated power output 72 W 120 W 240 W 480 W
Rated output voltage d.c. 24 V d.c. 24 V d.c. 24 V d.c. 24 V
Rated input power 134/143 VA 240/283 VA 447/514 VA 547/568 VA
a.c. 120/230 V 82/80 W 134/133 W 264/262 W 519/511 W
Mains/input voltage, a.c. 100-240 V a.c. 100-120 V a.c. 100-120 V a.c. 100-240 V
nominal. a.c. 47-63Hz d.c. 110-300 V a.c. 200-240 V a.c. 200-240 V d.c. 110-300 V
Auto-select Auto-select
input input
Mains voltage variation a.c. 90-264 V a.c. 90-132 V a.c. 90-132 V a.c. 85-276 V
allowed d.c. 88-375 V a.c. 180-264 V a.c. 180-264 V d.c. 88-375 V
Max input voltage <0.5s a.c. 264-300 V a.c. 264-300 V a.c. 264-300 V a.c. 276-300 V
Primary peak current at <28/<54 A <10 A <10 A <13 A
power on at a.c.120/230V
Power Factor (at rated 0.61/0.56 0.56/0.47 0.59/0.51 0.95/0.90
output power)
a.c. 120/230V typ
Heat dissipation 10/8 W 14/13 W 24/22 W 39.6/31.4 W
a.c. 120/230 V
Efficiency factor 88/89.8% 89.4/90.2% 91/91.6% 92.4/93.9%
a.c. 120/230 V typ
Line/load regulation < 50 mV /< < 70 mV /< < 70 mV /< 100 < 10mV /< 100mV
100 mV 100 mV mV
Ripple (peak to peak) < 50 mV < 50 mV < 50 mV < 100mV
Holdup time at mains 29/120 ms 80/78 ms 46/47 ms 32/51 ms
blackout a.c. 120/230 V
typ
392 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units SS822/SS823/SS832 Voting Unit (for Redundant Power Supply)
Table 122. Technical Data PSUs SD831, 832, 833 and 834 (Continued)
SD831 SD832 SD833 SD834
Parameter
Maximum output current 3.3 A 6A 12 A 30 A < 4 s
At ambient At ambient
temp < 45 oC temp < 45 oC
Maximum ambient 55 oC 55 oC 55 oC 55 oC
temperature(1)
Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.5 6 mm2
Power connection Stranded wire: 0.5 4 mm2, 20 10 AWG
terminals
Recommended torque: 0.8 Nm
Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.3 - 4 mm2
DC-OK-signal terminals Stranded wire:
0.3 - 2.5 mm2,
26 - 12 AWG
(1) Mounting on a horizontal DIN rail.
SS822/SS823/SS832 Voting Unit (for Redundant Power

Supply)
The Voting Unit has been specifically designed to be employed as a control unit
within a redundant power supply configuration. The output connections from two
Power Supply Units, (PSUs), are connected to the Voting Unit.
The Voting Unit separates the redundant PSUs, supervises the voltage supplied,
and generates supervision signals to be connected to the computer system. Green
LEDs, mounted on the front panel of the voting unit, provide a visual indication
that the correct output voltage is being delivered. Simultaneously with the green
LED illuminating, a voltage free contact closes the path to the corresponding OK
connector. Voting Unit trip levels, are factory preset. Three different types of
voting units are available:
SS822 up to 20 A.
SS823 up to 20 A, with over voltage protections and enlarge diagnostics.
3BSE036351-600 393
SS822/SS823/SS832 Voting Unit (for Redundant Power Supply) Appendix A Hardware Units
SS832 up to 10A.
See Table 123 for the selection of voting unit based on the type of power supply.
Table 123. Selection of Voting Unit
SS822 SS832 SS823

SD831 (x1) x1 x2
SD832 (x1) x1 x2
SD833 (x1) x2 x2
SD834 (x2) x2 x2
(x#) not preferred solution, x2 it needs two in parallel.
SS822
For SS822 Block diagram and Dimensions see Figure 105 and Figure 106.
Table 124 and Table 125 shows the supervision data and the technical data
respectively. For connection of SS822 in a redundant configuration see Figure 107.
394 3BSE036351-600
X1 X2
A+ OK
B+ + A
L+ A+
L+ OK
+ B
B+
L-
Figure 105. SS822 Block Diagram
3BSE036351-600 395
110
50 103
97
OK+ F OK+ F
A B
125
SS822
44
A+B+L+L+L-
Figure 106. SS822 Voting Unit Connections
Table 124. SS822 Voting Unit - Supervision Data
Supervision Data SS822(1)

Voltage, low trip level (for decreasing 22 V
voltage)
Voltage, low trip hysteresis 0.7 V
Voltage, high trip level for rising voltage 30 V
High trip hysteresis 0.7 V
Contact rating a.c. Max. 120 V and max. 0.5 A
Contact rating d.c. Max. 28 V and max. 1 A;
min. 1 mA, recommended min. 5 mA
(1) SS822Z is G3 compliant version according to ISA-S71.04.
396 3BSE036351-600
Table 125. SS822 - Technical Data and Mounting Dimensions
Parameter SS822 Voter

Rated output current (A) 20 A
Rated output voltage 35 V
Rated input power 500 W
Mains/input voltage, nominal 2 x 24 V d.c.
Rated/input voltage 35 V d.c.
Heat dissipation 10 W at 20 A and 2,5 W at 5 A
Output voltage regulation at max. 0,5 V lower than input
current
Maximum output current 35 A (Overload)
Ingress Protection IP20 according to EN60529, IEC 60529.
Max ambient temperature 55oC(1)
Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.5 - 6 mm2
Input/output terminals Stranded: 0.5 - 4mm2, 20 - 10 AWG
Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 1.5 mm2
Supervision output terminals Stranded: 0.2 - 1.5 mm2, 22 - 14 AWG
Dimensions, Width 50 mm (1.97)
HxD = 125 x 110 mm
(4.9 x 4.3 inches)
Mounting spacing W mm 10 mm (0.39)
Mounting spacing H mm 25 mm (0.98)
Weight (lbs.) 630 g (1.4 lbs.)
(1) Mounting on a horizontal DIN rail
3BSE036351-600 397
SA Supervision
signals to
SB CI8X0/TB8X0
L+ L+ L- L- L+ L+ L- L- OK+ F OK + F
OK OK A B
SD821 SD821 SS822

N L PE N L PE A+ B+ L+ L+ L-
L+
+24V
Mains
Input
L-
Protective Earth 0V
Figure 107. SS822 - Used in Redundant SD821 Configuration
SS823
The SS823 Voting Unit has double overvoltage protection circuit on both inputs. It
is also able to detect both short and open circuit in the voting element. For details
see Table 126.
Two SS823 can never be configured in parallel to achieve more current.
Block diagram and dimensions for SS823 see Figure 108 and Figure 109. Table 126
and Table 127 shows supervision data and technical data for SS823. For connection
of SS823 in a redundant configuration see Figure 110.
398 3BSE036351-600
3BSE036351-600 399
Figure 109. SS823 Power Voter Unit Connections
Table 126. SS823 Power Voter Unit - Supervision Data
Supervision Data SS823

Voltage, low trip level (for decreasing 22 V
voltage)
Voltage, high trip level for rising voltage 30 V
Contact rating a.c. Max. 120 V and max. 0.5 A
Contact rating d.c. Max. 28 V and max. 1 A;
min. 1 mA, recommended min. 5 mA
400 3BSE036351-600
Table 127. SS823 - Technical Data and Mounting Dimensions

Rated output current (A) 20 A
Rated output voltage 24 V
Rated input power 500 W
Mains/input voltage, nominal 24 V d.c.
Mains/input voltage, max 30 V d.c.(1)
Dual level OVP (Overvoltage Trip 32.0 V nominal
protection) Return 31.5 V nominal
Heat dissipation 24 W max
Output voltage regulation at max. 1.2 V lower than input
current
Maximum output current Static 35 A typical, dynamic 150 A for 100 s
typical
Acceptable wire sizes 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG
Connector X1 and OK+F Recommended torque: 0.5 - 0.6 Nm
Acceptable wire sizes 0.2 - 6 mm2, 24 - 10 AWG
Connector A+, L+, L- Recommended torque: 0.7 - 0.8 Nm
Mounting spacing W mm 15 mm (0.59)
Mounting spacing H mm 25 mm (0.98)
Width 140 mm (5.51)
Depth 144 mm (5.67
Height 174 mm (6.85)
Weight 800 g (1.8 lbs.)
(1) Electronically limited by OVP, voltage between 32 V and 60 V will result in 0 V output
3BSE036351-600 401
SA
SB
From Mains L+
Breaker L-
From Mains
Breaker
Figure 110. SS823 - Used in Redundant SD821 Configuration
402 3BSE036351-600
SS832
SS832 is can be used directly for load up to 10 A and for loads up to 20 A two
SS832 modules must be used. See Figure 112 and Figure 113.
For Block diagram and connections of SS832 see Figure 111 and Figure 114.
Table 128 and Table 129 shows supervision data and technical data respectively.
Figure 115 shows connection of SS832 in redundant configuration with maximum
10 A load, see Figure 116 for load up to 20 A.
Alarm Input 1
Input Alarm
Input 1 Voltage Relay
ok contact
Monitor
VIN 1
+ + VOUT
- -
Chassis
Ground
VIN 2
+
-
Input
Input 2 Voltage Input 2
ok Alarm Alarm
Monitor Relay contact
AC AC
DC DC
IN 1 IN 2
OUT
-
+
Load
Figure 112. SS832 up to 10 A
3BSE036351-600 403
AC AC
DC DC
IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2
OUT OUT
-
+ Load
Figure 113. SS832 up to 20 A
404 3BSE036351-600
Figure 114. SS832 Voting Unit Dimensions and Connections
Table 128. SS832 Voting Unit - Supervision Data

Voltage, low trip level (for decreasing 21.5 +- 0.5V
voltage)
3BSE036351-600 405
Table 128. SS832 Voting Unit - Supervision Data (Continued)

Contact rating a.c. Max. 30 V and max. 0.5 A, resistive load
Contact rating d.c. Max. 60 V and max 0.3 A, 30 V max 0.5
A
resistive load
min. 1 mA at 5 V d.c.
Acceptable wire sizes 0.2 -1.5 mm2, 22 - 14 AWG
Table 129. Technical Data and Mounting Dimensions

Input current 10A per input
Rated output current 20 A
Mains/input voltage, nominal 2 x 24 V d.c.
Rated/input voltage 60 V d.c.
Heat dissipation 8.9 W at 10 A and 4.6 W at 5 A
Input to output voltage drop at max. 0,85 V
current
Maximum output current 25 A (Overload)
Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.5 - 6 mm2, 20 - 10 AWG
Stranded: 0.5 - 4 mm2, 20 - 10 AWG
406 3BSE036351-600
Table 129. Technical Data and Mounting Dimensions (Continued)

Dimensions
Width 32 mm (1.26)
Depth 117 mm (4.6")
Height 124 mm (4.9")
Mounting spacing W 5 mm (0.2"), In case the adjacent device
is a heat source 15 mm (0.59")
Mounting spacing H 40 mm (1.57") on the top, 20 mm (0.79")
on the bottom
Weight 350 g (0.77 lbs.)
3BSE036351-600 407
408 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units TC562 Modem Unit (Westermo MD-12DC)
TC562 Modem Unit (Westermo MD-12DC)
TC
Figure 117. TC562 (MD-12DC) Modem
Description
The TC562 Short Distance Modem unit can be used both for point-to-point
communication and for communication over a distance between pieces of
equipment or units, for example a computer and printer or a robotic device. ABB
recommends their use when the distance between units/equipment exceeds 15 m.
For further details refer to the manufacturer's documentation (Westermo).
Using a modem allows distances between pieces of equipment to be as much as
18000 m, and, depending on the distance, can provide a data transmission speed of
up to 38400 bit/s. The modems are manufactured for simple mounting onto a
standard 35 mm DIN-rail.
Transfer between modems takes place along two twisted pair cables, one at full or
half duplex and the other at simplex. The transfer distance is fully dependent on
cable resistance and capacitance. ABB recommends a minimum cable gauge of
0.2 mm2 with a capacitance of 40-80 pF/m within an industrial environment.
For an office environment, ABB recommends a minimum cable of 0.14 mm, and a
capacitance of 40-100 pF/m. Use a shielded cable in a heavy industrial environment
and an unshielded cable in an office environment. A shielded cable is often given a
higher capacitance and will therefore provide a higher data transmission speed.
3BSE036351-600 409
TC562 Modem Unit (Westermo MD-12DC) Appendix A Hardware Units
Technical Data
Table 130. TC562 Technical Data
TC562 Short Distance Modem

Type
Manufacturer Westermo MD-12DC
Transfer Asynchronous, full/half duplex/simplex
Power Supply 24 V DC (Min. 12 V DC Max 36 V DC)
Power Consumption 3W
Dimensions 55 x 100 x 128 mm (2.2 x 3.9 x 5.0 in.)
Weight 400 g (0.9 lb)
Table 131. Transfer Distance (Cable 0.3 mm2/42 pF/m)
Meters (yd.) bit/s

1000 ( 1094) 19200
2500 ( 2734) 9600
5000 ( 5468) 4800
8000 ( 8749) 2400
12000 (13123) 1200
18000 (19685) 600
410 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units SB821 External Battery AC 800M Memory Back-up
SB821 External Battery AC 800M Memory Back-up
Description
The SB821 battery unit is used
as an external power supply to
provide extended memory back-
up for the AC 800M Controller.
The unit is DIN-rail mounted
and provided with a separate
connecting cable (TK821V020),
2 m (2.2 yd.) in length.
SB821
SB821 3.6V Lithium Battery Unit

Note the warning
! text on the battery.
X1
B B+ SH
3BSE036351-600 411
SB821 External Battery AC 800M Memory Back-up Appendix A Hardware Units
Technical Data
Table 132. SB821 External battery data
Item Value
Battery Type Low rate lithium,
3.6 V, 16 Ah
Size ANSI size D
IEC size R20
Lithium content 5.6 g (0.18 oz.)
Back-up-time See data for the PM8xx unit
Dimensions W 85.6 x D 51 x H 136 mm
(3.4 x 2 x 5.4 in)
Weight 600 g (1.3 lb) (package with SB821,battery and
TK821V020)
412 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units SB822 Rechargeable External Battery AC 800M Memory Back-up
SB822 Rechargeable External Battery AC 800M Memory

Back-up
Description
The SB822 battery unit is used
as an
external power supply to
provide
extended memory back-up for
the
AC 800M Controller. The unit is
DIN-rail mounted and provided
with
a separate connecting cable
(TK821V020) 2 m (2.2 yd.) in
length.
3BSE036351-600 413
SB822 Rechargeable External Battery AC 800M Memory Back-up Appendix A Hardware Units
Technical Data
Table 133. SB822 Rechargeable External battery data
Item Value
Battery type Rechargeable Lithium-Ion
3.75V 2.3 Ah
Battery size Prismatic 14.5x43x50 mm
Lithium equivalent content 0.8g
Back-up-time See data for the PM8xx unit
Dimensions W 85.6 x D 51 x H 136 mm
(3.4 x 2 x 4.4 in)
Weight 600 g (1.3 lb) (package with SB822,battery and
TK821V020)
Protection Rating IP20 according to EN60529
When using the SB822 external battery unit, remove the internal battery from the
processor unit as status monitoring is only provided for one battery.
414 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units DIN-Rail TS 35/7.5
DIN-Rail TS 35/7.5
The figure below shows the profile and dimensions in mm (in.) of the DIN-rail TS
35/7.5.
Normal supplied length is 2 m (6.6 ft.) (to standard DIN 46 277, EN 50 022).
7.5
(0.3)
7.5
(0.3)
27 6 35
(1.1) (0.2) (1.4)
15 10
(0.6) (0.4)
Figure 118. DIN-rail TS 35/7.5 Dimensions
3BSE036351-600 415
Miscellaneous Equipment Appendix A Hardware Units
Miscellaneous Equipment
TB850 Terminator for CEX-Bus (Male)
Terminator
TB850
Figure 119. TB850 Terminator for CEX (male)
416 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units TB850 Terminator for CEX-Bus (Male)
PM861A/PM862/PM864A/
BC810 PM865/PM866/PM867
Terminator
TB850
RCU Link
Cables
Terminator
TB850
BC810 PM861A/PM862/PM864A/
PM865/PM866/PM867
Figure 120. CEX-Bus Terminator when using Redundant Communication Interface

Units (with BC810) and Controllers
3BSE036351-600 417
TB851 Terminator for CEX-Bus (Female) Appendix A Hardware Units
TB851 Terminator for CEX-Bus (Female)

A TB851 (female) Terminator for CEX-Bus is required when a TK850 extension
cable is used.
TK850 Cable
Terminator
TB851
Figure 121. TB851 Terminator for CEX-Bus (female)
418 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units TB807 ModuleBus Terminator Plug
TB807 ModuleBus Terminator Plug

The Terminator plug must always be mounted on the last I/O unit of the
ModuleBus. If no units are used on the ModuleBus, no bus termination is required.
No ModuleBus termination is required in redundant CPU configuration.
TB852 RCU Link Terminator Plug

The TB852 RCU Link Terminator Plug is required when the PM861/PM864
processor unit operates in single configuration.
TB853 RCU Control Link Terminator Plug

The TB853 RCU Control Link Terminator Plug is required when the PM891
processor unit operates in single configuration. This is plugged to the RCU Control
port at the top of the PM891 unit.
TK850 CEX-Bus Extension Cable

A 0.7 m (2.3 ft.) extension cable, complete with connector (type DB25P-metal
housing) provides connectivity to Communication Interface units between adjacent
DIN-rails. It is always used in redundant CPU configuration for connecting the
CEX-Bus between the two processor units.
TK851 RCU Link Cable

The Redundant Control Unit Link Cable is used to transfer log data from the
Primary CPU to the Backup CPU, and to exchange status and control information
between the Primary and Backup CPUs. The RCU Link uses 68-pole connectors,
one of which is labeled UPPER. The CPU connected to this connector will be
defined as the upper CPU in the Control Builder and Operator Station.
The RCU Link Cable is also used as interconnection cable between two BC810.
3BSE036351-600 419
TK853 Appendix A Hardware Units
TK853
Technical Data
Table 134. TK853 Technical Data
Item Value
Connectors One 9-pole male D-sub (DE9P)
One 8-pole RJ45 plug
Weight 100 g (0.2 lb) (TK853V02)
Length 2.0 m (6.56) (TK853V02)
RTS 1 7 RTS
DTR 2 4 DTR
AC 800M TD 3 3 TD Modem
0V 4 50V
RJ45 plug 0V 5 Male 9-pole,
RD 6 2 RD D-sub connector (DE9P)
DCD 7 1 DCD
CTS 8 8 CTS
Shield Shield
Figure 122. TK853 Cable Characteristics
TK855 RCU Data Link Cable

The TK855 Redundant Control Unit Data Link Cable, connected between
redundant PM891 units, transfers the data required to keep the backup PM891
synchronized with the primary PM891.
420 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units TK856 RCU Control Link Cable
TK856 RCU Control Link Cable

The TK856 Redundant Control Unit Control Link Cable, connected between
redundant PM891 units, provides role selection and CPU identity assignment
(UPPER/LOWER).
TK857 RCU-Link Cable for BC820

Cable between the controller CPU and BC820.
TK212A Tool Cable
Technical Data
Table 135. TK212A Tool Cable Technical Data
Item Value
Connectors One 9-pole female D-type
One 8-pole RJ45 plug
Weight 125 g (0.3 lb)
Length 3.0 m (9.84)
3BSE036351-600 421
TK212A Tool Cable Appendix A Hardware Units
RTS 1 8 CTS
DTR 2 6 DSR
AC 800M TD 3 2 RD PC
0V 4 1 DCD
RJ45 plug 0V 5 50V Female 9-pin,
RD 6 3 TD D-type connector
DCD 7 4 DTR
CTS 8 7 RTS
Shield Shield
Figure 123. TK212A Cable Characteristics
422 3BSE036351-600
Appendix A Hardware Units Al-Profile Support For DIN-Rail
Al-Profile Support For DIN-Rail

Units comprising the AC 800M controller are mounted onto DIN-rails (type: TS
35/7.5). However, the DIN-rail itself is not rigid enough to support the units on its
own. For this reason a support is recommended, such as an A1-profile, specifically
designed for supporting DIN-rails (see Figure 124 on page 423 and Figure 125 on
page 424).
Key features of the Al-profile are:
Simple mounting.
No drilling required; profile incorporates pre-formed channels suitable for self-
tapping screws.
Provides secure mounting in locations subject to extreme vibration,
Rigid construction.
Easy-fit, press-in cable-retaining duct.
Pre-formed Al-profile
channels
DIN-rail
Cable Duct
Figure 124. Al-Profile for DIN-rail Support
3BSE036351-600 423
Al-Profile Support For DIN-Rail Appendix A Hardware Units
See detail A
215 mm
20 mm
4 mm
15 mm
30 mm
2 mm 2 mm F
F F 9 mm F F
2 mm
248.3 mm
4 x for screw ST 4.8x9.5

30.8 mm
2.5 mm
2x1.9
2x1.5
15 mm
2
Detail A
Figure 125. Al-Profile for DIN-rail - Dimension Drawing
424 3BSE036351-600
Appendix B Power Consumption
General
At an ambient temperature of 40C (104F) it is considered unnecessary to calculate
the heat dissipation requirements for a standard AC 800M Controller with S800 I/O
configuration, mounted within ABB floor-mounted or wall-mounted cabinets.
For a standard AC 800M Controller configuration housed within a floor-mounted or
wall-mounted cabinet, the recommended fuse rating for the external mains supply
is:
Table 136. AC 800M Mounted in ABB Cabinet Fuse Requirements
Fuse Rating Fuse Type

10 A Delayed-action fuse
Should the configuration be other than that stated, detailed instructions for
calculating current consumptions can be found in the following text.
The following tables present current consumption and power dissipation for all
relevant hardware units included in AC 800M Controller.
Use this information for:
Dimensioning the supply requirements of an AC 800M and S800 I/O
configuration.
Calculating cabinet-generated power loss.
The values given in the tables are typical and adapted to these applications. It is
assumed that 70% of unit channels are active simultaneously.
3BSE036351-600 425
Current Consumption and Power Dissipation Appendix B Power Consumption
Current Consumption and Power Dissipation

See Table 137 on page 426 for typical current consumption and power dissipation
data for AC 800M units.
Table 137. Current Consumption and Power Dissipation Data for AC 800M Units
Current at 24 V Power Dissipation

Unit Remarks
Typical Max Typical Max
PM851 180 mA 300 mA 4.32 W 7.2 W (1)
PM856 180 mA 300 mA 4.32 W 7.2 W (1)
PM860 180 mA 300 mA 4.32 W 7.2 W (1)
PM851A 180 mA 300 mA 4.32 W 7.2 W (1)
PM856A 180 mA 300 mA 4.32 W 7.2 W (1)
PM860A 180 mA 300 mA 4.32 W 7.2 W (1)
PM861 250 mA 430 mA 6.0 W 10.3 W (1)
PM862 210 mA 360 mA 5.1 W 8.6 W
PM861A 250 mA 430 mA 6.0 W 10.3 W (1)
PM864 287 mA 487 mA 6.9 W 11.4 W (1)
PM864A 287 mA 487 mA 6.9 W 11.4 W (1)
PM865 287 mA 487 mA 6.9 W 11.4 W (1)
PM866 210 mA 360 mA 5.1 W 8.6 W (1)
PM866A 210 mA 360 mA 5.1 W 8.6 W
PM867 210 mA 360 mA 5.1 W 8.6 W
PM891 660 mA 750 mA 15.8 W 18 W (1)
BC810 50 mA 70 mA 1.2 W 1.7 W
BC820 150 mA 200 mA 3.6 W 4.8 W (1)
SM810 160 mA 250 mA 3.8 W 6.0 W
SM811 160 mA 250 mA 3.8 W 6.0 W
426 3BSE036351-600
Appendix B Power Consumption Current Consumption and Power Dissipation
Table 137. Current Consumption and Power Dissipation Data for AC 800M Units (Continued)
Current at 24 V Power Dissipation

Unit Remarks
Typical Max Typical Max
SM812 100 mA 150 mA 2.4 W 3.6 W
CI853 100 mA 150 mA 2.4 W 3.6 W
CI854/854A 190 mA 240 mA 4.6 W 5.8 W
/CI854B
CI855 150 mA 200 mA 3.6 W 5.0 W
CI856 120 mA 200 mA 2.9 W 5.0 W
CI857 150 mA 200 mA 3.6 W 5.0 W
CI858 150 mA 200 mA 3.6 W 5.0 W
CI860 100 mA 150 mA 2.4 W 3.6 W
CI862 190 mA 200 mA 3.0 W 4.0 W
CI865 120 mA 200 mA 2.9 W 5.0 W
CI867 160 mA 250 mA 3.8 W 6.0 W
CI868 160 mA 250 mA 3.8 W 6.0 W
CI869 160 mA 200 mA 3.8 W 4.8 W
CI871 160 mA 250 mA 3.8 W 6.0 W
CI872 100 mA 130 mA 2.4 W 3.2 W
CI873 160 mA 250 mA 3.8 W 6.0 W
(1) These figures apply only to the PM8xx. For current-consumption data relating to the CEX-Bus and the
ModuleBus units, see Table 138 on page 428. Due to transfer or conversion losses in the CPU when current
supply to ModuleBus and CEX-Bus is utilized, the CPU power dissipation increases by maximum 5 W (3 W
for PM851/PM851A) in addition to the values given in Table 137 on page 426.
The CPU supplies current, via TP830, to units on the CEX-Bus and ModuleBus,
see Table 138 on page 428.
3BSE036351-600 427
Table 138. CPU Current Supply to CEX-Bus and ModuleBus
Bus +5 V +24 V
ModuleBus(1) max. 1.5 A (2) max. 1.0 A
CEX-Bus Not Applicable max. 2.4 A
(1) Not for PM891
(2) Corresponds to additional 0.5 A on +24 V.
Maximum current of the +24 V supplied to the CPU (incl. ModuleBus and CEX-
Bus) is shown in Table 139 on page 428:
Table 139. Maximum Current Supply to CPU incl. ModuleBus and CEX-Bus (24 V)
CPU Maximum Supply Current

PM851 2.2 A
PM856 4.2 A
PM860 4.2 A
PM851A 2.2 A
PM856A 4.2 A
PM860A 4.2 A
PM861 (single) 4.3 A
PM861 (redundant pair) 3.3 A (no ModuleBus)
PM861A 4.3 A
PM862 (redundant pair) 3.2 A
PM864A 4.4 A
428 3BSE036351-600
Appendix B Power Consumption Current Consumption and Power Dissipation
Table 139. Maximum Current Supply to CPU incl. ModuleBus and CEX-Bus (24 V) (Continued)
CPU Maximum Supply Current

PM866A (single) 4.2 A
PM866A (redundant 3.2 A (no ModuleBus)
pair)
PM867 (redundant pair) 3.2 A
PM891(single) 3.2 A (no ModuleBus)
3BSE036351-600 429
Calculations
1. Calculate the current requirements for each bus (ModuleBus and CEX-Bus).
Be sure not to exceed the limits given in Table 138 on page 428. Data relating
to TB820, TB840, CI801 and CI840 is accessible from the S800 I/O
documentation.
2. Calculate the current consumption at 24 V, for each electrical ModuleBus, by
adding:
Im = I (24 V) + I (5 V) x 0.3
3. To calculate the requirement for a specific power supply unit, total the results
of the 24V current consumption calculations, as follows:
Itot = Im1 + Im2 + .... + Iunits Table 137 + ICI801s + ICI840s + ITB820s + ITB840s
If redundant CPUs are used, current for both CPUs must be included.
430 3BSE036351-600
Appendix C Recommended Components
Recommended Components
All recommended components listed below were successfully utilized during
exhaustive tests made by ABB, prior to launching the AC 800M Controller.
Table 140. Recommended Components PROFIBUS DP
Component Description
PROFIBUS DP Due to the large selection of commercially available
equipment manufactured to PROFIBUS DP Standard, there
is no recommendation for specific PROFIBUS DP
components.
For further details refer to PROFIBUS DP Web Site.
3BSE036351-600 431
Recommended Components Appendix C Recommended Components
Table 140. Recommended Components PROFIBUS DP (Continued)
PROFIBUS DP/PA LD 800P performs the following tasks:
Linking Device Potential separation between the PROFIBUS DP and
(LD 800P) the PROFIBUS PA
Conversion of the RS 485 physical arrangement of the
PROFIBUS DP to the physical arrangement based on
IEC 61158-2 of the PROFIBUS PA.
Adapting the PROFIBUS DP transfer rate to the
PROFIBUS PA transfer rate of 31.25 kBd.
Power supply of PROFIBUS PA stations over the bus
line.
Diagnostics via LEDs.
Ensuring intrinsic safety if the PL 890 power link
module with an intrinsically safe interface is used.
A PROFIBUS DP master (class 1 master), which organizes
the exchange of process data, is contained in the controller
(PLC/PCS). Moreover, a configuration tool, usually a PC,
can be connected as class 2 master to the PROFIBUS DP.
Parameterization and configuration of the bus elements
usually takes place by means of this configuration tool -
even during operation. This is performed using the acyclic
channel of the PROFIBUS DP or PROFIBUS PA. LD 800P
supports both cyclic as well as acyclic PROFIBUS
communication.
432 3BSE036351-600
Appendix C Recommended Components Recommended Components
Table 140. Recommended Components PROFIBUS DP (Continued)
PROFIBUS DP/PA The way in which LD 800P works is essentially transparent.
Linking Device This means that PROFIBUS DP masters have direct access
(LD 800P) to PROFIBUS PA slaves. This offers the following
(cont.) advantages:
No configuration of the Linking Device is required
PROFIBUS PA slaves can be treated like PROFIBUS
DP slaves
There is no PROFIBUS DP address setting on the
Linking Device
Because of this, there is no restriction on the amount of
data to 244 bytes of I/O data per PROFIBUS PA
segment for the PROFIBUS PA.
See Figure 126 on page 434 for LD 800P Interface. For
more information see fieldbus documentation.
3BSE036351-600 433
Connection Connection
PROFIBUS PA PROFIBUS PA
Connection Connection Segment Segment
PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP non-intrinsically intrinsically safe
redundant (optional) safe
Head station Power Link Module Power Link Module

HS 840 PL 810 PL 890
Figure 126. LD 800P Interface
434 3BSE036351-600
Table 141. Recommended components - PROFINET IO
MNS iS MNS iS is a motor control center solution that can be
used in PROFINET IO network. MNS iS delivers all
the functions for control, protection and monitoring of
motors and motor starters using software and
hardware modules for the specific tasks. MLink, one
of the interface modules in MNS iS, serves as the
serial gateway interface to higher level systems which
communicate to all modules through PROFINET IO.
Table 142. Recommended components - EtherNet/IP and DeviceNet
LD 800DN The LD 800DN adapter, which functions as a gateway
to connect control level networks with device level
networks, provides a router or bridge functionality to
connect EtherNet/IP to DeviceNet. The LD 800DN
provides centralized data storage for data that is
shared between the DeviceNet and Ethernet/IP
networks.
3BSE036351-600 435
Table 143. Recommended Components FOUNDATION Fieldbus
FOUNDATION Due to the large selection of commercially available equipment
Fieldbus manufactured to FOUNDATION Fieldbus Standard (IEC 1158-
2), there is no recommendation for specific FOUNDATION
Fieldbus components.
This statement covers all FOUNDATION Fieldbus equipment,
including:
FOUNDATION Fieldbus filters.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus bus spur distribution terminals.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus termination.
For further details refer to FOUNDATION Fieldbus
documentation and the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Web Site.
436 3BSE036351-600
Table 144. Recommended Components FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed

Ethernet
FOUNDATION All used components must be compatible with the
Fieldbus High FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet specification.
Speed Ethernet
FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed Ethernet use a high
speed bus (for example 100 Mbit/s) and in addition providing
redundancy. The HSE architecture is effectively an enhanced
standard Ethernet model (IEEE 802.3). The HSE Application
Layer contains the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP), Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) and Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
System data High Speed Ethernet (HSE)

Max. devices: Has IP addressing, which can support
unlimited nodes
Max. baudrate: 100 Mbit/s
Typical max. extension:
100m at 100Mbit/s on twisted pair,
2000m at 100Mbit/s on fibre
Vendor specific restrictions apply.
Physical Media: Twisted pair, fibre
Network Topology: Star
3BSE036351-600 437
Table 144. Recommended Components FOUNDATION Fieldbus High Speed

Ethernet (Continued)
FOUNDATION The LD 800HSE is a gateway between an FF High Speed
Fieldbus Linking Ethernet (FF-HSE) subnet and FF-H1 links. It supports device
Device redundancy.
(LD 800HSE) The Linking Device is designed according to class 42c of the
HSE profile, therefore providing the following functions:
It supports up to four separate FF-H1 links. In each of
these links, the Linking Device can be operated as the
Link Master as well as the Time Manager.
Identification of the devices connected to the H1 links.
Configuration of the connected H1 devices by System
Management and Network Management via HSE.
Access to the function blocks of the connected H1 devices
via HSE.
Republishing of process data from one H1 link into
another.
Republishing of process data from H1 to HSE and vice
versa.
See Figure 127 on page 439 for LD 800HSE Interface. For
more information see fieldbus documentation.
438 3BSE036351-600
Figure 127. LD 800HSE Interface
3BSE036351-600 439
Table 145. Recommended Components for Control Networks
HUBS 3Com Hub, 8/TPO (8 ports, RJ45)
(For Non- BayStack, 350/24 (24 port, Star topology, RJ45)
Industrial
Environments)
HUBS Hirschmann Rail Hub RH1-TP (4 ports, RJ45)
(Industrial
Environments)
SWITCHES Hirschmann Rail Switch RS2 (8 ports, Ring, Bus or Star
(Industrial topology RJ45)
Environments On-Time Switch
(FSU100 series, FSU200 series, FSU208, FSR208, FST208)
CABLES Electrical Class 5, or higher, STP
Optical As recommended by Manufacturer of HUBS and
SWITCHES
440 3BSE036351-600
Table 146. Recommended Components Miscellaneous
DIN-rail Phoenix:
TS 35/7.5
Steel, yellow chromated with holes
DIN 46 277, EN 50 022
DIN-rail DIN-rail end support device
Accessories Phoenix: UK 4-TG+ST-BE
(Standard commercially available components)
Cabinets ABB Automation Technology Products, LV systems
Wall cabinet RE820
For 3 DIN-rails
W 800 x H 1200 x D 330 mm (31.5 x 40.1 x 13.0 in)
IP54
Floor cabinet RM550

For 6 DIN-rails
W 840 x H 2125 x D 512 mm (33.1 x 83.7 x 20.2 in)
IP54
See Figure 54 on page 153, Figure 55 on page 154 and
Figure 56 on page 155.
3BSE036351-600 441
Table 147. Recommended Components Process Cables
Mains Various Manufacturers, to Standard;
RKFK 3x1.5 mm2
RS-232C Unitronic
CY 3 x 0.25 mm2
CY 7x 0.25 mm2
Belden
Belden 8723 2 pair (0.34 mm2)
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Unitronic
Suitable Commercially Available Cable.
Belden
Suitable Commercially Available Cable.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus High All cables must correspond to ISO / IEC
Speed Ethernet 11801 2nd edition.
Use in minimum cable of category 5 / link
class D (UTP cables).
Max. length 100 m from CI860 to next
Ethernet device (Twisted pair).
PROFIBUS DP Unitronic
Twisted pair, 0.34 mm2
Unitronic-Bus L2/F.I.P
Belden
Twisted pair, 0.34 mm2
Belden 3079A
442 3BSE036351-600
Table 147. Recommended Components Process Cables (Continued)
PROFINET IO Interface CI871 Use in minimum cable of category 5 (STP
cables).
For more information, refer to Automation System
Network Design and Configuration
(3BSE034463*).
TRIO Fieldbus CI862 See Table 148
Modbus TCP Interface CI867 Use in minimum cable of category 5 (STP
cables).
Ethernet device.
IEC 61850 Interface CI868 Use in minimum cable of category 5 (STP
cables).
Ethernet device.
AF 100 Interface CI869 Twisted pair cable according to IEC 1158-2
fieldbus standard.
Max. 750m per segment.
EtherNet/IP Interface CI873 Use in minimum cable of category 5 (STP
cables).
Ethernet device.
3BSE036351-600 443
Table 148. Cables for the CI862 TRIO Field Bus
Terminat- Ambient
Outer Conduc- DiElec-
ing Indoor Temp. NEC
Cable Diameter tors / tric Volt-
Resistor Installation Rating Rating
in (mm) AWG age
() (C)
Taylor 6201C .35 (8.89) 150 in conduit 2 / #22 30 60 CL2(1)
B3078F(2) .385 (9.78) 150 cable tray(3) 2 / #22 300 75 PLTC/CM
(4)
A9823C .35 (8.89) 150 in conduit 2 / #22 30 60 CL2
C4596(5) .35 (8.89) 150 in conduit 2 / #22 30 60
B89182 .308 (7.82) 150 in plenum 2 / #22 150 200 CL2P
B9207 .33 (8.38) 100(6) in conduit 2 / #20 300 75 CM
B89207 .267 (6.78) 100(6) in plenum 2 / #20 150 200 CMP
A4794 .282 (7.16) 100(6) in plenum 2 / #20 150 200
B9815 .33 (8.38) 100(6) direct burial 2 / #20 80 NONE
B9855 .270 (6.86) 100(6) in conduit 4 / #22 150 60 CM/MP
(6)
B89696 .264 (6.71) 100 in plenum 4 / #22 150 200 CMP/MPP
B89855 .240 (6.10) 100(6) in plenum 4 / #22 150 200 CMP/MPP
B9463 .243 (6.17) 75 in conduit 2 / #20 300 80 CM
A9814 .243 (6.17) 75 in conduit 2 / #22 150 60 CM
B9302 .244 (6.2) in conduit 4 / #22 300 80 CM
(1) Cables rated CL2 can go into a wire tray.
(2) B stands for Belden.
(3) Can also be used in cable tray outdoors.
(4) A stands for Alpha.
(5) C stands for Consolidated.
(6) Use the 110 ohm option on the CI862 if termination is required (see Bus Termination on page 131).
444 3BSE036351-600
3BSE036351-600 445
446 3BSE036351-600
Appendix D Directive Considerations
Relevant products comply with EMC Directive EMCD 2004/108/EC and Low
Voltage Directive LVD 2006/95/EC. The products are provided with a CE marking.
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Modules mentioned in this document, for which the product or packing is CE
marked, are tested and approved according to the following standards:
EN 61131-2 Product Standard, Programmable Controller
- Industrial Environment
EN 61000-6-4 EMC Generic Emission Standard,
Part 4 Industrial Environment
EN 61000-6-2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard,
Part 2 Industrial Environment.
Low-Voltage Directive (LVD)

Modules mentioned in this manual, for which product or packing is CE marked,
comply with the LVD where applicable.
To fulfill the LVD for AC 800M and S800 I/O, the power supplies shall provide a
secondary Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) or a Protected Extra Low Voltage
(PELV). The power supplies described in this manual, SD82X and SD83X, fulfill
these requirements, see Power Supply Units Types SD821, SD822 and SD823 on
3BSE036351-600 447
Low-Voltage Directive (LVD) Appendix D Directive Considerations
page 375 and Power Supply Units - Types SD831, SD832, SD833, and SD834 on
page 382.
If you use other power supplies, except SD82X and SD83X, to provide the 24V
d.c. for AC 800M it is required that they also are CE marked, Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) listed and fulfill the LVD (SELV and PELV) criteria.
The AC 800M modules are IP20 semi-protected equipment and must be mounted
in non-public localities.
448 3BSE036351-600
Appendix E Standards
The information below is applicable to products approved for hazardous locations

according to CSA and/or UL standard UL60079-15 (2002).
Hazardous Location Approval

To comply with CSA and/or UL certification for use at hazardous locations, the
following information is relevant for CSA and/or UL-certified ABB industrial
control products.
Equipment labeled with reference to Class I, Zone 2, AEx nC IIC, hazardous
locations is suitable for use in Class I, Zone 2, AEx nC IIC, or non-hazardous
locations only.
locations and is to be mounted in Class I, Zone 2, AEx nC IIC, hazardous
locations requires an overall enclosure or cabinet with ingress protection rating
of IP54 as a minimum. The enclosure shall be capable to withstand an impact
of minimum 7 joule and installation is only allowed in pollution degree 2
environment or lower.
locations and is to be mounted in Class I, Zone 2, AEx nC IIC, hazardous
locations requires that provisions are made to prevent transient disturbances of
more than 40% of rated voltage.
Explosion hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I,
Zone 2.
Explosion hazard - Do not replace batteries unless the power has been switched
off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
3BSE036351-600 449
Hazardous Location Approval Appendix E Standards
Explosion hazard - Do not disconnect equipment unless the power has been
switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
450 3BSE036351-600
Appendix F Environmental Data
Environmental Data for AC 800M Products

The immunity of products to environmental factors met during operation,
transportation and storage is summarized in this section.
Industrial environment are supplied with power from a high-voltage or medium-
voltage transformer dedicated to supplying installations feeding manufacturing or
similar plants. The existence of industrial apparatus and heavy, frequently-switched
inductive or capacitive loads characterize an Industrial environment. The
associated magnetic fields are high.
Control products incl. I/O-systems are normally intended for Industrial
environment.
Products manufactured by ABB and other companies are normally type-tested or
evaluated to ensure compliance with the environmental standards specified below.
Environmental specifications applicable to peripheral equipment, for example
printers, may differ. Please refer to the relevant product data sheets.
The degree to which the units resist environmental influence depends on their
components and design. System enclosures, cable types and how these are routed
determine the environmental specification of the entire system.
3BSE036351-600 451
Climatic and Mechanical Environmental Conditions Appendix F Environmental Data
Climatic and Mechanical Environmental Conditions
Industrial Environment
Table 149. Industrial Environment
Environmental Specification
Compliance
Environment Transportation Operative with Standard
Factor and Storage Range
Temperature 40 to +70C Cabinets(1): EN 61131-2
+5 to +40C
40 to +60C Units(2):
+5 to +55C
+10 to +40C (3)
Temp. change Min. 3 min within 3C/min. EN 61131-2
Climatic Conditions
temp. range
Humidity RH=595% RH=595% EN 61131-2
RH=2080% (3) RH=2080% (3)
non- max 29 g/m3
condensation non-
condensation
Altitude 3000 m 2000 m EN 61131-2
Pollution degree Degree 2 IEC 60664
Corrosion Copper corrosion Copper corrosion ISA 71.04 class
of 2000 Angstrom of 2000 Angstrom G3
over 28 days over 28 days
452 3BSE036351-600
Appendix F Environmental Data Climatic and Mechanical Environmental Conditions
Table 149. Industrial Environment (Continued)
Compliance
Environment Transportation Operative with Standard
Factor and Storage Range
Vibration 10< f <50 Hz, Continuous: EN 61131-2
0.0375 mm amplitude
(Occasional: 0.075 mm amplitude)
50< f <150 Hz, Continuous: 0.5 g
acceleration
Mechanical Conditions
(Occasional: 1.0 g acceleration)

Emitted noise <55dB (A)
Shock, no 5> f < 8.4 Hz, Continuous: 1.75 mm EN 61131-2
package displacement
(Occasional 3.5 mm displacement).
8.4> f < 150 Hz, Continuous 0.5 g
acceleration
(Occasional 1.0 g acceleration).
Fall in package <10 kg: 1 m EN 61131-2
1040 kg: 0.5 m
>40 kg: 0.25 m
>100 kg: 0.025 m
(1) Cabinets = Enclosures, Cases, Consoles
(2) Units = Subracks, plug-in units, printed circuit boards
(3) Workstation, PC computers and peripherals, for example printers
3BSE036351-600 453
CE Compliance Appendix F Environmental Data
CE Compliance
All products comply with EMC Directive EMCD 2004/108/EC and Low Voltage
Directive LVD 2006/95/EC. Products are CE-marked. Some products require
enclosures, as specified in User Guides, to meet the EMC Directives.
Compliance is verified through conformity with the following minimum standards:
EMC Directive EMCD 2004/108/EC.
EN 61131-2 Product standard, Programmable controllers.
EN 61000-6-4 Generic emission standard.
EN 61000-6-2 Generic immunity standard.
Low Voltage Directive LVD 2006/95/EC.
454 3BSE036351-600
Appendix F Environmental Data Electromagnetic Compatibility and Main Voltage Conditions
Electromagnetic Compatibility and Main Voltage Conditions
Table 150. Electromagnetic Compatibility and Main Voltage Conditions
Compliance with
Industrial Standard
Environment Factor
Environment
Emission Class A EN 55011
Radiated
Conducted
Immunity 10V/m 80M - 1000MHz EN 61000-4-3
Radiated RF field 3V/m 1.4G - 2.0GHz
Electromagnetic Compatibility Conditions
1V/m 2.0G - 2.7GHz

Immunity 10 V EN 61000-4-6
Conducted RF field
Immunity 4kV contact discharge EN 61000-4-2
ESD (Electrical 8kV air discharge
Discharge)
Immunity 2kV power ports EN 61000-4-4
EFT/B (Electrical Fast 1kV other lines
Transient/Burst)
Immunity IEC 60255-22-1
Damped oscillatory
wave
Immunity 30 A/m, cont. EN 61000-4-8
Power frequency 3 A/m for CRTs
magnetic field
Immunity 0.5kV common EN 61000-4-5
Surge 0.5kV differential
3BSE036351-600 455
Electromagnetic Compatibility and Main Voltage Conditions Appendix F Environmental Data
Table 150. Electromagnetic Compatibility and Main Voltage Conditions (Continued)
Compliance with
Industrial Standard
Environment Factor
Environment
Main voltage a.c Unom: 15% to +0%
Electromagnetic Compatibility Conditions
Main voltage DC 15% to 20% of rated

value
Main frequency a.c. 4763 Hz, 5% IEC 60255-6
Main voltage Max 10 ms EN 61000-4-11
interruption, a.c.
Overvoltage
Category Class III
Permanently
connected equipment
Overvoltage
Category Class II
Non-permanently
connected equipment
456 3BSE036351-600
Appendix F Environmental Data Installation Requirements
Installation Requirements
Installation regulations for all products are included in relevant product
documentation. Some general installation rules and applications are given below.
Laying Field Cables

There are no special requirements for laying field and communication cables
connected to products. However:
Cables for short-distance communication without modems should always be routed
at a distance of 10 cm (4 in.) from other cables.
All product-connected cables should be routed at a distance of 30 cm (12 in.) from
non-product power cables (heavy current cables) and 10 cm (4 in.) from class 4
cables of relevant international immunity standards.
Types of Field Cable

Shielded cables are always necessary for:
Communications (see product documentation for cable type)
High-frequency pulse transmission (see product documentation for cable type)
Low-level analog signals, for example Pt100 and thermocouples
For other applications unshielded cables may be used. Digital and analog signals of
the same type can be run on the same cable.
Signal and return conductors should be located on the same cable.
DIN-Rail Mounting
It is required that the DIN-rail is properly attached to either the prefabricated
aluminum profile or a metal sheet with conductive surface. The fulfilment of this
requirement will ensure mechanical stability and enable a stable and well defined
ground plane for the chassis, which is of great importance from EMC perspective.
3BSE036351-600 457
Lightning Protection Appendix F Environmental Data
Lightning Protection
Industrial installations and power plants are normally provided with well-integrated
grounding networks, installed as part of the power distribution system. Such
installations do not require additional lightning protection.
Additional lightning protection is always necessary when:
Cables extend beyond the area covered by the ground line network
Cables are located above ground
Overhead cables are used.
Inductive Load Suppression

Inductive loads, such as relays and contactors connected directly to products, do not
require suppression. The necessary suppression components (varistors or snubbers-
RC units) are installed on the circuit boards.
458 3BSE036351-600
Appendix G Hardware Units for Essential
Automation
A selection of the units described in this book is also available as versions for
Essential Automation. These units have exactly the same technical specifications,
but differ in the following characteristics.
Electronically recognizable - AC 800M hardware status shows text 'eA'
Color - main unit is in gray
Type designation - name ends with '-eA'
Article number - part ends with R2 instead of R1
The Table 151 lists the -eA units, certificates and type approvals that currently
applies to each unit.
Table 151. All -eA Units and Certifications
cULus
cULus
Available eA Modules CE Hazardous Location
Electrical Safety
Class 1 Zone 2 (1)
CI853-eA and TP853 X X X
CI854A-eA and TP854 X X X
CI854B-eA and TP854 X
CI865-eA and TP865 X X X
CI867-eA and TP867 X
3BSE036351-600 459
Appendix G Hardware Units for Essential Automation
Table 151. All -eA Units and Certifications (Continued)
cULus
cULus
Available eA Modules CE Hazardous Location
Electrical Safety
Class 1 Zone 2 (1)
PM851A-eA and TP830 X
PM861A-eA and TP830 X X X
PM866-eA and TP830 X X X
PM891-eA X
BC810-eA and TP857 X X X
BC820-eA and TP850 X
(1) Marking for mounting and interface: Class 1 Zone 2 AEx nA IIC T4 Gc X
460 3BSE036351-600
INDEX
Numerics technical data 284
872 BC820
indicators 369 CEX-Bus interconnection unit 285
fault-finding 214
A indicators 287
ABB Drives 173 installation 108
AC 800M technical data 288
I/O systems 164
safety 13 C
adapters cabinet 69
CI840 164 cabinets
addressing installation in 152
Ethernet 56 cables
AF 100 Interface CI869 RCU Link 95
installation 135 CEX-Bus
Alpha code lock 79, 131 BC810 282
Al-profile 423 BC810 interconnection unit 33
applicable specifications 30 BC820 285
installation 101
B CEX-Bus extension cable
baseplates TK850 101
TP830 37 CEX-Bus interconnection
battery installation 101, 108
external change
change 201 CPU 205 to 206
internal 198 external battery 201
change 198 fuses 210
battery back-up units internal battery 198
SB821 33 CI853
BC810 33 fault-finding 217
CEX-Bus interconnection unit 282 indicators 308
fault-finding 213 installation 122
Functional block 283 technical data 308
indicators 284 CI854
installation 101 communication interface 310
3BSE036351-600 461
Index
fault-finding 218 CI860

indicators 313, 318 communication interface 336
installation 123 fault-finding 225
technical data 313, 318 indicators 338
CI854A installation 130
communication interface 310 technical data 339
fault-finding 218 CI862
indicators 313, 318 bus termination 131
installation 123 communication interface 340
technical data 313, 318 fault-finding 227
CI854B 33 indicators 345
communication interface 310 installation 131
fault-finding 218 technical data 345
indicators 313, 318 CI865
installation 123 fault-finding 228
technical data 313, 318 indicators 349
CI855 installation 133
communication interface 320 CI867
fault-finding 220 fault-finding 229
indicators 322 Functional Block Diagram 352, 372
installation 126 indicators 353
technical data 322 installation 134
CI856 technical data 353
communication interface 324, 347 CI868 355
indicators 326 Functional Block Diagram 356
installation 127 Indicators 357
technical data 326, 350 installation 135
installation 128 indicators 360
installation 129 Indicators 365
462 3BSE036351-600
Index
CI872 Control Builder 157

fault-finding 236 Control Network 159 to 160
Functional Block Diagram 368 DriveBus 129, 174
installation 136 FOUNDATION Fieldbus HSE 130
technical data 369 INSUM 128
CI873 MasterBus 300 126
fault-finding 240 PROFIBUS DP 124
indicators 372 RS-232C 122
installation 137 S100 I/O 127
technical data 374 Control Builder 34
cold restart connect to 157
redundant configuration 189 Control Network
single configuration 189 connect to 159 to 160
COM3 Control Software 55
RS-232C port 88, 92 controller
COM4 reset in single configuration 190
RS-232C port 90, 93 set IP address 163
communication interfaces controller reset
CI840 164 redundant configuration 190
CI853 33 CPU
CI854 33, 164 change 206
CI854A 33, 164, 310 CPU units
CI854B 310 high integrity 33
CI855 33 PM851 33, 37
CI856 33, 164 PM851A 33
CI857 33 PM856 33, 37, 243
CI858 33, 332 PM856A 249
CI860 33 PM860 37, 243
communication ports 88 PM860A 249
compatibility PM861 33, 37, 255
electro-magnetic 65, 247, 253, 447 PM861A 34
compliance PM862 259
standards 30 PM864 33, 37, 263
configure PM864A 34
power supply 178 PM865 33, 37, 267
connect PM866 33, 37, 51, 82, 212, 271
to SM810 115 PM866A 33, 37, 82, 271
to SM811 118 PM867 275
to SM812 118 PM891 279
connect to current consumption 426
3BSE036351-600 463
Index
D CI856 221
DIN-rail CI857 222
mounting 69 CI858 223
mounting dimensions 156 CI860 225
technical data 415 CI862 227
directives CI865 228
EU 30 CI867 229
DriveBus CI868 231
connect to 129, 174 CI869 232
installation 129 CI871 235
CI872 236
E CI873 240
earthing 67 DriveBus 223
electro-magnetic compatibility 65, 247, 253, 447 EtherNet/IP 240
Ethernet address 56 external battery 216
EtherNet/IP Interface CI873 FOUNDATION Fieldbus HSE 225
installation 137 IEC 61850 231
EU directives 30 INSUM 222
low-voltage 447 internal battery 216
extension cable MasterBus 300 220
CEX-Bus 101 MOD5 236
external battery Modbus TCP 229
change 201 PM85x 211
SB821 201 PM86x 211
external battery unit PROFIBUS DP 218
installation 150 PROFINET IO 235
external mains supply cable RS-232C 217
fusing 68 S100 I/O 221
external power source 181 Satt I/O 228
TRIO 227
field cables 66
F
field equipment
fault-finding
powering 178
AF 100 232
FOUNDATION Fieldbus HSE
BC810 213
connect to 130
BC820 214
installation 130
CI853 217
CI854 218
SM811 295
CI854A 218
SM812 301
CI854B 218
fuse
CI855 220
3BSE036351-600 464
Index
external mains supply cable 68 CI862 345

fuse requirements 425 CI865 349
fuses CI867 353
change 210 CI869 360
CI871 365
G CI873 372
grounding 15, 67 PM8xx 185
SM810 291
H SM811 296
high integrity SM812 302
controller 33 installation
SM810 33 AF 100 Interface CI869 135
SM811 33 BC810 101
SM812 33 BC820 108
high integrity controller CEX-Bus 101
SM810 unit 33 CEX-Bus interconnection 101, 108
SM811 unit 33 CI853 122
SM812 unit 33 CI854 123
CI854A 123
CI854B 123
I
CI855 126
I/O systems 164, 451
CI856 127
S100 164
CI857 128
S800 164
CI858 129
I/O units
CI860 130
safety 16
CI862 131
IEC 61850 Interface CI868
CI865 133
installation 135
CI867 134
indicators
CI868 135
872 369
CI869 135
BC810 284
CI871 136
BC820 287
CI872 136
CI853 308
CI873 137
CI854 313, 318
DriveBus 129
CI854A 313, 318
EtherNet/IP Interface CI873 137
CI854B 313, 318
external battery unit 150
CI855 322
FOUNDATION Fieldbus HSE 130
CI856 326
IEC 61850 Interface CI868 135
CI857 330
in cabinets 152
CI858 334
INSUM 128
CI860 338
3BSE036351-600 465
Index
mains breaker 141 L

MasterBus 300 126 lightning protection 66
MOD5 Interface CI872 136 locking device 72, 74
Modbus TCP 134 low-voltage directive 447
ModuleBus 138 to 139
PM851 82, 91 M
PM856 82, 91 mains breaker 67
PM860 82, 91 installation 141
PM861 single configuration 82, 91 mains net filter 67
PM862 single configuration 82 mains supply cable
PM864 single configuration 82 external 68
PM865 in redundant configuration 94, 98 MasterBus 300
PM865 single configuration 82 connect to 126
PM866 in redundant configuration 94 installation 126
PM866 single configuration 82 MOD5 Interface CI872
PM867 in redundant configuration 94 installation 136
PM867 single configuration 82 ModBus
PM86x in redundant configuration 94, 98 installation 134
PM891 91 ModuleBus 164
PM891 single configuration 91 electrical 165
PROFIBUS DP 123 installation 138 to 139
RS-232C 122 optical 165
S100 I/O 127 modules
Satt I/O Units CI865 133 powering 178
SB821 150 remove 76
SM810 115, 118 mounting
SM811 118 DIN-rail 69
SM812 118 mounting dimensions
TRIO Fieldbus 131 DIN-rail 156
voting unit SS822 143
voting unit SS823 143
N
INSUM
noise
connect to 128
signal 17
installation 128
interconnection units
BC810 33 P
internal battery performance data
change 198 PM851/PM856/860 248, 254
IP address PM861 258
set for redundant CPU 163 PM862 262
PM864 266
3BSE036351-600 466
Index
PM865 270 redundancy 51

PM866 274 technical data 256
PM867 278 PM862
PM891 281 CPU unit 259
planning installation in single configuration 82
cable routing 65 performance data 262
cooling 64 Redundancy 51
field cable types 66 technical data 260
field cables 66 PM864
grounding 65 CPU unit 263
lightning protection 66 installation in single configuration 82
temperature 64 performance data 266
to remember 64 Redundancy 51
vibrations 64 technical data 264
PM851 PM865
CPU unit 243 CPU unit 267
installation 82, 91 installation in redundant configuration 94, 98
PM851/PM856 installation in single configuration 82
performance data 248, 254 performance data 270
technical data 244, 250 redundancy 51
PM851A technical data 268
CPU unit 249 PM866
PM856 33 CPU unit 271
CPU unit 243 installation in redundant configuration 94
installation 82, 91 installation in single configuration 82
PM856A performance data 274
CPU unit 249 redundancy 51
PM85x technical data 272
fault-finding 211 PM866A
PM860 CPU unit 271
CPU unit 243 PM867
installation 82, 91 CPU unit 275
performance data 248, 254 installation in redundant configuration 94
technical data 244, 250 installation in single configuration 82
PM860A performance data 278
CPU unit 249 Redundancy 51
PM861 technical data 276
CPU unit 255 PM86x
installation in single configuration 82, 91 fault-finding 211
performance data 258 installation in redundant configuration 94, 98
3BSE036351-600 467
Index
PM891 PM866 51
General 44 PM867 51
installation redundant configuration
redundant 98 cold restart 189
single 91 controller reset 190
installation in single configuration 91 PM86x 94, 98
mounting 74 redundant CPU
performance data 281 set IP address 163
technical data 280 removing modules 76
PM8xx RS-232C
indicators 185 connect to 122
PM8xx units fault-finding 217
see CPU units installation 122
power RS-232C ports
external source 181 COM3 89
field equipment 178 COM4 90, 93
modules 178
power supply 14 S
configure 178 S100 I/O 164
supervision 148 connect to 127
precautions 17 installation 127
product overview 33 S800 I/O 164
PROFIBUS DP 34, 168 Satt I/O Units CI865
connect to 124 installation 133
installation 123 SB821
PROFINET IO external battery unit 201
installation 136 installation 150
protective grounding 67 technical data 412
protective resistor 15 SB822 203
push buttons 187 SD821 375
technical data 381
R SD822 375
RCU Link cable 95 technical data 381
RCU link termination plug 82 SD823 375
recommended components 431 technical data 381
redundancy SD831 382
PM861 51 signal
PM862 51 noise 17
PM864 51 single configuration
PM865 51 cold restart 189
3BSE036351-600 468
Index
controller reset 190 TB850

PM861 82, 91 terminator for CEX-Bus male 82, 84, 91, 416
PM862 82 TB851
PM864 82 terminator for CEX-Bus female 82, 91, 418
PM865 82 TB852
PM866 82 terminator for RCU Link connector 82, 419
PM867 82 TC562 408
PM891 91 technical data 410
SM810 33, 289, 294 technical data
connect to 115 BC810 284
indicators 291 BC820 288
installation 115, 118 CI853 308
technical data 291 CI854 313, 318
SM811 33, 294 CI854A 313, 318
connect to 118 CI854B 313, 318
Functional Block Diagram 295 CI855 322
indicators 296 CI856 326, 350
SM812 33, 300 CI860 339
connect to 118 CI862 345
Functional Block Diagram 301 CI867 353
indicators 302 CI868 357
specifications 30 CI872 369
SS823 393 CI873 374
standards DIN-rail 415
compliance 30 PM851/PM856/860 244, 250
EU 30 PM861 256
TV 30 PM862 260
UL 449 PM864 264
standards.UL 30 PM865 268
supervision PM866 272
power supply 148 PM867 276
switches 187 PM891 280
SB821 412
T SD821 381
TB807 SD822 381
Modulebus terminator plug 82, 419 SD823 381
3BSE036351-600 469
Index
SM810 291 voting units

SM811 296 SS823 33
SM812 302
TC562 410 W
TK212 421 warm start 189
TK212
technical data 421
tool cable 95, 99
TK850
CEX-Bus extension cable 101, 419
CEX-bus extension cable 419
TK851
RCU Link cable 95, 419
TK853 122
technical data 420
TP853 122, 306, 328
TP854 310
TRIO Fieldbus
installation 131
TRIO/Genius Remote I/O 172
TV 30
TUV-Technischer berwachungs-Verein or
Technical Inspection Association 54
Type Designation
SS823 143
type designations
SB821 201
SS822 143
U
UL 30
UL standards 449
unit to baseplate
Alpha code lock 79, 131
V
voting unit SS822
installation 143
voting unit SS823
installation 143
470 3BSE036351-600
Contact us
www.abb.com/800xA Copyright 2003-2014 ABB.
3BSE036351-600
www.abb.com/controlsystems All rights reserved.
Power and productivity

for a better worldTM

3BSE036351-600 - en AC 800M 6.0 Controller Hardware

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

3BSE036351-600 - en AC 800M 6.0 Controller Hardware

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3BSE036351-600 - en AC 800M 6.0 Controller Hardware

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AC 800M

System Version 6.0

Power and productivity

System Version 6.0

Copyright 2003-2014 by ABB.

Release: August 2014

About This User Manual

Site Planning ................................................................................................................... 63

Installing the AF 100 Interface CI869...........................................................................135

Automatic Switch-Over to Backup CPU ...................................................................... 190

DriveBus Interface - CI858 ................................................................................223

Appendix A - Hardware Units

PM867 and TP830 Processor Unit ............................................................................. 275

SB822 Rechargeable External Battery AC 800M Memory Back-up.........................413

Appendix B - Power Consumption

Appendix C - Recommended Components

Appendix D - Directive Considerations

Appendix F - Environmental Data

CE Compliance .................................................................................................. 454

Appendix G - Hardware Units for Essential Automation

Warnings and Information Symbols in the Text Margin

Personnel and Process Safety

Process technicians are to be present when testing and operating process

Before replacing Units

Electrostatic Sensitive Device

GENERAL Equipment Environment

Electrical Shock Hazard During Maintenance

Page 72: It is not allowed to manipulate CEX bus baseplates in a pow-

Page 76: It is not allowed to manipulate CEX bus baseplates in a pow-

Page 82: For PM861/PM862/PM864/PM865/PM866/PM866A insert the

Page 197: Before attempting maintenance or troubleshooting, read the

Page 204: It is not allowed to manipulate CEX bus baseplates in a pow-

Page 449: Explosion hazard - Substitution of components may impair

Page 450: Explosion hazard - Do not disconnect equipment unless the

Page 102: In AC 800M High Integrity Controllers it is required that the

Page 125: Hot swap is supported for CI854A/CI854B (not CI854).

Page 198: Due to the batteries being connected in parallel, it is necessary,

Page 201: Due to the batteries being connected in parallel, it is necessary,

Page 448: The AC 800M modules are IP20 semi-protected equipment

User Manual Conventions

<Feature Pack Content>

Feature Pack functionality included in an existing table is indicated using a

Feature Pack functionality in an existing figure is indicated using callouts.

Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons

Caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept

Information icon alerts the reader to pertinent facts and conditions.

Table 1. Terminology (Continued)

Table 1. Terminology (Continued)

Table 1. Terminology (Continued)

Released User Manuals and Release Notes

PM851A is equivalent with PM851 unless stated otherwise.

AC 800M I/O System

Communication Processor S800 I/O

Figure 1. Example of an AC 800M Controller (except PM891) with an S800 I/O

Tx/Rx External Battery

Figure 2. Processor Unit General View (here shown with PM861)

PM8xx/TP830 Processor Unit General

Figure 3. Processor Unit Assembly General View

RTC Compact Flash